Planning & Installing Infor ERP XA

Planning and Installing Infor ERP XA

Release 9.0

Infor ERP XA

Copyright © 2010 Infor All rights reserved. The word and design marks set forth herein are trademarks and/or registered trade-marks of Infor and/or related affiliates and subsidiaries. All rights reserved. All other trademarks listed herein are the property of their respective owners. www.infor.com

Important NoticesThe material contained in this publication (including any supplementary information) constitutes and containsconfidential and proprietary information of Infor. By gaining access to the attached, you acknowledge and agree that the material (including any modification, translation or adaptation of the material) and all copyright, trade secrets and all other right, title and interest therein, are the sole property of Infor and that you shall not gain right, title or interest in the material (including any modification, translation or adaptation of the material) by virtue of your review thereof other than the non-exclusive right to use the material solely in connection with and the furtherance of your license and use of software made available to your com-pany from Infor pursuant to a separate agreement ("Purpose"). In addition, by accessing the enclosed material, you acknowledge and agree that you are required to maintain such material in strict confidence and that your use of such material is limited to the Purpose described above.Although Infor has taken due care to ensure that the material included in this publication is accurate and complete, Infor cannot warrant that the information contained in this publication is complete, does not contain typographical or other errors, or will meet your specific requirements. As such, Infor does not assume and hereby disclaims all liability, consequential or otherwise, for any loss or damage to any person or entity which is caused by or relates to errors or omissions in this publication (including any supplementary information), whether such errors or omissions result from negligence, accident or any other cause.

Trademark AcknowledgementsAS/400, IBM, iSeries, System i, OfficeVision, Operating System/400, OS/400 are registered trademarks and Distrib-uted Automation Edition is a trademark of IBM Corporation.Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Publication InformationThe product Infor ERP XA was previously know as Infor XA, MAPICS ERP for iSeries and MAPICS XA. These names may still appear in text or graphics within this book.Release: Cross Application Support for Infor ERP XA Release 9.0Publication Date: July 2010

Contents Index Exit Page iii

To the reader

To the reader

This book contains the information about planning and installing the MAPICS XA applications. Theinformation in this book applies only to MAPICS XA.

• Chapter 1. “Before you begin” introduces the information you need to know as you begin the process ofplanning and installing MAPICS XA.

• Chapter 2. “Planning for installation” describes the activities you do to plan the installation, including howto organize your business data and plan the installation tasks effectively.

• Chapter 3. “Installing MAPICS XA” describes the installation activities, including a general description ofeach task and where you can find more information.

• Chapter 4. “After installing MAPICS XA” describes the activities you can do after installation, dependingon the needs of your business.

• Chapter 5. “Managing your business information” describes the activities you do to manage theprocessing of your business information.

Use the appendixes to find checklists for planning and installing, the installation questionnaire for eachapplication that uses one, special forms information, and sample charts of accounts.

Before you use this book, complete the AS/400 education for the basic operating concepts of the AS/400system if you do not have equivalent knowledge.

For a complete list of the books in the MAPICS XA library, see the bibliography included on the MAPICSdocumentation CD.

Contents Index Exit Page iv

Summary of changes

Summar y of c hang es

Release 6 offers the following enhancements/changes:

Enhanced calendar support provides the ability to define and identify multiple calendars and then associatea particular calendar to a warehouse or production line. Questions in FCST, MPSP, and REP have beenaffected by this change.

EPDM activation causes a need to answer the EPDM questionnaire, instead of the PDM questionnaire. WhenEPDM is activated, PDM is no longer available and applications that need Bill of Material, Routing, andFacilities information use EPDM files.

CRP has had some load analysis questions removed. They are now maintainable on Display AMTB11 underoption 6 on menu AMTM10.

Accounting Management Plus (AMplus), enhancements to AP, AR, and GL, does not have its own install/tailor questions. Instead, you must answer a specific question in those applications. See the questionnairesfor AP, AR, and GL for that question.

Materials Management (MM) and Order-Based Production Management (OBPM) are new applications inthis release. Neither of them have questionnaires.

Clarification and more explanation of license management is now included in Chapter 1.

Contents Index Exit Page v

Contents

Contents

To the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Chapter 1. Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1License management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Overview of installation activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Using the installation checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Ordering supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Tapes or CDs you receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Install tapes or CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Source tapes or CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Overview of euro currency support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Application functional enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Toggle among currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Chapter 2. Planning for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1Tailoring your applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Basic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1Application options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1Application prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

Understanding the application interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Accounts Payable interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Accounts Receivable interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Capacity Requirements Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Contract Accounting interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Customer Order Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9COM_Net Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Electronic Commerce interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Enterprise Product Data Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Estimating Quote Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Financial Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Forecasting interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12General Ledger interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13International Financial Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL) interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Inventory Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Knowledge Based Configurator interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Maintenance Management System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manufacturing Performance Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Master Production Schedule Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Material Requirements Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Materials Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Order-Based Production Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Payroll interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Procurement Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Product Data Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Production Control and Costing interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Production Monitoring and Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Purchasing interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Contents Index Exit Page vi

Contents

Repetitive Production Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Sales Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Using the application master files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Chapter 3. Installing MAPICS XA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1Installing the AS/400 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Creating user profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Setting the date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Initial application installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Install/tailor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Entering data into the master files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Chapter 4. After installing MAPICS XA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1Testing your applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Activating interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Establishing MAPICS XA security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Adding environments using extended environment support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Creating tailored sign-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Setting up Group Job support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Setting up Note Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Activating note tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Deactivating note tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Reorganizing notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

Chapter 5. Managing your business information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1Auditing and controlling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Creating an audit trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Backing up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Controlling access to data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Checking for data accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Ensuring the correct sequence of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Scheduling data processing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Daily scheduling considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Multiple batch job queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5Storage capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6MAPICS XA print spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7

Appendix A. Planning information checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Installation Planning Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

Appendix B. Installation questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Using the application tailoring questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Cross Application Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3Define basic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26

Contents Index Exit Page vii

Contents

Capacity Requirements Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30

Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31Define company options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37

COM_Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39

Enterprise Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48

Financial Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51

Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59

General Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-64Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69

International Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71

Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88

Manufacturing Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95MPA application dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96Production Monitoring & Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96

Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96

Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98Define constant options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100

Master Production Schedule Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103

Material Requirements Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105

Payroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-119

Contents Index Exit Page viii

Contents

Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-126Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-130

Production Control and Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-131Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-131Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-139

Production Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-159Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-159Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-161Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-162

Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-176

Repetitive Production Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-187Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-187Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-190

Sales Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-193Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-193Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-195Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-197

Appendix C. Special forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16Manufacturing Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20Payroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21Production Control and Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29Production Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49Repetitive Production Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61

Appendix D. Sample charts of accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1Chart of accounts–manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Income Taxes 9000-9999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Current assets 1000—1499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Fixed assets 1500—1599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Investments 1600—1699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2Other assets 1700—1799 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3Current liabilities 2000—2499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3Long-term liabilities 2500—2999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3Stockholders’ equity 3000—3999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3Income (revenue) 4000—4099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4Cost of sales–material 4100—4199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4Cost of sales–direct labor 4200—4299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4Cost of sales–manufacturing overhead 5000—6999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4Administrative expenses 7000—7999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5Other income and expense 8000—8999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5Income taxes 9000—9999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5Chart of accounts–distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Contents Index Exit Page ix

Contents

Current assets 1000—1499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Fixed assets 1500—1599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Investments 1600—1699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Other assets 1700—1799 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Current liabilities 2000—2499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6Long-term liabilities 2500—2999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7Stockholders’ equity 3000—3999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7Income (revenue) 4000—4099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7Cost of goods sold 4100—4999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7Selling expenses 5000—5999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7General and administrative 6000-6999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Outside services 7000—7099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Materials and supplies 7100—7199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Depreciation and amortization 7200—7299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Rents 7300—7399 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Utilities 7400—7499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Interest and taxes 7500—7599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Other operating expenses 7600—7699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Non-operating income and expense 8000—8999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Income taxes 9000—9999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9General Ledger Master Offline File Load—Chart of Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

Appendix E. Fax Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1Ordering and installing the Fax Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2Faxing documents to your customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2Faxing documents to your vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1

Contents Index Exit Page x

Contents

Contents Index Exit Page 1-1

Before you begin

Chapter 1. Bef ore y ou begin

Read this chapter to find out what you should know before you plan your MAPICS XAinstallation. It contains information about the day to day process you will be followingand what books to refer to as you follow the steps. The rest of this book helps youunderstand the sequence of planning and installing the MAPICS XA applications.

License management...............................................................................................1-2Overview of installation activities..............................................................................1-3Using the installation checklists ...............................................................................1-3Ordering supplies.....................................................................................................1-4Tapes or CDs you receive ........................................................................................1-4Install tapes or CDs ..................................................................................................1-5Source tapes or CDs ................................................................................................1-5Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM) .................................................................1-6Overview of euro currency support..........................................................................1-7Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation..............................................1-13

The acronym CAS that you see frequently in this book refers to Cross ApplicationSupport, the application that you use to install and manage your other MAPICS XAapplications.


Before you begin

License management

MAPICS, Inc. gives you a choice of licenses you can purchase for your company:

Tier user This license allows unlimited users (processor based). Someindividual applications may have a specific limitation on thenumber of users or workstations.

Registered user This license allows one named user per device (PC, 5250terminal, or other workstation) up to the usage limit set byMAPICS. When the user exits MAPICS, the user registrationremains.

Concurrent sessions This license allows multiple user sessions up to a usage limitset by MAPICS.

Note: MAPICS license management allows a 30-day grace period, which allowsyou to exceed your usage limit by 50% for a 30-day period. The grace period beginsthe first time a user who causes the preset limit to be exceeded signs on to MAPICS.During the grace period, all users exceeding the usage limit will receive warningmessages, but will be allowed to run MAPICS. After the grace period has ended, anyattempt to access MAPICS will be denied if it will cause the usage limit to beexceeded.

MAPICS requires a license key for each application. You must obtain a license keyfrom MAPICS each year. Sixty days prior to the expiration date of each applicationlicense, the first user who signs on to MAPICS each day receives a warningmessage. Thirty days prior to the expiration date of each license, all users who signon to MAPICS each day receive a warning message. After the expiration date, allusers are denied access to MAPICS.

To obtain a license key, contact MAPICS, Inc. through the normal telephone supportnumber. The following information must be provided to verify your license:

• Customer number.

• System model number.

• System serial number.

• CPU processor number.

• A list of MAPICS applications you have licensed.

MAPICS, Inc. will provide an 18-character encrypted code, which you must enter intoyour AS/400 in order to activate the license key.

See your MAPICS representative for more information on licenses.


Before you begin

Overview of installation activities

Installing MAPICS XA applications involves a number of activities, fromunderstanding the overall structure of the applications, gathering and organizingyour business data, and getting the people at your company ready for theapplication tasks, to physically installing the AS/400 system and running theinstallation tasks.

Planning is the most important step in the installation process. The following figureshows you the sequence of installation activities and the books you should use.

Using the installation checklists

This book includes two checklists to help you manage the installation (see Appendix A):

• Assignment Checklist. Use this form to record the names of persons ordepartments responsible for each installation step, the date you want the stepcompleted, and the date it is actually completed.

• Installation Planning Schedule. Fill out this schedule, working back from the dateyour system is scheduled to be installed.

Assigning jobs

The assignment checklist identifies the jobs involved in installing and running theAS/400 hardware and operating system and the MAPICS XA applications. The threemajor areas of responsibilities are installation, system operations, and workstationoperations:

• Installation manager. This person is responsible for planning the activitiesnecessary to install MAPICS XA. The installation manager should know allaspects of the business and work with the system users.

Activity Books to usePlan your installation: - Assign jobs - Train people - Order supplies - Organize your business information

User’s Guides/Concept Guides

Install your AS/400 system AS/400 manualsInstall MAPICS XA: - Initial application installation - Install/tailor applications - Convert files (if applicable)

CAS User’s GuideCAS Conversion Guide

Prepare MAPICS XA files: - Enter data into files - Load data from offline files


Manage your business information: - Audit and control data - Schedule the work



Before you begin

• System operator. This person is responsible for the overall monitoring andcontrolling of the system. The system operator handles all CDs, tapes, anddiskettes, loads special forms on the system printer and assists workstationoperators when necessary. The system operator must also be familiar with theAS/400 operating system commands.

• Workstation operators. These people use MAPICS XA for daily businessactivities.

Training the personnel

The assignment checklist also lists the areas in which your personnel need to betrained so they can install and run the AS/400 system and the MAPICS XAapplications.

Ordering supplies

You may need to order the following supplies to use MAPICS XA:

__ Standard computer paper (14-7/8 by 11 inches) for reports

__ Binders to hold application books, reports, and registers

__ Diskettes to enter transactions or to load your files

__ Tapes for daily backups and permanent offline storage

__ Printer ribbons

__ Special forms. Some application functions require preprinted or blank forms thatare a different size than the standard computer paper. For detailed informationon these special forms, see Appendix A.

Tapes or CDs you receive

The programs, files, and other information you need to install and update yourMAPICS XA applications are delivered to you on tapes or CD. You may receive someor all of the following, depending on the kind of order your company places.

• Install• Source• Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM)• File conversion• Miscellaneous

This section describes the tape or CD contents, and the naming conventions for thelibraries. This information helps you understand the tape or CD contents that you seewhen you use the Display Tape (DSPTAP) or Display Optical (DSPOPT) command onthe AS/400 system.

The library names in this section may contain the following characters:

a Application ID (for a list of IDs, see Getting Started with MAPICS XA)

nnnnn Last digit of the release level

_ Last character of the application product current PTF number for theapplication number (found on the back cover of an application book)


Before you begin

Install tapes or CDs

The install tapes or CDs contain the initial installation code and contain one or moreapplications.

The following tables show the libraries used to install CAS and the namingconvention for the libraries used to install other applications.

For example, using this table, if the libraries on the install tape are INSTALL,APPHDR, AMZE01, AMZE02, AMZE03, AMZE21, AMZE22, AMZE11, AMZE12,AMZE13, AMZE14, APPHDR, AMAE0, AMAE1, APPHDR, AMRE0, and AMRE1, thetape contains install code and programs for CAS, AP, and AR.

Source tapes or CDs

The tapes that you receive when you order source code contain:

CAS installation libraries Description

INSTALL Programs used to install applications

APPHDR CAS data area

AMZE01 First part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)

AMZE02 Second part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)

AMZE03 Third part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

AMZE21 First part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

AMZE22 Second part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

AMZE11 First part of the program library (AMALIB)

AMZE12 Second part of the program library (AMALIB)

AMZE13 Third part of the program library (AMALIB)

AMZE14 Fourth part of the program library (AMALIB)

Application installation libraries Description

APPHDR Information about an application

AMaE0 Install/tailor programs and files for an application

AMaE1 AMALIB daily operational programs, display files, and helptext display files for an application

AMaE2 (optional) AMFLIB data structures

Note: If you receive more than one application on a tape, these libraries are grouped togetherfor each application.

Source library Description

AMMLIB Each AMMLIB on the tape contains the source code for oneapplication. For information on how to restore the source code tothe AS/400 system, see the CAS Technical Reference Guide.


Before you begin

Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM)

Updates to the install tapes or CDs are packaged on a PCM tape or CD. The installtape or CD, along with the latest PCM tape or CD, give you the latest MAPICS XApackage. You receive a PCM tape or CD along with the install tapes or CDs if a PCMtape or CD has been released.

The following applications are the exceptions to the naming convention for librarieson PCM tapes or CDs:

PCM libraries Description

ACSAPPLY Programs used to apply application correction sets. If there aremultiple tapes or CDs, this library is only on the first tape or CD.

ACSHDR Information about application correction sets for a specificapplication

M7_HDR CD

M7_nnnnnO Object code for an application that is placed in your installedapplication libraries

M7_nnnnnS Source code for fixes to an application

Application Object LibraryTape or CDSource library

Contract Accounting (CA) CAMnnnnn0 CAMnnnnnS

Enterprise Product Data Management MBEnnnnn0 MBEnnnnnS

Estimating and Quote Management (EQM) EQMnnnnn0 EQMnnnnnS

Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS) FCPnnnnn0 FCPnnnnnS

InterSite Logistic (ISL) MBLnnnnn0 MBLnnnnnS

Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC) KBCnnnnnO KBCnnnnS

Manufacturing Performance Analysis (MPA) MPAnnnnO MPAnnnnS

Multi-Environment InterSite Logistics (MISL) M8MnnnnnO M8MnnnnnS

Procurement Management (PM) M8UnnnnnO M8UnnnnnO


Before you begin

Overview of euro currency support

European Monetary Union (EMU) regulations state that you can use dual currenciesat any time beginning January 1, 1999, through January 1, 2002, if you are workingwith a euro-participating currency. If you plan to consolidate European operations,consider an early migration to euro. If consolidation is not a factor, you may safelywait until the last half of 2001 because:

• EMU regulations state that you can comply with governmental reportingrequirements in either your national currency or euros. Remember, though, thatnational governments may not be able to handle euro-denominated reporting inthe early stages of the transition.

• Your company’s employees will have more time to absorb the euro into theirbusiness thinking.

• Your company’s employees have the right to be paid in your national currencyuntil euro notes and coins become available on January 1, 2002.

• Government payroll reports must be in national currency until January 1, 2002.

Warning: Convert all your systems, offline files, and spreadsheets at the same time.You risk contamination of your data if your conversion is incomplete.

Warning: MAPICS XA Accounting Management Accounts Payable, AccountingManagement Accounts Receivable, Accounting Management General Ledger,Financial Analysis, and Payroll do not support the conversion of local currencyamounts to euro.

Ensure that your business is completely ready to convert to euros before you attemptthis effort. Be aware, though, that the actual conversion process is lengthy, so do notwait to begin the planning process.

MAPICS XA provides two types of assistance to help you deal with euro currency:

• Application functional enhancements: MAPICS XA provides enhancements tohelp you manage trading currency amounts when your trading partners startdoing business in euros in:

- Customer Order Management (COM)- Purchasing/Procurement Management (PUR/PM)- International Financial Management (IFM)- Accounting Management Accounts Payable (AP)- Accounting Management Accounts Receivable (AR).

• Local currency conversion tool: For companies within euro-participatingcountries, MAPICS XA provides a tool to convert your local currency when yourorganization converts your books to euros. Use this tool only once.

The tool, the Euro Currency Conversion Aid (ECCA), is available to allMAPICS XA Release 5 and later customers. Use the Euro Currency ConversionAid Guide to help plan and implement your conversion efforts. ECCA convertsthe local currency values from a euro-participating currency to the euro in one ormore of the following:

- Local currency values in a MAPICS environment- IFM financial divisions in a MAPICS or non-MAPICS administrative division- IFM cash books in a MAPICS or non-MAPICS administrative division.


Before you begin

MAPICS provides these functions in support of euro conversion:

• The ability to:

- Convert current currency through triangulation- Print alternate currencies on trading partner documents and reports- Toggle between currencies: local, trading, or an alternate

• Additional customer and vendor capabilities for multiple currencies

• Additional COM price book capabilities through offline load and euro price bookgeneration

• Additional IFM capabilities for multiple currencies.

See the MAPICS XA user’s guides for information about euro support for the followingspecific applications:

• Cross Application Support• Customer Order Management• International Financial Management• Procurement Management• Purchasing• Accounting Management Accounts Payable• Accounting Management Accounts Receivable.

This table shows how MAPICS XA applications are affected by conversion to euro:

Table 1-1. MAPICS applications affected by euro

ApplicationFunctionalchanges

Localconversion

Accounting Management Accounts Payable Yes No

Accounting Management Accounts Receivable Yes No

Accounting Management General Ledger No No

Capacity Requirements Planning No No

Contract Accounting No Yes

Cross Application Support Yes No

Customer Order Management Yes Yes

EDI support (pre-EC) Yes No

Electronic Commerce No Yes

Enterprise Product Data Management No Yes

Estimate and Quote Management No Yes

Executive Information System Yes Yes

Financial Analysis No No

Finite Capacity Planning/Scheduling No No

Forecasting No Yes

International Financial Management Yes Yes

InterSite Logistics No Yes

Inventory Management No Yes

Knowledge-Based Configurator Yes Yes

Maintenance Management System No No

Manufacturing Performance Analysis No Yes

MAPICS Browser No No

Marketing Monitoring and Analysis Yes No


Before you begin

Application functional enhancements

These functional enhancements are used by many MAPICS XA applications:

• Alternate currency printing• Toggle between currencies• Support for financials, depending on which of the following is installed:

- MAPICS XA Accounting Management financials- MAPICS XA IFM- Third-party financials

• Currency conversion routines• Currency exchange rate overrides• Trading partner reports.

Alternate currency printing

Documents you send to your trading partners can be printed with the details in euro-participating currency or in euro. Where applicable, you can print the totals in botheuro-participating currencies and euros. These include:

• Customer quotes• Invoices• Purchase orders• Debit memos• Shipping schedules• Order acknowledgements• Customer statements• Delinquency notices• Collection letters• Audit confirmation letters.

Master Production Schedule Planning No Yes

Material Requirements Planning No No

Materials Management No No

Multiple Environment InterSite Logistics No Yes

Order-Based Production Management No No

Payroll No No

PowerVision No No

Procurement Management Yes No

Production Control and Costing No Yes

Product Data Management No Yes

PDMPlus No No

Production Monitoring and Control No Yes

Purchasing Yes Yes

Repetitive Manufacturing Yes No

Sales Analysis No Yes

Table 1-1. (Continued)MAPICS applications affected by euro

ApplicationFunctionalchanges

Localconversion


Before you begin

Toggle among currencies

With the introduction of the euro, your customers and vendors may convert to theeuro at any point of time during the transition period. They may have orders, quotes,invoices, and so forth, denominated in both euro-participating currencies and theeuro. The toggling enhancement modifies the current toggling function available inMAPICS. This function allows a users to view a euro-participating order, quote,invoice, and so forth, in euro and is intended to help you handle inquiries about thestatus of a trading partner’s account.

IFM installations. You can toggle between euro-participating amounts and the euro.Depending on the inquiry you use, if the ledger, entity, or transaction is denominatedin a currency that is euro participating, the toggle to euro is available. The followinginquiries are included:

• Online Business inquiry• Personal Ledger inquiry• Cashbook inquiry.

Non-IFM installations. You can see the amounts of a transaction in up to threecurrencies: local, trading, and alternate. The alternate currency is available as analternative to the trading currency when the trading currency is either euro or euro-participating. Toggling capabilities allow you to see amounts in all three currencieswhen they are different. This provides the ability to work with transactions incurrencies other than the currency in which they were entered. This is especiallyuseful during the euro transition period when transactions are sometimes viewed inthe national currency and sometimes need to be looked at in the euro currency.

As an example, a payment is made in euros but the quote, contract, order, or invoiceis denominated in a euro-participating currency. You can view the original transactionin euro even though it was entered in the national currency. You define thetransaction’s alternate currency as the euro in order to toggle.

Another example is one in which a euro-denominated order or invoice will be paid ina euro-participating currency. In this case, you define the alternate currency as thenational currency and toggle from euro to the national currency.

The following MAPICS XA applications use this feature:

• COM• Purchasing/Procurement Management• AP• AR.

Euro support with Accounting Management financials installed

A customer or vendor can only have one primary currency. You cannot change thecurrency ID for these customers and vendors. If a customer or vendor uses a euro-participating currency, you must create a new customer or vendor for the tradingpartner when the trading partner converts to euro. You can copy an existingcustomer or vendor record and change the currency to euro.

• COM Customer Copy: This function copies all default customer information suchas ship-to and tax registration to the new customer number. It defines a referencebetween the newly created customer number and the old customer number. Usecredit checking to account for the new customer number you created.


Before you begin

• Purchasing Vendor Copy: This function copies all default vendor informationand, optionally, all vendor/items records. It also optionally updates the ItemMaster and Item Balance files with the new vendor number.

Warning: Accounting Management Accounts Payable and AccountingManagement Accounts Receivable do not support the conversion of local currencyamounts to euro.

Euro support with IFM installed

Multiple currency vendors. If you use IFM financial applications, you may changethe currency ID in the vendor master file when the trading partner converts to euro.This currency ID will be the default when you enter quotes or orders. You mayoverride the currency to any valid currency ID. Vendor totals in the vendor master fileare converted from the old trading currency to the new trading currency as defined inthe file. Throughout MAPICS XA, the currency is no longer dictated by the currencyID of the customer or vendor; it is defined by either the transaction or the orderrecord.

Multiple currency customers. When IFM and COM are both installed, the IFMfinancial division is the same as a COM company. The customer number created inCOM is a combination of an IFM entity and a two-digit suffix derived from thepersonal ledger defined for the customer.

You can define a personal ledger on the customer master file. This is the default onorder entry. You can override the personal ledger on the customer master on orderentry to any valid personal ledger. A personal account data record must exist for thepersonal ledger override.

Personal accounts. Once you create personal ledgers for IFM accounts receivableand accounts payable for the euro in each financial division, you can “mass create”personal account records for each entity identified. The defaults from the personalledger are used to create the personal accounts.

Credit check. You can credit check IFM entities within a financial division. In COM,any customers within a COM company for the associated entity can be creditchecked in the entity currency.


Before you begin

IFM accounts receivable cash receipt

You may receive a cash payment that is different than the invoice amount because ofrounding differences. Because these differences can have a major impact on IFMcash receipt processing, IFM supports both positive or negative adjustments toinvoices to allow for efficient processing of cash receipts.

IFM alternate currency automated payments. IFM can automatically generatepayments using Payment List and Notes Collection Lists in a currency different fromthe invoice’s transaction or cash book currency. You can:

• Enter an exchange rate override if either the payment currency or the financialdivision currency are non-euro participating.

• Use a payment currency different than the cash book or invoice currency.Payment lists are generated based on the selection criteria and the personalledgers you select.

• Check to ensure valid exchange rates exist for a split payment list. In they exist,the payment currency is the same as the original payment list.

Payment list reports and lists identify the payment currency. Any gain or loss isbased on the payment currency. The generic payment file records show the paymentcurrency amounts.

Euro support with third-party financials installed

If you use third-party financial applications, you may change the currency ID in thecustomer or vendor master file when the trading partner converts to euro. Thiscurrency ID will be the default when you enter quotes or orders. You may override thecurrency to any valid currency ID. Vendor totals in the vendor master file areconverted from the old trading currency to the new trading currency as defined in thefile. Throughout MAPICS XA, the currency is no longer dictated by the currency ID ofthe customer or vendor; it is defined by either the transaction or the order record.

Currency conversion routine

The MAPICS currency conversion routine supports the euro. After you establish anycurrency as euro participating, no direct exchange rate is recognized between aeuro-participating currency and any currency other than euro. All currencyconversions between euro-participating currencies and all other non-euro currenciesare done via the euro in a process known as triangulation.

Currency exchange rate override

Exchange rates between the euro and euro-participating currencies will beestablished. These exchange rates will be fixed and will not change throughout thetransition period. When you set an exchange rate between the currency of the euro-participating countries and the euro, you cannot change this rate, nor can you createa new effective exchange rate. All MAPICS orders or transactions ensure theexchange rate cannot be overridden between the euro and the euro-participatingcurrency, and between two euro-participating currencies during:

• COM order entry• Purchasing order entry• IFM transaction processing.


Before you begin

Trading partner reports

During the transition period, various reports can be printed in euro or the tradingpartner’s currency. After the transition period, when all transactions are in euro, allreports and documents will only be available in euro. These reports are intended foranalyzing trading partner performance and account status, and are not intended tobe sent to your trading partners.

Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation

eWorkPlace (eWP) is the Microsoft®‚ Windows‘™-based graphical user interface forMAPICS XA. The eWP windows co-exist with the MAPICS XA character-baseddisplays, called Host screens. If you are using eWP, you can view the correspondingHost screen for any eWP window, if necessary.

Note: If you have modified a Host screen, the GUI default is used. The default GUIfeature can be enabled or disabled.

The user’s guides and help text contain instructions that reference the hostMAPICS XA screens (called panels and displays) rather than the eWP windows.

To understand how a Host screen instruction relates to an action on a eWP window, itis helpful to look for text on a window control that corresponds to the instruction. Forexample, Cancel on a button and on a File pull-down corresponds to the user guideinstruction “use F12=Cancel to return to the previous display”.

Note: For the instruction “press Enter ”, the corresponding control on an eWPwindow is an OK button.

The following table shows other examples of instructions from the documentationand the corresponding actions you take on the eWorkPlace window.

For more information about eWP, see Getting Started with eWorkPlace.

Documentation instructions eWorkPlace actionsTo change the details of a vendor, type 2 nextto the vendor and press Enter .

Select a vendor, then select Change or type Cfrom the List menu or select Change using theright mouse. Click the OK button.

To create a vendor, use F6. Select Create on the Functions menu or clickthe Create button.

Position to command. If you want to skip to aparticular command, type the full or partialcommand.

Type the full or partial command in theposition to entry field and click the Positionbutton.

Type the information requested and pressEnter .

Type values in or select values for the entryfields and click the OK button.

Type the information requested and use afunction key.

Type values in or select values for the entryfields and click a button or select an action onthe Functions pull-down.

Use the Item Master maintenance displayto......

Use the Item Master maintenance windowto.....


Before you begin


Planning for installation

Chapter 2. Planning f or installation

Before you install MAPICS XA, you need to organize your business data based onthe application functions you want to use. You begin by completing a questionnairefor each application you are installing. Your answers determine the functions youselect. After installation, you load and update the information in the master files toprocess the data you use to run your company.

To complete the questionnaires, you should understand how the applications workwith each other. To prepare data for the master files, you should learn how the filesare used by each application. Read this chapter for an overview of these topics. Seethe application user’s guides for detailed explanations of how your business datarelates to specific application functions, interfaces, and master files.

Tailoring your applications

Each application that you install has a unique set of questions called a questionnaire.Your responses to the questions tailor the application to your company’s needs. Forexample, you can choose which features of an application you want to use andvarious methods of processing your business data. The questionnaires for all theapplications that use install/tailor questions are in Appendix B, “Installationquestionnaires”, except the Contract Accounting (CA) questionnaire is in theContract Accounting User’s Guide and the Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC)questionnaire is in the Knowledge Based Configurator documentation.

You enter your questionnaire responses into the system during the install/tailorprocess described in Chapter 3, “Installing MAPICS XA”. You must complete aquestionnaire the first time you install an application; you can tailor it again anytimeyour business needs change.

The questions are divided into two main categories: basic and application options.

An Install license is required before questions can be answered.

Basic options

The CAS questionnaire contains the basic option questions, such as whichaccounting method your company uses. These questions apply to multipleapplications and all of the companies you support.

Application options

After you answer the basic option questions, you answer the questionnaires for theapplications you are installing or tailoring. The questionnaires are divided intofunctional, constants, and report options. Functional options contain questions abouthow you want to use the application functions, such as whether you want certainapplications to interface. Constants options require information that will not change,such as your company name. Report options allow you to determine formats for theinformation that prints on an application’s reports.



Application prerequisites

Some MAPICS XA applications require other applications or prerequisites.Additionally, optional applications are ones that share data with the primaryMAPICS XA applications. The shared data is not critical to the primary application.Following are the MAPICS XA prerequisite and optional applications:

Primary application Prerequisites Optional application

AMplus (AccountingManagement Plus)

CAS, AP, AR, and GL

AP (Accounts Payable) CAS EC, EIS, GL, IM, PC&C, PUR

AR (Acccounts Receivable) CAS COM, EC, EIS, GL

CA (Contract Accounting) CAS, IM and PDM or EPDM COM, IM, PC&C

CAS (Cross ApplicationSupport)

All MXA applications requireCAS

All MXA applications

COM (Customer OrderManagement)

CAS Acctg. Mgmt. AR or IFM, CA,CRP, EC, PDM or EPDM, EIS,EQM, FCST, Acctg. Mgmt. GLor IFM, IM, ISL, KBC, MISL,MMA, MPA, MPSP, MRP, PCM,PV, REP, SA

COM_Net CAS, COM, IM

CRP (Capacity RequirementsPlanning)

CAS, IM, PC&C or CAS, IM,PDM or EPDM

COM, MRP

EC (Electronic Commerce) CAS AP, AR, COM, IFM, IM, MRP,PUR

EIS (Executive InformationSystem)

CAS AP, AR, COM, GL, IFM, IMPC&C, PUR, PDM or EPDM

EPDM (Enterprise PDM ) CAS EQM, IM, MPSP, MRP, PC&C,PR, CRP

EQM (Estimating and QuoteManagement)

CAS COM, PDM or EPDM, IM, KBC

eWP (eWorkPlace) N/A N/A

FA (Financial Analysis) CAS and GL or IFM N/A

FCPS (Finite Capacity)Planning and Scheduling)

CAS, IM, PC&C, and PDM orEPDM

MRP, PDM+

FCST (Forecasting) CAS and IM AR, COM, IM, MPSP, MRP,PC&C,PM&C, REP, SA

GL (General Ledger) CAS AP, AR, COM, EIS, FA, IM,PC&C, PR, PUR, REP

IFM (International FinancialManagement)

CAS COM, EC, FA, IM, PC&C, PR,PUR, REP

IM (Inventory Management) CAS AP, CA, COM, CRP, EC, EIS,PDM or EPDM, EQM, FCPS,FCST, GL or IFM, ISL, KBC,MISL, PM, MMS, MPA, MPSP,MRP, PC&C, PDM+, PM&C,PUR, PV, REP, SA

ISL (InterSite Logistics) CAS, COM, IM, MRP andPDM or EPDM

MPSP



Note: Throughout this book, we use Accounts Payable (AP), Accounts Receivable(AR), and General Ledger (GL) to mean the Accounting Management AccountsPayable, Accounting Management Accounts Receivable, and AccountingManagement General Ledger applications.

KBC (Knowledge BasedConfigurator)

CAS and COM EQM, IM, PC&C, PDM orEPDM, and MRP

MISL (Multi-environmentInterSite Logistics)

CAS, COM, IM, ISL, MRP, andPDM or EPDM

MPSP

MM (Materials Management) CAS, IM, PUR PM

MMS (MaintenanceManagement System)

CAS, IM and PUR N/A

MMA (Market Monitoring andAnalysis)

CAS and COM IM, MPSP, MRP, PC&C, PDMor EPDM, and REP

MPA (ManufacturingPerformance Analysis)

CAS and IM COM, MRP, PC&C, PDM orEPDM

MPSP (Master productionScheduling Planning)

CAS, IM, MRP and PDM orEPDM

COM, FCST, ISL, PUR

MRP (Material RequirementsPlanning)

CAS, IM and PDM or EPDM AR, CA, COM, CRP, EC, FCST,IM, ISL, MPA, MPSP, PUR,REP

OBPM (Order-BasedProduction Management)

CAS, IM, PC&C COM, ISL, KBC, MISL, MRP,PDM or EPDM, PUR, PM,PM&C

PC&C (Production Controland Costing)

CAS and IM AP, GL or IFM, MPA, PM&C,PR, PUR

PDM (Product DataManagement)

CAS COM, EQM, IM, PC&C, MPA,MRP, MPSP

PDM+ (Product DataManagment Plus)

CAS, PDM IM

PM (ProcurementManagement)

CAS, IM and PUR AP, IFM, IM, GL, PDM orEPDM, PDM+

PM&C (Product Monitoringand Control)

CAS CA, GL or IFM, IM, PC&C, PRand REP

PR (Payroll) CAS CA, GL or IFM, PC&C andPM&C

PUR (Purchasing) CAS and IM AP, EC, EIS, GL, IFM, IM,MMS, MRP, PC&C, PDM,PDM+, PV

PV (Power Visiion) CAS AP, AR, CA, COM, EQM, IM,MRP, PC&C, PDM or EPDM,PUR, REP and SA

REP (Repetitive ProductionManagement)

CAS, IM, and PDM or EPDM MRP, FCST

SA (Sales Analysis) CAS and AR or IFM or IM orCOM

1. If COM, then AR or IFM andIM or2. If AR, then COM and IMand FCST

eWP (Visual Work Place) CAS All AS/400 based MXAapplication(s)

Primary application Prerequisites Optional application



Understanding the application interfaces

Many MAPICS XA applications share or pass information (interface). Someinterfaces are automatic; that is, if the applications are installed, they share or passinformation. You implement other interfaces by answering an install/tailor questionand then activating the interfaces using option 4, Activate/Deactivate Interfaces onthe CAS Maintenance/Change menu (AMZM30). For example:

• If Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Forecasting, or Purchasing isinstalled with General Ledger, the application uses information from the GeneralLedger Master file. This interface is automatic.

• Master Production Schedule Planning uses Forecasting information from theDemand Interface file if you answer Yes to the Forecasting question:

DO YOU WANT TO PASS FORECASTED REQUIREMENTS TO THE DEMANDINTERFACE FILE?

This interface is also automatic.

• Accounts Receivable sends customer and sales representative information toSales Analysis during transaction processing if you answer Yes to the SalesAnalysis question:

SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLEAPPLICATION?

You activate this interface using option 4 on menu AMZM30.

For a summary of interface questions associated with the CAS Activate/DeactivateInterfaces menu option, see the Maintenance/Change chapter in the CAS User’sGuide.

The following table shows the MAPICS XA application interfaces. The table is in twoparts. Look for an X where the applications interface. The footnote tells you whichinterfaces you need to activate through the CAS application. The specific informationthat is passed from one application to another follows the table.



Table 2-1. Interfacing applications, AP through ISL

AP

AP

PR

AR

CA

CO

M

CO

M_N

ET

CR

P

EC

EIS

EP

DM

EQ

M

F/A

FC

PS

FC

ST

GL

IFM

IM ISL

AP X X X Xa X

APPR

AR Xa X X X X

CA X X X X X X

COM Xa X X X X X Xa X Xb X X

COM_NET X X

CRP X X X X

EC X X X X X X

EIS X

EPDM X X X X X X X X

EQM X X X X X

F/A X X

FCST X X X

FCPS

GL X X X X X X

IFM Xa Xa X X X

IM X X X X X X X Xa X Xb X

ISL X X X

KBC X X X X

MM X X X

MMA X

MMS X X

MPA X X X

MPSP X X X X X X X

MRP X X X X X X X

OBPM X X X X X

PM X X X X X

PR X X X Xa

PDM X X X X

PDM+

PCC X X X X X X Xb X

PMC Xa X

PUR X X X X Xa Xa X

REP X X X Xb X

SA X X X X X

a. Activated or deactivated in Cross Application Support using option 4 on theMaintenance/Change menu (AMZM30).

b. See the IFM questionnaire for information on activating the interface.



Table 2-2. Interfacing Applications, KBC through SA

KB

C

MM

MM

A

MM

S

MPA

MP

SP

MR

P

OB

PM

PM

PR

PD

M

PD

M+

PC

&C

PM

&C

PU

R

RE

P

SA

AP X Xa X

APPR X X

AR Xa

CA X

COM X X X X X X X X

COM_NET

CRP X X X

EC X X

EIS

EPDM X X x X X X

EQM X X

F/A

FCST Xa X X

FCPS X

GL X X X X X X

IFM X X X Xa X

IM X X X Xa Xa X X X Xa X Xa X X

ISL X X X

KBC X

MM X

MMA X

MMS X X

MPA X X

MPSP Xa X X

MRP X Xa X X X Xa

OBPM X X

PM X X X X X X

PR X X

PDM X X X X X X X

PDM+ X

PCC X X X

PMC Xa Xa X X Xa

PUR X X X X X Xa

REP Xa X

SA



Accounts Payable interfaces

AP sends information to …

CA For purchased material charged to a contract (through PCC)

EC Payments/remittance advice.

GL Purchase journal distribution and cash disbursements.

IM Cost adjustment transactions.

MMS Invoice transactions to update MRO requisitions, work orders, and inventoryinformation.

PC&C Miscellaneous charge transactions.

PUR P.O. status for invoiced amounts (quantities and prices)

AP receives information from …

AR Deposits added directly to the bank account file.

EC Invoices, invoice credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, andfreight invoices to customers.

PUR P.O. information required to verify that invoiced items were actually ordered,received as ordered, priced as expected, and invoiced as expected.

Accounts Receivable interfaces

AR sends information to …

AP Deposits added directly to the bank account file.

COM Updates customer balance information in the Customer Master file whencash receipts are posted at month end.

GL Cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/loss information when usingmultiple currencies.

SA Updates the Customer Interface or Salesrep Interface file during transactionprocessing.

AR receives information from …

COM Invoice and credit memo summary records; customer information.




Capacity Requirements Planning interfaces

CRP does not send information to the other MAPICS XA applications.

CRP receives information from …

COM Customer orders as work load during the planning run.

IM Calendar, open order, and order detail information.

MRP Planned and firm planned orders for work center loading.

PC&C Open order information.

PDM or EPDM Routing information.

Contract Accounting interfaces

CA sends information to …

AP Deposits added directly to the bank account file.

COM Updates customer balance information in the Customer Master file whencash receipts are posted at month end.

GL Cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/loss information when usingmultiple currencies.

SA Updates the Customer Interface or Salesrep Interface file during transactionprocessing.

CA receives information from …

COM Invoice and credit memo summary records; customer information.


PDM or EPDM Production facility and product structures.



Customer Order Management Interfaces

COM sends information to …

AR Invoice and credit memo summary records.

CA Provides customer order for releases.

CRP Customer orders as work load during the planning run.

EC Responses to requests for quotes, P.O. acknowledgements, P.O. changeacknowledgements, advance shipping notices, invoices, and creditadjustments/memos.

FAX Fax interface, to Telex/Fax/400: the documents that are sent using EC canalso be faxed.

FCST Saves customer order demand information for each period which allowsforecast recomputation.

GL Invoice information to account for information in the general ledger; salesinformation to print GL worksheet during month end close.

IFM Invoice, credit memo and, optionally, cost of sales information.

IM Post items into inventory balance records when orders are entered ormaintained; updates allocation quantities in ITEMBL; can createmanufacturing order per customer order release; intrawarehousetransactions for end item kit components from pick confirmations; salesshipment transactions from shipment confirmations; updates on-handquantities in ITEMBL when orders are released; location quantities andallocations to location detail and allocation files.

MMA Sales and booking information.

MPA Booking information during batch update.

MPSP Customer order/intersite order backlog and option backlog for MasterSchedule Planning and Available to Promise inquiry; accumulates salestransactions and supplies customer orders to production planning andmaster schedule planning.

MRP Customer and intersite orders to show demand during a planning run;customer order and option backlog for Available to Promise inquiry; SignalsMRP for update each time a change is made to ITEMBL.

OBPM Customer order line item release information.

REP Manufacture due dates and order quantities for developing productionschedules.

SA Customer, salesrep, and end item information to report amounts, quantities,and shipments.

COM receives information from …

AR Updates the Customer Master file balance information when cash receiptsare posted and account balances aged at month-end.

EC Requests for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, receiving advice, andshipping schedules.

IFM Credit limits, amounts owed, and due dates.



IM Manufacturing order data availability and sales, quantity, costing, and taxcode information; updates customer order release records with number ofmanufacturing order released for the line item.

ISL New, changed, deleted, and shipped intersite transfer orders for shipment toanother warehouse.

MPSP Available to Promise results can be accessed in customer order entry andinquiry.

MRP Customer data in the form of customer order manual and informationalrequirements.

OBPM Updated customer order release records with the number of themanufacturing order created to build the item.

PDM/EPDM Standard features/options information used to price and cost end itemswith features.

REP Updated manufacturing due dates for ordered line items.

SA Edits salesrep number.

COM_Net Interfaces

COM_Net sends information to:

COM Sends customer orders and quotes to the offline files.

COM_Net receives information from:

COM Customer and product information required for customer order entry.

IM Item status information for availability inquiry.

Electronic Commerce interfaces

EC receives inbound EDI transactions from trading partners and sends theinformation to …

AP Invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and freightinvoices to customers.

AR Payments/remittance advice.

COM Requests for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, receiving advice, andshipping schedules.

IFM Invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and freightinvoices from customers.

Electronic

Commerce

MAPICS

applications

Trading

partners Outbound

InboundReceive

Send



IM Ship notices (advance shipping notices).

MRP Planning schedules

PUR Responses to requests for quotes, P.O. acknowledgements, and P.O.change acknowledgements.

Note: Trading partners can be other MAPICS XA environments.

Before you can load business transactions into MAPICS XA business applications,the receiving business entities must first exist. If not, you must create them in theappropriate application.

EC receives the following outbound information and sends the EDI transactions totrading partners:

AP Payments/remittance advice.

COM Invoices, credit adjustments, responses to requests for quotes, P.O.acknowledgements, P.O. change acknowledgements, and ship notices(advance shipping notices).

IM Receiving advice.

MRP Planning schedules.

PUR Request for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, and shippingschedules.

Note: The business documents you send should be according to the standardmethodologies of the interfacing MAPICS business application. The only requirementis that you must set media flags in the applications for each business document youwant to send by means of EC.

Refer to the EC User's Guide for additional information.

Enterprise Product Data Management interfaces

EPDM sends information to …

CA Production facilities product structure information.

COM Product structure records

EIS Production facility information.

FCPS Item process and item characteristics.

IM Product structure and costing information; item master information.

MPSP Item process and item characteristics.

MRP Item process and item characteristics.

OBPM Item process and item characteristics.

PC&C Production facility costs, capabilities and routing information.

PUR Routing information.



EPDM receives information from …

EQM Engineering records, i.e., items, bills, and routings.

PC&C Work center statistics and average operation hours.

REP Work center statistics and average operation hours.

Estimating Quote Management interfaces

EQM sends information to …

CA Cost information from quotes.

COM Accepted quotes are converted to customer orders. database for expectedrepeat orders.

PDM or EPDM Bills of materials and routings can be added to the manufacturingdatabase for expected repeat orders.

KBC Bill creation and routing information for quotes.

IM New item information for inventory files; MRP lead time.

EQM receives information from …

KBC Bill creation and routing information for quotes.

PDM or EPDM Existing items can be copied and modified.

Financial Analysis interfaces

F/A receives information from …

GL Ledger balances and chart of accounts.

IFM Chart of accounts.

F/A sends information to …

GL Automatic journal entries, budgets, and depreciation journal entries.

IFM Depreciation journal entries. Be aware that IFM interfaces only with the FixedAsset portion of Financial Analysis.

Forecasting interfaces

FCST sends information to …

IM Order point and safety stock quantities.

MPSP Forecast requirements to the DMDIFF.

MRP Forecast requirements for master level items to the Requirements file.



FCST receives information from …

COM Saves customer order demand information for each period that allowsrecomputation of forecast.

IM Warehouse information.

MPSP Forecast data and, if COM not installed, receives backlog information fromDMDIFF.

MRP Forecast data in the form of manual and information requirements.

SA Item summary information for Forecasting implementation.

General Ledger interfaces

GL does not send information to the other MAPICS XA applications.

GL receives information from …

AP Purchase journal distribution and cash disbursements.

AR Information about cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/lossinformation when using multiple currencies.

COM Invoice information; sales information to print GL worksheet during monthend close.

F/A Depreciation transactions, automatic journal entries, and new budgetamounts when a proposed budget is posted.

IM Transaction history.

PC&C Labor, overhead, machine, and miscellaneous cost information.

PM&C Transaction history.

PR Summary of all gross pay, tax, deduction, and net pay entry requests.

PUR Purchase journal distribution.

REP Transaction cost information.

International Financial Management interfaces

IFM sends information to …

COM Credit limits, amounts owed, and due dates.

IM Cost adjustments.

PC&C Miscellaneous charges and outside operations.

PUR Updated invoice information.

IFM receives information from …

COM Invoice, credit memo and, optionally cost of sales information.

EC Regular invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, andfreight invoices from customers.

F/A fixed assets Journal transactions.

IM General ledger transactions.

PC&C General ledger transactions.



PR General ledger transactions.

PUR Purchase order and receiving data from which IFM can generate suggestedinvoices.

REP General ledger transactions.

InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL) interfaces

ISL/MISL sends information to …

COM Offline load information for released intersite orders.

IM Intersite shipping and receiving (TW) and adjustment (IA) transactions (ifenabled) and order balances.

MPSP Planned future order demands from requesting warehouses for masterscheduled items.

MRP Planned future order demands from requesting warehouses for MRPplanned items.

ISL/MISL receives information from …

COM Validated customer numbers and container types.

IM Calendar, item, item balance, warehouse information, inventory locationslead times, and planning process codes.

MRP Released or changed intersite orders.

OBPM Released or changed intersite orders.

Inventory Management interfaces

IM sends information to...

CA Charges stock items to manufacturing at the tailored inventory costingmethod.

COM Manufacturing order date availability and sales, quantity, costing, and taxcode information; updates customer order release records with number ofmanufacturing order released for the line item.

CRP Calendar, open order, and order detail information.

EC Receiving advice.

FCST Warehouse and calendar information.

GL Journal entries from transaction processing.

IFM General ledger transactions.

ISL/MISL On-hand, location, lead-times, and allocation data.

KBC The manufacturing order number for the configured item and the locationswhere the configured item is stocked.

MM Warehouse information, item warehouse information, location information,location quantity information, and manufacturing information.

MMS Purchase receipt information for MRO items.

MPSP Calendar, item balance, and order status, period sales, and productionreceipts for planning runs; lead times and planning process codes.



MRP On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, planning process codes,and calendar information.

OBPM On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, and calendarinformation.

PC&C Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous costrecords when orders are released; releases orders and processes receiptsinto inventory from WIP and component issues; calendar information.

PM Default buyer, account number, stocking and purchase units of measure andconversion factor, and unit price for use on requisitions, quotes, andpurchase orders.

PM&C Summary order information and detailed component allocations.

PUR Purchase order status via purchase order receipt transactions. Requisitionsand purchase orders for order point items.

REP Calendar information; schedule control information; defines line supplylocations and onhand allocations.

SA Sales and quantity information by updating or adding items in the ItemInterface file during sales transaction processing.

IM receives information from...

AP Cost adjustment transactions.

COM Posts items into inventory balance records when orders are entered ormaintained; updates allocation quantities in ITEMBL; ability to performmanufacturing per customer order release; intrawarehouse transactions forend item kit components from pick confirmations; sales shipmenttransactions from shipment confirmations; updates on-hand quantities inITEMBL when orders are released; location quantities and allocations tolocation detail and location allocation files.

EC Advance shipping notices (despatch advices).

EPDM Item process, bill of material, and routing information and itemcharacteristics for manufacturing orders.

FCST Order point and safety stock quantities.

IFM Cost adjustment transactions.

ISL/MISL Intransit inventory and adjustments and intersite order status.

KBC Configuration information, including the configured item cost, when amanufacturing order is released for a customer order.

MMS Work order, task, and cost code information to store with the receipttransaction; general ledger transactions which pass through IM's GeneralLedger Interface file.

MPA Cycle count updates.

MRP Selects manufacturing and purchase orders for release; updates orders thatwere rescheduled or canceled.

OBPM Added, changed, complete, or closed manufacturing orders.

PC&C Component scrap information.

PDM Bill of material and costing information; Item master information.

PM Vendor accept (VA), Reopen and Complete (RP/PQ) transactions.



PM&C Updates component issues and receipts.

PUR Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order; costadjustments from invoice entry.

REP Inventory management history and schedule data base; schedule close andpurge information; updates the component issues and receipts.

Knowledge Based Configurator interfaces

KBC sends information to …

COM Order entry information.

EQM Bill creation and routing information.

IM Configuration, including the configured item cost, when a manufacturingorder is released for a customer order.

KBC receives information from …

COM Order entry information.

EQM Bill creation and routing information.

IM The manufacturing order number for the configured item.

PDM or EPDM Single level product structures for phantom items.

Maintenance Management System interfaces

MMS sends information to …

IM Work order, task, and cost code information to store with the receipttransaction; general ledger transactons which pass through IM's GeneralLedger Interface file.

PUR Purchase orders for MRO items.

MMS receives information from …

AP Actual invoice amounts and quantities to update MRO requisitions, workorders, and inventory information.

IM Purchase receipt information for MRO items.

PUR Maintenance, Repair, and Overhead (MRO) information on various reportsand inquiries; vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data;contract prices for MRO requisitons.

Manufacturing Performance Analysis interfaces

MPA sends information to …

IM Cycle count updates.

MPA receives information from …

COM Booking information during batch update

IM Manufacturing order and IM transaction information

MRP Planned order information.



Master Production Schedule Planning interfaces

MPSP sends information to …

MRP Extracts master production schedules for MRP planning activities; updatesmaintenance changes to firm planned orders.

MPSP receives information from …

COM Customer order backlog and option backlog for master schedule planningand available-to-promise; accumulates sales transactions and suppliescustomer orders to production planning and master schedule planning.

EC Expected customer orders received via EDI from trading partners aresupplied to production planning and master schedule planning.

EPDM or PDM Item process and bill of material information and item characteristics.

FCST Forecast requirements to the Demand Interface file.

IM Calendar, item balance, and order status and period sales and productionreceipts for planning runs; lead times and planning process codes.

ISL/MISL Demand from both released and planned intersite orders against awarehouse are supplied to production planning and master scheduleplanning. ISL/MISL creates customer orders in COM for released/openintersite orders against a warehouse. ISL/MISL passes the demand fromplanned intersite orders directly from MRP in the requesting warehouse toMPSP in the supplying warehouse, where it is added to both forecasts andcustomer orders.

MRP Updates to planned orders for master scheduled items.

PUR Open purchase orders and requisitions.

Material Requirements Planning interfaces

MRP sends information to …

APPR (MMS) Purchase orders and purchase requisitions for approval.

CRP Planned and firm planned orders for work center loading.

EC Purchase planning schedules can be sent to vendors you have set up astrading partners in the EC application.

IM Planned orders tagged for release; updates orders that should berescheduled or cancelled.

ISL/MISL Planned demands against supplying warehouses, and released orders,resulting in actual demand against supplying warehouses.

MMS Purchase orders requiring approval.

MPSP Planned orders that are tagged for release in MRP's order review to updatemaster schedules.

OBPM Planned orders tagged for release; updates orders that should berescheduled or cancelled.

PUR Purchase requisitions and purchase orders for release via purchasing autorelease or order release. Purchase planning schedules requiring buyerreview.



REP Planned and firm planned order which REP uses as net demand to plan itsschedules.

MRP receives information from …

COM Customer orders in the form of KBC planned orders that are manual andinformational requirements, and for released intersite orders against thesupplying warehouse.

EC Expected customer orders can be received from customers you have set upas trading partners in the EC application.

EPDM or PDM Item process and bill of material information and item characteristics.

FCST Forecast and requirements for master level items.

IM On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, planning process codes,and calendar information. Signals MRP to replan when certain changes aremade to ITEMBL.

ISL/MISL Planned demand from requesting warehouses, and intersite orderbalances and status for open orders that are scheduled receipts.

MPSP Master production schedules for MRP scheduling activities.

PUR Scheduled receipts for purchased parts.

REP Planned and released schedules for schedule controlled items that are usedin the planning run. Updates to MRP planned orders and scheduled receiptsbased on scheduled maintenance activity in REP.

Materials Management interfaces

MM sends information to …

IM Updates the on-hand quantities through PH transactions and updates thereceipt information through RD, RI, RP, and VR transactions.

PUR Updates purchase order receipt information.

MM receives information from …

IM Warehouse information, item warehouse information, location information,location quantity information, manufacturing order information.

PUR Purchase order information.

COM Customer order information.

Order-Based Production Management interfaces

OBPM sends information to …

COM Updates customer order line item releases with the number of themanufacturing order created to build the item.

IM Order information for created, changed, and closed manufacturing orders.

ISL/MISL Order information for created, changed, and cancelled intersite orders.

EPDM/PDM Facility output averages.



PM/PUR Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, andcancelled purchase requisitions and orders.

OBPM receives information from …

COM Customer order line item release information.

EPDM/PDM Item characteristics, and item process, bill of material and routinginformation for manufacturing items.

IM Item on hand, on order, allocation and lead time information, and calendarinformation.

MRP Recommendations to create, defer, expedite, or cancel manufacturing,intersite, and purchase orders.

Payroll interfaces

PR sends information to …

CA Actual labor costing for a contract (through PC&C)

GL Summary of all gross pay, tax, deduction, and net pay entry requests.


PC&C Job-related information to keep track of job order cost that did not come fromPM&C.

PR receives information from …

PDM or EPDM Production facilities by site.

PM&C Time, attendance, and shop order records.

Procurement Management interfaces

PM sends information to …

AP Purchase order information required to verify that invoiced items wereactually ordered, received as ordered, priced as expected, and shipped asexpected.

APPR Approval requests for requisitions and purchase orders; invoice quantity andamount information that updates the purchase order.

IFM Purchase order and receiving data from which IFM can generate suggestedinvoices.

IM Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order.

MMS Vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data and contractprices for MRO requisitions.

MRP Scheduled receipts for purchased parts.

PM receives information from …

AP Invoicing status to determine when purchase orders are ready to close.

APPR Information on approval status used to update requisitions and purchaseorders.

GL Verification of account numbers and unit/natures.



IFM Updated invoice data.

IM Purchase order receipt tracking via purchasing transactions.

MMS Purchase orders for MRO items and related ledger transactions frompurchased MRO item receipts.

MRP Automatically generates planned requisitions and purchase orders forrelease via purchasing auto release.

OBPM Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, andcancelled purchase requisitions and orders.

PDM/EPDM Routing information.

Product Data Management interfaces

PDM sends information to …

COM Usage of standard features/options, tax codes, and item master information.

CRP Standard routing and production facility and variable capacity calendar.

IM Product structure and costing information; item master information.

MPSP Product structure, production facility, and item characteristics.

MRP Product structure and item characteristics.

PC&C Production facility costing and routing information.

PUR Routing information.

REP Production facility information; routing information; bill of materialinformation; variable capacity calendar.

SA Item master information.

PDM receives information from …

PC&C Work center statistics and average operation hours in routing

REP Average yield routing information.

PDMPlus Offline file load transactions for item, routing, and product structure masterfiles.

Production Control and Costing interfaces

PC&C sends information to …

CA Labor and job related activity and status of completed operations. Sourcetransactions for labor and miscellaneous charges are extracted from shopactivity update transactions.

CRP Open order information.

FCPS Open manufacturing orders for finite scheduling.

GL Labor, overhead, machine, and miscellaneous cost information.


IM Component scrap information.



PDM or EPDM Work center averages and average/actual routing information.

PM&C Open order information.

PC&C receives information from …

AP Cost of outside operations; miscellaneous charges.

PDM or EPDM Product structure lead time adjustmens. Production facility costs,capacities, and routing information.

IM Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous costrecords when orders are released; releases orders and processescomponent issues and receipts into inventory from WIP; calendarinformation.

OBPM Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous costrecords when orders are released; releases orders and processescomponent issues and receipts into inventory from WIP; calendarinformation.

PM&C Updates shop activity transactions and operation status.

PR Transfers job-related information to keep track of job order cost that did notcome from PM&C.

PUR Cost of outside operations; miscellaneous charges.

Production Monitoring and Control interfaces

PM&C sends information to …

GL Transaction history.

IM Updates component issues and receipts.

PC&C Updates shop activity transactions and operation status.

PR Time and attendance and shop order information.

REP Updates the component issues and receipts and the replenishmentrequests.

PM&C receives information from …

IM Summary order information and detailed component allocations.

PC&C Open order information.

PR Employee data.

REP Schedule information.



Purchasing interfaces

PUR sends information to …

AP Purchase order information required to verify that invoiced items wereactually ordered, received as ordered, priced as expected, and shipped asexpected.

APPR Approval requests for requisitions and purchase orders.

EC Information about vendors, quotes, purchase orders and changes,remittances, and shipping schedules so the appropriate EDI transactionscan be sent.

GL Purchase journal distribution.

IFM Purchase order and receiving data from which IFM can generate suggestedinvoices, defaults for generating estimated IFM taxes, installment payments,and notes.

IM Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order; costadjustments from invoice entry.

MM Purchase order information.

MMS Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul (MRO) information on various reportsand inquiries; vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data;contract prices for MRO requisitions; actual invoice amounts and quantities.

MRP Scheduled receipts for purchased parts.

PC&C Cost of outside operations and miscellaneous charges.

PUR receives information from …

AP Invoicing status to determine when purchase orders are ready to close.

APPR Information on approval routes, approver IDs and limits, and approval statusused to update requisitions and purchase orders.

EC Information about quote responses, purchase order acknowledgements,invoices and credit memos so that the appropriate EDI transactions can bereceived.

IFM Updated invoice data, estimated IFM taxes, and estimated installmentpayment schedules. Purchase orders generated as part of an interdivisiontransfer.

IM Purchase order receipt tracking via purchasing transactions, purchaseorders, releases, or requisitions generated for order point items from theReorder report.

MM Updates purchase order receipt information.

MMS Purchase orders for MRO items and related ledger transactions frompurchased MRO item receipts.

MRP Automatically generates planned requisitions and purchase orders forrelease via purchasing auto release.

OBPM Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, andcancelled purchase requisitions and orders.

PDM/EPDM Routing information.



Repetitive Production Management interfaces

REP sends information to …

COM Updates manufacturing due dates.

GL Transaction cost information and general ledger transactions.


IM Inventory management history and schedule data base; schedule close andpurge information; updates the component issues and receipts.

MRP Schedule information to cause adjustments to planned orders andschedules.

PM&C Schedule information for transaction processing.

REP receives information from …

COM Manufacturing due dates and order quantities into schedule extract functionfor developing production schedules.

IM Inventory status information,and calendar by line.

MRP Planned and firm planned orders which REP can use as net demand to planits schedules.

EPDM/PDM Production facility information; routing information; bill of materialinformation, variable capacity calendar, and default line and finished goodlocation.

PM&C Component issues and receipts and replenishment requests.

Sales Analysis interfaces

SA sends information to …

COM Edits salesrep number.

FCST Item summary information for Forecasting implementation.

SA receives information from …

AR Updates the Customer Interface or Salesrep Interface file during transactionprocessing.

COM Customer, salesrep, and end item quantities and amounts.

IM Sales and quantity information by updating or adding items in the ItemInterface file during sales transaction processing.

Using the application master files

When you install an application, the install/tailor process loads all the files for thatapplication. After installation, you need to add your business data to the applicationmaster files. It is very helpful to gather the master file information while you areplanning for installation. The application user’s guides describe the files and filemaintenance procedures in detail and whether an application shares file informationwith another application.




Installing MAPICS XA

Chapter 3. Installing MAPICS XA

This chapter contains information about the following topics:

Installing the AS/400 system ....................................................................................3-2Creating user profiles ...............................................................................................3-2Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level ..........................................3-3Setting the date format .............................................................................................3-3Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications................................................3-3Initial application installation ....................................................................................3-4Install/tailor ...............................................................................................................3-4Entering data into the master files............................................................................3-5



Installing the AS/400 system

Although information about installing the hardware and operating system issummarized here, the actual instructions are in the AS/400 system books.

Installing the AS/400 system involves installing the hardware and installing theoperating system. Physical installation of your system hardware involves unpacking,setting up, and testing the components (workstations, printers, keyboards, and soon) that make up your system. Installation of the AS/400 operating system involvesloading the support programs supplied by IBM into the system after the physicalinstallation is complete.

If you plan to use your own programs in a MAPICS XA environment, see the“Extended Environment Support” chapter in the CAS User’s Guide. It givesinformation on maintaining the MAPICS XA library list when you have usermodifications.

Creating user profiles

Use the following command to create an AS/400 user profile for each authorizeduser. The profile contains the:

• User profile name, the name by which you want the system to know the user.

• AS/400 password value, the value requested when the AS/400 Sign On displayappears.

CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(AMAPICS)

PASSWORD(AS/400 password value)

SPCAUT(*NONE)

MAXSTG(*NOMAX)

PTYLMT(4)

TEXT(’MAPICS XA USER PROFILE— user profile name’)

Note: The install process normally creates the MAPICS XA user profile AMAPICS.If this profile ever needs to be recreated, use the following command:

CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(AMAPICS)

PASSWORD(AS/400 password value)

SPCAUT(*JOBCTL)

(*SAVSYS)

MAXSTG(*NOMAX)

PTYLMT(4)

TEXT(’MAPICS WS OPERATOR USER PROFILE— user profile name’)

When you are running MAPICS XA, you can use any user profile that you create orany user profiles provided with the system. If you use system-provided profiles suchas QSYSOPR for MAPICS XA, change the MAXSTG parameter to *NOMAX to avoidstorage-exceeded errors. Use the CHGUSRPRF command to make the change.

For more detailed information on this command and the parameter values, see themanual for the AS/400 operating system.



Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level

IBM supplies two subsystem configurations for the AS/400. MAPICS XA must use themore complex configuration, where QCTL is the controlling subsystem, QINTER isthe interactive subsystem, and QBATCH is the batch job subsystem. To change yoursubsystem configuration from QBASE to QCTL, use the CHGSYSVAL command tochange the system value QCTLSBSD to QCTL and IPL your system. For moreinformation, see “Characteristics of the Shipped System” in the AS/400 WorkManagement Guide. MAPICS XA is designed to run in the complex configuration touse system resources efficiently.

MAPICS XA is designed to operate with a security level of 40. For more information,see the AS/400 Security Concepts and Planning Manual. The AS/400 system has fivesecurity levels that are set by putting a 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 in the system valueQSECURITY.

Setting the date format

The date format on MAPICS XA displays and reports is the same format as the oneyou specify for the AS/400 system.

The date formats supported by MAPICS XA are:

• MM/DD/YY (month/day/year)• DD/MM/YY (day/month/year)• YY/MM/DD (year/month/day)

To change the date format, see the AS/400 Work Management Guide.

Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications

Although the information about installing the MAPICS XA applications is summarizedhere, the actual step-by-step process is in the “Install/Tailor Applications” chapter inthe CAS User’s Guide.

The installation process consists of three parts:

• Add license keys• Initial application installation• Install/tailor

Note: Before you install MAPICS XA, rename or delete any non-MAPICS library onyour system with the same name as a MAPICS XA library, except for libraries that arevalid in MAPICS XA environments other than the one you are using for installation.For a list of the MAPICS XA libraries, see the Getting Started with MAPICS XA book.

Add license keys. Follow instructions received from MAPICS.



Initial application installation

You run initial application installation when you are installing your first MAPICS XAapplication. You run it again only if you want to grant authority to additional tape orCD devices or if you want to create a MAPICS XA environment without copying filesfrom another environment.

During initial application installation, the system loads the MAPICS XA install libraryand the CAS programs and files.

Install/tailor

You run install/tailor:

• The first time you install MAPICS XA.

• Anytime you want to change an answer for a question in a MAPICS XAapplication that is already installed. This procedure is called application tailoring.

• Anytime you want to add other MAPICS XA applications.

During the install/tailor process the system loads the programs and files for theapplications you are installing and you answer the questions for all the applicationsyou are installing or tailoring. Whenever you answer the questions, the SystemControl (SYSCTL) file is updated.

You do not need to run install/tailor separately for each application.

Each time you run install/tailor, all of the CAS basic option questions (questions X01through X06) appear at the beginning of the questionnaire. When you install morethan one application at a time, you see the basic option questions only once.

The following table summarizes the general update and review tasks associated withthe install/tailor process.

Task Menu Option

Enter your answers the first time youinstall an application

CAS Master Menu (AMZM00) Option 6, Install/Tailor Applications

Change your answers for anapplication

CAS Main Menu (AMZM00) Option 6, Install/Tailor Applications

Review your answers by application orby question

CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10) Option 4, Questionnaire Responses–by Application Option 5, QuestionnaireResponses–by Question

Activate or deactivate the interfacesyou selected on the questionnaire

CAS Maintenance/Change menu(AMZM30)

Option 4, Activate/DeactivateInterfaces

Review the interfaces you activatedusing the CAS Maintenance/Changemenu (AMZM30)

CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10) Option 4, Questionnaire Responses–by Application; use F09 on displayAMZS81

Print report AMZS8 showing thequestionnaire answers and theactivated interfaces for your installedapplications

CAS Reports menu (AMZM20) Option 3, Questionnaire Responses



Entering data into the master files

After you run install/tailor and the application programs and files are on the system,you enter your business information into the application master files. For an overviewof this process, see the “Using your business information” chapter in the GettingStarted with MAPICS XA book. For a detailed description of the files and the filemaintenance procedures for each application, see the application user’s guides.




After installing MAPICS XA

Chapter 4. After installing MAPICS XA

After your MAPICS XA applications are installed and your master file information isentered, you can do one or more of the following activities. The kinds of activities youdo and the order in which you do them depend on the needs of your business.

Testing your applications..........................................................................................4-2Activating interfaces.................................................................................................4-2Establishing MAPICS XA security ............................................................................4-3Adding environments using extended environment support ...................................4-3Creating tailored sign-ons ........................................................................................4-3Setting up Group Job support..................................................................................4-4Setting up Note Tasks...............................................................................................4-5



Testing your applications

As you prepare to test your new system, consider the following:

• What kind of test do I need to run?• What differences are there between the old and new systems?• What current transactions must be processed to get ready for the test?• Do I need more than one test?

You might test the applications in one of the following ways:

• Take a recent accounting period, such as a month, for which transactions havealready been processed. Enter them into the system and compare the totalsgenerated by MAPICS XA with your previous totals.

• Run both your old system and MAPICS XA in parallel for some period. When youare satisfied that MAPICS XA is running the way you want, discontinue the oldsystem.

• Take a small number of transactions and process them through the entireMAPICS XA application.

• Test MAPICS XA completely at a time when your business is shut down, such asa weekend. Verify data and review reports so that MAPICS XA is up to date,accurate, and operating smoothly by Monday’s start of business. This method oftesting requires careful planning and some concentrated work time.

• Use the extended environment support function in Cross Application Support tocreate a duplicate of the environment you have just loaded. Do your testing inthis duplicate environment. When you are satisfied you can start processing inyour initial environment, you can then delete your duplicate environment or keepit on the system for future testing or training.

After deciding how you are going to test but before daily operations begin, be surethat all test data is cleared from the system. One way you can clear test data is tosave your master files after loading them, but before entering any test data into thesystem. Then, after you complete testing, restore the clean copy of your master filesthat you saved prior to testing. Whatever method you choose, it is important that testdata is cleared and your master file balances are correct before you begin dailyoperations.

Activating interfaces

Before information can be passed between certain applications, you need to activatethe interface in Cross Application Support (CAS). The interfaces that you activate inCAS are shown in Chapter 2, “Planning for installation” and described in theindividual questionnaires. For a summary of those questions and the step-by-stepprocess, see the “Maintenance/Change” chapter in the CAS User’s Guide.

Be sure that the applications have been tested and are operating to your satisfaction,and that the information to be passed is valid. If you plan to activate some interfacesat a later date, be sure your data is valid at that time.



Establishing MAPICS XA security

If you want to protect MAPICS XA application data, you need to specify who isauthorized to use the system and for what functions. You can establish MAPICS XAsecurity anytime after the initial installation. For the step-by-step process, see the“Security Maintenance” chapter in the CAS User’s Guide.

Adding environments using extended environment support

An environment is the set of libraries required to run your MAPICS XA applications.You install your first MAPICS XA applications in a single environment. After youcomplete the installation process, you can create additional environments to runmultiple company divisions or plants, test your applications, or meet other businessrequirements. For information about creating and maintaining environments, see the“Extended Environment Support” chapter in the CAS User’s Guide.

Creating tailored sign-ons

A tailored program lets users go directly to a MAPICS XA application in a specificenvironment without first using the Command Entry display.

If the users need to use different applications or environments, you need to createseparate programs for every application or environment required.

1 Create the required CL program or programs:

PGM

MAPICS a xy 00

SIGNOFF

ENDPGM

2 Substitute a MAPICS XA application identifier for a or a $ to go to the ApplicationSelection menu. See the Getting Started with MAPICS XA book for a list ofidentifiers. If you have more than one MAPICS XA environment and you want togo directly to a specific environment, substitute the environment designator forxy. Include the two zeros (00) to bypass the environment confirmation display(AMZAA4).

3 You must create the CL program in a library, usually QGPL, using theCRTCLPGM command.

4 Change the user profiles for all users who need a tailored sign-on program:

1. Sign on to the system as the AS/400 security officer (QSECOFR).

2. Type the following command, repeating it for each user:

CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(user profile name)

INLPGM(QGPL/program name)

3. Type the user’s sign-on ID in user profile name. Type name of the tailoredprogram you created in step 1 in program name. If the tailored sign-onprogram you created is not in the QGPL library, identify its library in place ofQGPL.



Setting up Group Job support

Group Job support allows you to suspend a MAPICS XA task and start one from theGroup Job Menu (AMZGJ1). The menu lists the MAPICS XA and OfficeVision*/400activities that you can perform. For information on using the Group Job Menu, seeGetting Started with MAPICS XA.

Group Job has a maximum of 16 active jobs per workstation—15 jobs plus the initialjob, Startup. However, your company may want to limit the number of active groupjobs to conserve system resources. The data area, ZGRPJB, controls whether GroupJob is active and the number of group jobs for each workstation.

To limit the number of group jobs active per workstation, type the following on theCommand Entry display and press Enter :

CHGDTAARA DTAARA(AMFLIBy/ZGRPJB) VALUE( n)

where y is the second character of an environment designator and n is the number ofactive group jobs. When you count how many jobs to activate, remember to countthe initial job. For example, for each user to start three group jobs, set the value of nto 4. Use 00 to deactivate Group Job.

A value of zero will not allow group job usage by any user of that environment. Avalue from 2 to 16 will allow the user’s initial session plus from 1 to 15 additionalgroup jobs. The number of group jobs can be set by individual user. For example, ifZGRPJB has a value of 10 and the user profile has a value of 5, only 5 group jobswould be available; the lesser of the two values.

As an example:

ZGRPJB = 16

User profile = 5

Then user profile gets 5.

Or:

ZGRPJB = 5

User profile = 16

Then user profile gets 5.

Or:

ZGRPJB = 0

User profile = 5

Then user profile gets 0 (no) group jobs.

Or:

ZGRPJB = 10

User profile = 0

Then user profile gets 10 because a value of 0 in the user profile says in effect "usethe value of ZGRPJB."



Or:

ZGRPJB = 10

User profile = 1

Then user profile gets no group jobs because 1 in the user profile only allows theinitial job and no additional group jobs.

Also, if a user signs on to an environment and no profile exists for that user in thatenvironment, then the value of ZGRPJB determines the number of group jobs theyare allowed.

Setting up Note Tasks

The Note Tasks function, one of the OfficeVision/400 activities, is built intoMAPICS XA but is not available on the Group Job Menu (AMZGJ1). Displays inseveral applications show a function key, F15, which you can use to create andmaintain notes. Notes are comments in your files about your customers, invoices,customer orders, items, or vendors. For example, you can add a note about aparticular back order.

Before you can use Note Tasks, you must:

1 Install OfficeVision/400.

Follow the installation instructions that come with the OfficeVision/400. After youinstall OfficeVision/400, you need to do several office procedures before you canactivate the Note Tasks function. Follow the instructions in the manuals that comewith the OfficeVision/400.

2 Enroll all users in OfficeVision/400.

The system security officer enrolls the office administrator in OfficeVision/400.The office administrator then enrolls all other users and adds them to the systemdistribution directory. Anyone who wants to use Note Tasks must have a validsystem profile, be enrolled in OfficeVision/400, and be in the system distributiondirectory.

3 The AMAPICS user profile must be enrolled in OfficeVision/400. All notes areowned by the AMAPICS user profile and are secured by an authorization list thatis created when you activate Note Tasks. The AMAPICS user profile also ownsthe authorization list. Any user having AMAPICS authority is able to processnotes outside of MAPICS XA using OfficeVision/400 functions. Therefore, to limitaccess to Notes Tasks, do not include a group profile of AMAPICS for anyMAPICS XA users and do not run MAPICS XA while signed on as AMAPICS.

4 Activate Note Tasks in MAPICS XA.

The Note Tasks function is not automatically activated in MAPICS XA. When youactivate Note Tasks, system and office objects are created. If you anticipate alarge volume of notes, be sure you have adequate system space. The notefunction does not currently allow you to back up or recover any office objects.

Note: Creating or copying an environment installs or copies the note functionbut does not activate Note Tasks or copy the associated office objects.



Activating note tasks

To activate Note Tasks, do the following:

1 Use F15 on an application display. The Notes Options window appears.

2 Select option 1, Activate Note Tasks, and press Enter . Note Tasks is activated.

If this is the first time you are activating Note Tasks in MAPICS XA, you may see theAS/400 Create Document display. Use F10=Bypass text entry and the Note Optionswindow appears for you to activate Note Tasks.

If Note Tasks is already active, the Notes Tasks window appears for you to createnotes or work with existing notes. If a note exists for the entry on an applicationdisplay, an icon, @, appears in the upper right part of the display.

Deactivating note tasks

To deactivate Note Tasks, do the following:

1 Use F15 on the application display. The Note Tasks window appears.

2 Select option 9, Note Options, and press Enter . The Note Options windowappears.

3 Select option 2, Deactivate Note Tasks, and press Enter . Note Tasks isdeactivated.

Deactivating Note Tasks does not delete any of the notes. If you activate Note Tasksagain, you can see and update any existing notes.

Reorganizing notes

The Note Tasks reorganize function lets you delete notes for customers, customerorders, invoices, items, or vendors that are no longer active. Before you delete anynotes, you can save them to magnetic media or to save files. If you have installedmultiple company support, you can reorganize notes for one company or for allcompanies. You can only reorganize one type of note at a time, such as customernotes or vendor notes.

When you reorganize Note Tasks, the system checks each note against the following:

• Customer notes against customer number in the Customer Master Address file(MBBFREP)

• Customer order notes against customer order number in the Customer OrderSummary file (MBC6REP)

• Invoice notes against invoice number in the Invoice Adjustments and CashReceipts file (OPENAR)

• Item notes against item number in the Item Master Inventory Information file(ITEMAS)

• Vendor notes against vendor number in the Vendor Master file (VENNAM).

If the system cannot find a record for the note in the corresponding master file, itmarks the note assignment record in the control file as deleted and deletes the noteitself.



To reorganize notes, do the following:

1 Use F15 on an application display. The Note Tasks window appears.

2 Select option 9, Note Options, and press Enter . The Note Options windowappears.

3 Select option 3, Reorganize Notes, and press Enter . The Reorganize Noteswindow appears.

4 Follow the directions you see on the windows. Use F1=Help for more informationon a window.




Managing your business information

Chapter 5. Mana ging y our b usiness inf ormation

To be able to use your business information (data) to make informed businessdecisions, you need to know some basic procedures for managing the data inMAPICS XA. The frequency, order, and content of the activities involved in managingyour data varies depending on the applications you have installed and how yourcompany works.

This chapter gives general information on how to keep the business data current,track changes, safeguard the data, have data available when and where needed,and schedule the processing operations to make the best use of your companyresources. For information on the Cross Application Support (CAS) menu options thathelp you manage the MAPICS XA applications, see the CAS User’s Guide.

Auditing and controlling data ...................................................................................5-2Creating an audit trail ...............................................................................................5-2Backing up data .......................................................................................................5-3Controlling access to data .......................................................................................5-3Checking for data accuracy.....................................................................................5-3Ensuring the correct sequence of operations ..........................................................5-4Scheduling data processing operations ..................................................................5-4Daily scheduling considerations ..............................................................................5-4Multiple batch job queues........................................................................................5-5Storage capacity ......................................................................................................5-6MAPICS XA print spooling........................................................................................5-7



Auditing and controlling data

The MAPICS XA applications have a number of ways for you to audit and control yourbusiness data; that is, check for accuracy, analyze data as it affects your business,provide backup in case of data loss, and if a question arises, trace the data back toits origin. The following topics describe both the system and the business resourcesthat help you to accomplish this:

• Creating an audit trail• Backing up data• Controlling access to data• Checking for data accuracy• Ensuring the correct sequence of operations

Be sure to read the specific chapter about audits and controls in the applicationuser’s guide.

Creating an audit trail

Your business documents and the information on MAPICS XA reports and displayshelp you keep track of your company data before, during, and after processing.

Data output

As MAPICS XA processes your business information, you can see the results inseveral useful formats:

• Many application functions have inquiry displays that allow you to review filedata and other job or application status information. You can print these displayson a workstation or a system printer.

• Reports show the results of system calculations, transaction totals, and so forth.Some processes, such as data entry and file maintenance, automaticallygenerate reports; with other processes, you need to request a report. Duringinstallation or while performing certain activities, you can tailor some of thesereports to limit the type and order of data that prints. The system date and thetime print on all reports.

• Some applications print system calculations on payroll checks, purchase orders,invoices, statements, and other special forms.

Assigning numbers to transactions

For some types of transaction entries, the user or the system assigns a number thatlets you follow the transaction through the system. Example of these numbers thatappear on displays and reports are:

• Batch numbers for a group of source documents entered together

• Sequence numbers for individual entries in a group in a sequence

• Line numbers to identify a line within a logically related set such as orders orinvoices

• Transaction set numbers for a group of related entries

• Journal reference numbers, a composite field to identify the journal type (forexample PJ, CD, GJ), the journal sequence number, and a line number within thejournal



Backing up data

A paper audit trail consisting of control logs, data entry forms, and reports helps yourecover data if it is lost. Another very important protection for your data is to makecopies of your application master files and application libraries.

When you select option 4 on the CAS Master Menu (AMZM00), the Back Up/Recover,/Reorganize menu (AMZM40) appears. Use this menu to perform thebackup functions that safeguard your data.

Controlling access to data

To protect the accuracy and confidentiality of data, only authorized persons shouldhave access to the computer and its programs and files. You can use the AS/400and MAPICS XA security features to give selected people access to specificcomputer and application functions. For information on AS/400 security, see Chapter3, “Installing MAPICS XA”. For information on MAPICS XA security, see the CASUser’s Guide.

Checking for data accuracy

Several system and manual controls help to ensure the accuracy of data when youenter it and when the system processes it. If the system finds an error, you see amessage describing the situation.

Data editing by the system

During both immediate and batch update, the system checks the accuracy of eachrecord against files, other display fields, lists of valid entries, or values and rangesthat the user defines. Cross-field (on the same display or on related displays) as wellas individual field edits occur. For example, if a vendor number is zero (a one timevendor), you must enter the vendor name and address; or, in Fixed AssetAccounting, the accumulated depreciation in the schedule record cannot exceed thecapitalized value in the header record.

Control totals

The system keeps running totals for groups of related records and checks to be surethe totals are in balance. For example, an Accounts Payable invoice total must agreewith the total of all the detail lines. If there is incorrect or missing information, you canaccept the error temporarily and continue, but you must correct the error for theinformation to be processed.

You can also use a Batch Status display to compare manual totals with system totalsfor a group of records, batches, or file maintenance sessions. Totals can be dollaramounts such as total open payables, or can be such things as total invoices,orders, or numbers of additions, changes, and deletions in the master files. If thetotals do not agree and the error occurred during data entry, you can enter therecord again before you close the batch or you can suspend the batch, continueentering the next batch of records, and then request the batch later to correct therecord and close the batch.



Ensuring the correct sequence of operations

You must perform some MAPICS XA menu options in a certain order so that the datais processed accurately. The system contains controls both within and betweenmenu options to ensure the correct sequence of operations.

If you need to perform several jobs in a specific sequence within a menu option, aprogram controls the order of the jobs by calling each job in the sequence. If you donot perform a particular step, you cannot complete the procedure.

If you need to perform related menu options in specific sequence, the system sets aflag each time a menu option is completed successfully. If you select a menu optionout of sequence, a message appears and the procedure is not completed. Forexample, in Payroll, you must take options to select records and calculate gross paybefore taking the option to calculate net pay. Sometimes a menu option is availableonly at certain times of the year. In Forecasting, you can only run the options on theSeasonal Update menu once at the end of the year.

Scheduling data processing operations

The needs of your business and the applications you have installed determine whatinformation you process and when. The sequence and length of operations maychange depending on the time of the week, the month, or the accounting period. Toprocess your business data efficiently, you must consider both system and businessresources. MAPICS XA has a number of ways to do this:

• Daily scheduling• Multiple batch job queues• Unattached jobs• Storage capacity• Print spooling

Daily scheduling considerations

MAPICS XA has a feature called multiprogramming, which allows the computer to domore than one task at a time. For example, one workstation can be used to selectinvoices for payment, while another is used to enter journal entries, at the same timethe payroll is being processed in the batch job queue.

Even though all the applications are designed to support multiprogramming,sometimes you do not want two operations to affect the same information. Forexample, if you are in the middle of a payroll run, you do not want someone tochange a person’s pay rate. To schedule MAPICS XA jobs so that they do notinterfere with each other or with your daily business operations, consider thefollowing:

• At the start of each work day:

- Review the spool file to see if any reports need to be printed and the batchjob queue to see if any jobs are to be run.

- Select option 1, Application Status, from the CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10), tomake sure all applications successfully completed the previous day’s work.

- Check for any special situations when workstations are not available, suchas a scheduled backup.



• More than one person cannot access a master file record while the record isbeing maintained.

• Certain jobs, such as payroll processing, are so important to the overallfunctioning of your company that they should be considered first whenscheduling jobs.

• Because period-end closing for the general ledger cannot begin until all otherapplications have completed their processing for the period, you have toestablish a schedule of each of the applications to meet the final closing dates.

• Because of the volume of transactions, some jobs, such as the MaterialRequirements Planning cycle and the printing of some reports require long runtimes and increased system resources and you may need to schedule them atnon-peak times.

• Some of the CAS Master Menu options require dedicated mode, which meansthat no other MAPICS XA jobs can be running in the environment at the sametime. For more information, see the CAS User’s Guide.

• You cannot run some jobs at the same time as other jobs if the jobs containconflicting procedures or conflicting data. When this occurs, the system sendsmessages concerning the status of processing and the actions that the systemtakes or what you must do to reschedule the job.

• For a list of conflicts by application, see the CAS User’s Guide. For moreinformation on how conflict support works, see the CAS Technical ReferenceManual.

The system operator can send messages to or receive messages from a workstationoperator. For example, a workstation operator preparing to submit a job that requiresthe action of the system operator (such as loading a tape) needs to inform theoperator that the job is starting. The SNDMSG or SNDBRKMSG command allows anoperator to send up to 512 characters of information. The system operator can usethis command to notify a workstation operator in a remote location that a requestedreport has printed or to notify workstations when the system is needed for dedicatedmode or when it will be down at the end of the day.

Multiple batch job queues

As mentioned earlier, a batch job is one that is run with little or no user action, suchas printing reports. (The other type of MAPICS XA job is an interactive job whereprocessing is done in response to input by a workstation user and a dialog ismaintained between the user and the system. You can review the status of both typesof jobs using option 2 on the CAS Maintenance/Change menu, AMZM30.) AllMAPICS XA batch jobs run in a batch job queue in the QBATCH subsystem. The AS/400 can run multiple batch job queues simultaneously so you can process severalbatch jobs at the same time.

When MAPICS XA is initially installed, it creates six batch job queues (QBATCH1-6)and one job queue (AMUJOBQ) for unattached jobs. By default, the system submitsall batch jobs to QBATCH1. If you want to use multiple job queues, you can review orchange the application job queue assignments using the Maintain Job Queue optionon the CAS Job Queue Maintenance menu (AMZM36). For more information, see theCAS User’s Guide.



Notes:

1. Do not change the assignment of the job queue for unattached jobs(AMUJOBQ).

2. The multiple job queue feature decreases processing time for batch jobs butmay increase processing time for interactive jobs.

Unattached jobs

An unattached job is a type of MAPICS XA job that allows a workstation operator toenter data and then continue with other activities without waiting for the data to beprocessed. You identify unattached jobs on the AS/400 Work with Active Jobsdisplay by the job name that begins with UMy as opposed to AMy for batch jobs,where y is the file library designator for that environment.

Unattached jobs are not attached to any specific workstation. An unattached jobprocesses data more quickly than a batch job can process it. Unattached jobsconserve system resources by processing one transaction at a time and by postingtransactions from multiple feeder jobs. Transactions are processed on a first-in first-out priority. In addition, unattached jobs use minimum system resources when thereare no transactions to be processed.

A feeder job can be data entered by a workstation operator, a communications job,or another unattached job. If an unattached job is not active when a feeder jobbegins, the feeder job starts it automatically. Once started, an unattached jobcontinues to run until it is held or ended by the system operator.

Both unattached and batch jobs run in the QBATCH subsystem. However, anunattached job does not wait for other jobs to complete before it begins to run.Unattached jobs are submitted to a special job queue created by MAPICS XA,AMUJOBQ, that runs an unlimited number of jobs simultaneously.

You can review the status of unattached jobs by using the Unattached Job Statusoption on the CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10). You can start, restart, release, hold, orend unattached jobs manually using the Unattached Job Status option on the CASMaintenance/Change menu (AMZM30).

Note: Unattached jobs must be held before running options in dedicated mode.Either you can hold the jobs manually or the system holds them automatically. Newjobs are automatically held during backup and released after backup is finished.

Storage capacity

Obtaining additional capacity, such as main storage, may increase your throughputbecause the system does not have to transfer the programs in and out of mainstorage as often.

Adding workstations to a department allows more operators to enter information.Throughput in one department may be improved, but because of the additionaldemand this extra workstation has on the system capacities, throughput in otherdepartments may be reduced.



MAPICS XA print spooling

To make it easier to schedule print functions, MAPICS XA uses the AS/400 printspooling function for all printed output. Print spooling temporarily stores data on diskin a spool file in an output queue and prints the data when you need it on the printerthat you designate.

To activate print spooling, start the subsystem QSPL during Initial Program Load(IPL). To begin printing, enter the Start Print Writer (STRPRTWTR) command on theAS/400 Command Entry display. This command identifies the output queue thatcontains the spool file and the printer device that prints the file. The default outputqueue is PRT01. To change output queues and other printer values, use the CASPrinter Override Maintenance menu (AMZM33). To learn about the variouscommands for managing print spooling, see the System Operator’s Guide for theAS/400.



Contents Index Exit Page A-1

Planning information checklists

Appendix A. Planning inf ormation c hecklists

This appendix contains forms for you to copy and use during your installationplanning. The first form is a checklist of suggested activities for you to completeduring the installation process. The second form contains a graph for you to fill inwith your installation planning schedule.



(Page 1 of 2) Assignment checklist

Plan for installation Responsible person/dept Sched completion date Actual completion date

Plan the location of your newsystem

Assign job responsibilities:

Select the installationmanager

Select the system operator

Identify the departmentsupervisors

Select the work stationoperators

Select the backupoperators

Train the people:

Installation managerSystem operatorWork station operator

Order supplies:

Special formsStock computer paperBindersTapesPrinter ribbonsDiskettes

Organize your businessinformation:

Prepare answers toquestionnaires

Prepare data forapplication data files

Determine whichapplication master filesyou intend to user rightaway

Complete the appropriateforms for each file

Discuss with your MAPICSrepresentative how youwant to convert youroriginal data



Install the system:

Have your AS/400components delivered tothe appropriate place

Check for all tapes or CDsand manuals shown on thepacking list

Check for the instructionsthat accompany the AS/400 operating systemtapes or CDs.

Install the AS/400 operatingsystem

Install the applications:

Check that you have theapplication user’s guidesyou need and the CASUser’s Guide

Add license key

Run initial applicationinstallation

Run install/tailor

Enter data into the files:

Convert from your existingapplications, or...

Use application filemaintenance or offline fileload

Verify data

After you install:

Test the applications

Activate interfaces

Establish security

Set up other functions

(Page 2 of 2) Assignment checklist

Plan for installation Responsible person/dept Sched completion date Actual completion date



Installation Planning Schedule

Date created:

Date last modified:

Activity

Contents Index Exit Page B-1

Installation questionnaires

Appendix B. Installation questionnaires

This chapter contains the questionnaires for all the MAPICS XA applications that usequestionnaires except Contract Accounting (CA) and Knowledge BasedConfigurator (KBC). See the appropriate User’s Guide or documentation for thoseapplications to get more information.

The Cross Application Support (CAS) questions appear first, followed by each of theapplications in alphabetical order. The CAS questionnaire contains the basic optionquestions, such as which accounting method your company uses. These questionsapply to multiple applications and all of the companies you support.

After you answer the basic option questions, you answer the questionnaires for theapplications you are installing or tailoring. The questionnaires are divided intofunctional, constants, and report options.

• Functional options contain questions about how you want to use the applicationfunctions, such as whether you want certain applications to interface.

• Constants options require information that will not change, such as yourcompany name.

• Report options allow you to determine formats for the information that prints onan application’s reports.

The following applications do not include any questions for Install/Tailor:

• Electronic Commerce (EC)• Estimating and Quote Management (EQM)• Executive Information System (EIS)• Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS)• InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL)• Market Monitoring and Analysis (MMA)• Materials Management (MM)• Order-Based Production Management (OBPM)• Procurement Management (PM)


Installation questionnaires

Using the application tailoring questionnaires

To use a questionnaire, remove it from this book and make a blank copy. Thendiscuss the questions and possible answers with those in your company who cansupply the necessary information.

Each question is followed by an explanation and by spaces showing the maximumsize of the answer. Questions with limits between which your response must fall showthose limits. LOW indicates the lower limit, and HILIM the higher limit. As you gothrough the questionnaire, write the answers in the space provided.

When you complete the questionnaire, you must update the System Control(SYSCTL) file with your answers. To do this, run the Install/Tailor Applications optionon the CAS Master Menu (AMZM00). Remember the following when you run Install/Tailor Applications:

• Notice that sometimes a question already has an answer inserted in theresponse field for you. This is the default value that the application assumes. Adefault is an answer already set up in the system. It is indicated in thequestionnaires by the word DFLT, along with the value. To accept the default,press Enter and continue with the next question. To provide a different answer tothe question, type in your new answer and press Enter . Any new answers youprovide become the new default values.

• Do not type leading zeros or blanks in the answer.

• Always supply an answer when you see ANSWER REQ on the display.

• Answer questions requiring a yes or no with Y or N.

• Use F01 to start a section of the questionnaire again if you answer a questionincorrectly.

• Use F16 to start the entire questionnaire again.

Note: Some questions may be skipped based upon the response to a previousquestion or if the interface between two applications has been activated. Forexample, account numbers cannot be changed if the interface between GeneralLedger and the application has been activated.


Cross Application Support

Cross Application Suppor t

The CAS questions appear at the beginning of the questionnaires each time you runInstall/Tailor Applications.

Define basic options

X01 DO YOU WANT TO USE A 13-PERIOD ACCOUNTING SYSTEM?

DFLT-N

This question gives you an option for General Ledger processing. If you answer Y(Yes), your accounting information is stored and processed on the basis of 13 four-week periods to make your accounting year. If you answer N (No), the accountingyear is set up with 12 monthly (calendar) periods.

This question also determines whether the inventory usage for each accountingperiod should be annualized by multiplying by 12 or 13 to calculate estimated annualusage.

If your accounting system uses a 4-4-5 week schedule, select the 13-periodaccounting option.

Notes:

1. Transactions posted under the 12-month accounting system contain a full date(MM/DD/YY), while transactions posted under the 13-period system contain atwo-position period number (PP). If you are going to change from oneaccounting system to the other, you should process all posted transactions forthe following applications, if installed, before changing your response to thisquestion:

Accounts Payable (AP)

Accounts Receivable (AR)

Customer Order Management (COM)

Financial Analysis (F/A)

General Ledger (GL)

Payroll (PR)

Inventory Management (IM)

Production Monitoring and Control (PM&C)

Repetitive Production Management (REP)

Sales Analysis (SA)

2. When you change your answer to this question and you have Forecasting (FCST)installed, you must run Install/Tailor Applications for the Forecasting applicationagain.



X02 DO YOU WANT ENTRY TRANSACTIONS TO BE DELETED FROM THESYSTEM BEFORE BACKING UP YOUR FILES?

DFLT-N

When you use the Back Up Files option, the system backs up (saves) the master filesand the transaction (data entry) files. If you need to recover your data entry filesbetween backups (option 2, Recover Files), your answer to this question determineswhether or not you have to reenter the data entry transactions (batches) duringrecovery.

• If you answer N (no), posted batches (FINISHED status) are retained on diskuntil you back up the files, at which time they are backed up and deleted. Duringrecovery, the batches with a FINISHED status are changed to a SUSPENDEDstatus. You can then close and post these batches again.

• If you answer Y (yes), batches are deleted after they are posted. (You do nothave batches with a status of FINISHED.) During recovery, all the batches youentered since the last backup have to be entered again.

Notes:

1. All batches with a status other than FINISHED are saved during Back UpFiles, regardless of how you answer this question.

2. It is recommended that you back up your files at least once a day regardlessof how you answer this question.

3. In discussions throughout MAPICS XA, answering N is referred to asREUSE=NO and answering Y is referred to as REUSE=YES.

4. If you are changing the answer to this question from N (No) to Y (Yes) for anapplication that is already installed, it is recommended that you back up yourfiles and remove any FINISHED or DELETED batches before changing youranswer.

X03 DO YOU HAVE MORE THAN ONE COMPANY?

DFLT-N

You can have from 1 to 89 companies for which you process information. When youanswer N (No), the application assumes that there is only one company whosenumber is assigned to be 01, and you cannot enter constant information for morethan one company.

If you have multiple companies for any of the applications you have installed orintend to install, you must answer Y (Yes) to this question.

Because company number 01 is the default for all single company applications,assign company 01 to the company name you want to print on the reports for theCapacity Requirements Planning (CRP), Inventory Management (IM), MaterialRequirements Planning (MRP), Production Control and Costing (PC&C), ProductData Management (PDM), Purchasing (PUR), and Repetitive Production



Management (REP) applications. Failure to do so initially results in difficulty later ifthe company number is changed, requiring master files to be renumbered.

If this application is already installed and you are changing your answer from Y (Yes)to N (No), stay in the multiple company environment until you process all of thetransactions through the fiscal year. Then remove all references to multiplecompanies from your master files to ensure correct results in a single companyenvironment.

X04 WHAT IS YOUR DEFAULT PLANNING WAREHOUSE?

Your answer to this question defines the default planning warehouse used byForecasting (FCST), Master Production Schedule Planning (MPSP), Purchasing(PUR), and Repetitive Production Management (REP).

In FCST, PUR, and REP, the warehouse you enter here appears in the WAREHOUSEfield on the application displays. If you do not enter a warehouse, the WAREHOUSEfield is blank.

In MPSP, the warehouse you enter here is the planning warehouse used by theapplication.

Your answer to this question must be left-justified and not contain any embeddedblanks, asterisks, or question marks. For example, the following entries are valid:

• A A (blank)• A (blank) (blank)• A A A

The following entries are not valid:

• A (blank) A• (blank) (blank) A• A * ?

Answers are edited when you complete the questionnaire during the install/tailorprocess. A report prints containing messages about answers that are not valid. Youcan return to the beginning of the questionnaire and correct the responses. See the“Install/Tailor Applications” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

X05 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF MULTIPLECURRENCY AND VALUE ADDED TAX TABLE RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

Your answer to this question determines whether or not an audit list showing thecontents of a record both before and after it was maintained is printed.

It is useful to answer Y (Yes) to this question so you have a record of all changesmade to a file. If you decide later that you no longer need this report, you can changeyour response to this question to N (No).



Use this option to maintain both the multiple currency files and the value added taxfiles.

X06 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR PREVIOUS RESPONSES?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define basic options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question X01. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.


Accounts Payable

Accounts P ayable

If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, refer to the“Assigning General Ledger account numbers” appendix in the Accounts PayableUser’s Guide.

Define functional options

A01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question A13.

A02 WILL YOU BE USING A CASH ACCOUNTING METHOD?

DFLT-N

When you answer N (No), the application assumes an accrual method andestablishes the liability for the invoice at the time you enter it. It credits the AccountsPayable account and debits the expense accounts entered with each invoice.

When you answer Y (Yes), the application assumes a cash method and debits theexpense for the invoice at the time you pay it.

A03 DO YOU WANT TO ENTER VOUCHER NUMBERS AS A SYSTEM CONTROLMEDIUM?

DFLT-N

When you answer N (No), the Accounts Payable application assigns vouchernumbers as you enter invoices. The sequence begins with the first open payablesdata you enter when your Accounts Payable application becomes operational.

If your company uses vouchers or wants to introduce them for payables control andreference, this question lets you use your own numbering method. When you answerY (Yes), you must use your own voucher number system as part of invoice entry. Youmust respond with Y (Yes) if you want your payment selection numbers to beidentical to the voucher numbers you enter. The maximum number is 99999 (fivedigits) and each invoice must be assigned a unique voucher number per vendor.


Accounts Payable

A04 DO YOU WANT TO EDIT VENDOR INVOICE NUMBERS?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes), the application edits the Open Payables file for duplicatevendor invoice numbers during Purchase Journal processing. An N (No) responseeliminates this editing feature.

A05 DO YOU WANT IMMEDIATE CASH DISBURSEMENTS OF PREPAIDINVOICES?

DFLT-N

The Accounts Payable application is designed so that you can enter an invoice thatis already paid into the application. If you answer Y (Yes), the invoice is included onthe Purchase Invoice Journal and the application automatically initiates cashdisbursements processing.

If you answer N (No), cash disbursements are handled through manual payments.

A06 DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT INVOICE PAYMENT HISTORY?

DFLT-N

When you answer Y (Yes), Accounts Payable captures data for printed checks,payments, and credit memos. This information is stored in the History or ArchiveHistory files or both.

Y (Yes) is required if you are using AMplus.

Additional functions are provided that allow you to archive, restore, or delete invoicepayment history information.

A07 DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN ACCOUNTS PAYABLEAND PURCHASING?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes), amounts are entered in trading currency and converted tolocal currency. Reports and displays show both trading and local amounts whereapplicable. Posting to General Ledger is done only in local currency.

If you accept the default, trading and local currency amounts are the same and localcurrency is assumed.


Accounts Payable

A08 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N

Accounts Payable can provide Purchase Journal and Cash Disbursementstransactions to General Ledger to track your purchases and payments. Answer Y(Yes) if you want the application to create these journal transactions and save themfor month-end or period-end processing. You must answer Y (Yes) if you want toactivate an interface between Accounts Payable and the General Ledger applicationand to automatically transfer these transactions to General Ledger.

Even if you have not installed the General Ledger application and do not plan toinstall it, you can still answer Y (Yes) to take advantage of this feature. Enter yourChart of Accounts into the General Ledger Master file so that the account numberscan be edited. All transactions are generated for your General Ledger and written tothe Temporary General Ledger file. This makes it easier to capture the transactionamount for transfer to your ledger.

When you answer N (No), no journal transactions are created, and you mustmanually enter these transactions into your General Ledger using data entry. Nojournal distribution reports are created. If you answer N (No), skip to question A10.

This question does not appear if you have activated the Accounts Payable interfacewith General Ledger. If the interface is already active, Accounts Payable assumesGeneral Ledger distribution.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenAccounts Payable and General Ledger. After you answer Y (Yes), you must activatethe interface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/DeactivateInterfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y(Yes) to N (No), you must first clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledgerfile. After you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually removethe members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger filesby using the RMVM command if AR, PR, F/A, and GL are not installed.

A09 DO YOU WANT THE ITEM NUMBER PASSED TO GENERAL LEDGER ASDESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item number will be passed to GeneralLedger from those invoice detail lines that contain an item number. If the item numberis not present, the invoice detail line is passed to General Ledger. If neither the itemnumber nor the invoice detail description is present, the invoice header descriptionis passed to General Ledger.


Accounts Payable

If you answer N (No), the item number will never be passed to General Ledger. If theitem description is present, it is passed to General Ledger; otherwise, the invoicedescription is passed.

This question is also asked in Purchasing.

A10 DO YOU WANT INVOICING MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES PASSED TOPC&C?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, you have completed the first step in choosingthe interface between Accounts Payable and Production Control and Costing.Answering Y (Yes) allows entry of invoicing miscellaneous charge and outsideoperation transactions and editing of those transactions against the open orderdatabase.

After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface to PC&C.See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: This question applies to the payables processing functions shared byAccounts Payable and Purchasing. If you are also installing Purchasing, the answerto the Accounts Payable question also applies to Purchasing.

A11 DO YOU WANT INVOICING COST ADJUSTMENTS PASSED TO IM?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, you have completed the first step in choosingthe interface between Accounts Payable and Inventory Management. Answering Y(Yes) allows entry of invoicing cost adjustment transactions and editing of thosetransactions against the open order database.

After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface throughCross Application Support to actually pass the transactions to IM. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: This question applies to the payables processing functions shared byAccounts Payable and Purchasing. If you are also installing Purchasing, the answerto the Accounts Payable question also applies to Purchasing.


Accounts Payable

A12 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define functional options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion A02. Answer N (No) to begin defining the constants options.

Define constants options

A13 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N(No), the questionnaire skips to question A26.

A14 WHAT IS THE PAYMENT AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THEACCOUNTS PAYABLE SYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT? (ZERO ASSUMES NOHIGHLIGHTING.)

DFLT-0

Enter the monetary value with no decimal positions. For example, type in 250 dollarsas 250. If you enter a value, the application highlights, as a warning, any paymentthat is written for an amount over this value. If you do not enter a value, theapplication does not verify the total payment amounts. If multiple currency support isinstalled, the answer to this question is compared to local currency amounts.

The highlighting appears on the Cash Requirements Report, the CashDisbursements Journal, the Manual Payments Cash Disbursements Journal, and theManual Payments Cash Disbursements Register. When the value is highlighted onthe Cash Requirements Report, you can proceed to printing of checks. Or you canenter payment selections again so that no payment is written above the maximumamount. When the value is highlighted on the Cash Disbursements Journal, it is toolate to prevent printing of a check. If you do not want to send the printed check to thevendor, you can manually void the payment just printed and enter a paymentreversal. A payment reversal reestablishes the invoice for which the check waswritten and voids the check record that was added to the Bank Reconciliation file.


Accounts Payable

A15 DO YOU WANT BANK ACCOUNT BALANCES TO APPEAR ON PAYMENTSELECTION AND PRINT CHECK DISPLAYS?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes), the current bank account and the projected bank accountbalances appear on the Payment Selection (Status) display. The BALANCE AFTERPAYMENT field appears on the Print Checks (Enter) display.

If you answer N (No), no bank account balance, projected bank account balance, orbalance after payment information is shown.

The following questions refer to constant information that the Accounts Payableapplication needs but which may vary with each company you have installed.

A16 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY COMPANY CONSTANTSRELATED TO ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT-Y


If your answers are Y (Yes) to questions X03 and A16, continue with question A17.

If your answers are N (No) to question X03 and Y to question A16, skip to questionA19.

A17 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY

LOW-1 HILIM-89 ANSWER REQ

You must enter a company number for each company you plan to install. Enter anumber between 1 and 89. The first time you answer this question, the companynumber defaults to 1. Remember, if you install other applications that allow formultiple companies, the company numbers and names should be consistent acrossall the applications.

This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,the company number is always 1.


Accounts Payable

A18 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

You must enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15-character company name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports.This name is associated with the company number entered in question A17 orcompany 1 if you answered N (No) to question X03.

The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the companyname that you entered appears on the last line as the default company name.

If you answered Y (Yes) to question A08, continue with question A19.

If you answered N (No) to question A08, skip to question A24 if you have multiplecompanies or skip to question A25 if you have one company.

A19 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCOUNTSPAYABLE?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger number you want to credit when you enter invoicespayable to vendors. You can enter your own 15-digit account number.

You can have several accounts to which you credit invoices, such as Notes payable(2030), Interest payable (2050), Accounts Payable—vendors (2000). (The accountnumbers shown in parentheses refer to numbers from the sample Chart of Accounts.Your account numbers may be different.) The number requested by this question isfor invoices payable to vendors.

If you do not enter a number, or enter 0, the display shows a zero, but the applicationautomatically uses 9999998 as the default for Accounts Payable on all applicablereports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either the number youchose or the default—9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.

The following applications reserve default General Ledger account numbers toprevent out-of-balance conditions:

• Financial Analysis—9999995• Accounts Receivable—9999996• Payroll—9999997• Accounts Payable—9999998

To prevent the posting of an out-of-balance entry, an application uses its number if avalid account number is not available when a posting is made. If one of thesenumbers is used, you must manually transfer the entry to the proper account prior toclosing the period.


Accounts Payable

A20 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR CASH-IN-BANK?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when the AccountsPayable checks are written.


A21 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR DISCOUNTSEARNED?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when the AccountsPayable checks are written and any discount amounts are taken. If you mustdistribute the discounts earned account to multiple accounts, you can do so bymaking manual journal entries.


A22 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FREIGHT?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number (up to 15 digits long) you want to assignas the default to the freight account during invoice entry. If you have the GeneralLedger application installed, you must also add the General Ledger account numberto the General Ledger Master file. Otherwise, when this account number is used as adefault, edit errors occur.

A23 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SALES TAX?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number (up to 15 digits long) you want to assignas the default to the sales tax account during invoice entry. If you have the GeneralLedger application installed, you must also add the General Ledger account number


Accounts Payable

to the General Ledger Master file. Otherwise, when this account number is used as adefault, edit errors occur.

A24 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

This question tells the computer if you have entered all your companies. When youanswer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question A17 to enter the next companynumber, name, and the information that applies to that company. After you enter allyour companies, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of thequestionnaire.

This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03.

If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question A17.

If your answer is N (No), continue with question A25.

A25 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define constants options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion A14. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.

Define report options

A26 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTION FORACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT-Y



Accounts Payable

A27 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLACCOUNTS PAYABLE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master file record, such as a vendor name and address,from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by other areas of yourapplication. If you want the application to print a report showing how the informationappeared before and after you changed it, answer Y (Yes). This report is the printedaudit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. To provide an audit trail,answer Y to this question when you first install the application. If you decide later thatthe printed report of changes is N (No), no longer necessary in your company, rerunthe questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.

Note: When you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor after linesprint on the File Maintenance Report.

A28 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE RESPONSE CONCERNING THE REPORTOPTION?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define report options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion A27. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.


Accounts Receivable

Accounts Receiv able


R01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), skip to question R10.

R02 WHICH METHOD DO YOU WANT USED TO CALCULATE YOUR GROSSPROFIT?

1=PERCENT OF SALES2=PERCENT OF COST

LOW-1 HILIM-2 DFLT-1

Choose the method that best suits your needs. Enter 1 to calculate gross profit as apercentage of net sales; enter 2 to calculate gross profit as a percentage of cost.

R03 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to have transactions edited against the General LedgerMaster File and posted to the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer N (No) if youdo not want to have transactions edited against the General Ledger Master File andposted to the Temporary General Ledger file. This question does not appear if youhave activated the Accounts Receivable interface with General Ledger.

If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y(Yes) to N (No), you must first clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledgerfile. When you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually removethe members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger filesby using the RMVM command if AP, PR, F/A, and GL are not installed.


Accounts Receivable

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenAR and GL. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interfacethrough Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapterof the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

Question R04 appears only if AP and AR are installed.

R04 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE TO AP?

DFLT-N

If Accounts Payable (AP) is installed and interfacing with Accounts Receivable, ARpasses deposits to AP and automatically updates the bank account file maintainedby AP whenever a cash receipt is entered in AR.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to interface with AP and have AR deposit amounts addedto AP bank balances. Answer N (No) if you do not want to interface with AP.

R05 DO YOU WANT TO AGE UNAPPLIED CASH AND ADJUSTMENTS FOROPEN ITEM CUSTOMERS?

DFLT-N

When you enter N (No), unapplied cash or adjustments for open items remain in thecurrent period at month-end closing. When you enter Y (Yes), unapplied cash oradjustments for open items age to the next age period.

Balance forward unapplied cash or adjustments always age.

R06 DO YOU WANT FUTURE AGING OF INVOICES?

DFLT-N

Answer N (No) if you do not age invoices to become due at a future date. Answer Y(Yes) if you age invoices for a date in the future.


Accounts Receivable

R07 DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you do business with customers who use a different currency fromthe one you use. Answer N (No) if you only do business with customers who use thesame currency as you use. Do not answer this question again with N if you answeredpreviously with Y and now have foreign currency AR balances.

This answer will change your answer to the same question in the COM questionnaire.Whichever question you answered last will be the answer used by the system.

R08 DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT PAID ITEM HISTORY?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want paid invoice details captured and stored during the PaidItem Purge function.

Answer N (No) if you do not want paid invoice details stored.


R09 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question R02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining theconstants options.


Accounts Receivable


R10 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. When youanswer N (No), the questionnaire skips to question R33.

R11 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY CONSTANTSRELATED TO ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to change or add company-related data. Answer N (No) ifyou do not have any changes to enter.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question R25.

R12 WHAT IS THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES APPLY?



This question does not appear if you have only one company. In this case, thecompany number is always 1.

R13 WHAT IS THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY?

UP TO 15 CHARACTERS

You must enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15-character company name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports.This name is associated with the company number entered in question R12 orcompany 1 if you answered N (No) to question X03.


Accounts Receivable

The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the companyname that you have previously typed in for the particular company appears on thelast line as the default company name.

Questions R14 through R24 do not appear if question R03 was answered N (No) or ifthe Accounts Receivable/General Ledger interface is activated. Skip to questionR25.

R14 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCOUNTSRECEIVABLE?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits and creditsto your accounts receivable account.

If you do not enter a number, or enter 0, the display shows a zero, but the applicationautomatically uses the number 9999996 as the default for AR on all applicablereports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either the number youchose or the default 9999996) to the General Ledger Master file.

The following applications reserve default General Ledger account numbers toprevent out-of-balance conditions:

• Financial Analysis—9999995• Accounts Receivable—9999996• Payroll—9999997• Accounts Payable—9999998

To prevent the posting of an out-of-balance entry, an application uses its number if avalid account number is not available when a posting is made. If one of thesenumbers is used, you must manually transfer the entry to the proper account prior toclosing the period.

R15 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR CASH-IN-BANK?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits and creditsto your cash-in-bank account.



Accounts Receivable

R16 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORDISCOUNTS?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits and creditsto your discount account.


R17 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORADJUSTMENTS?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits and creditsto your adjustment account.


R18 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SERVICECHARGES?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post credits to yourservice charge account.


R19 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORALLOWANCE ADJUSTMENT?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits to yourallowance or cash-posting adjustment (write-off) account.


Accounts Receivable


R20 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORMISCELLANEOUS CASH RECEIPTS?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post credits tomiscellaneous cash receipts.

If you do not enter a number or enter 0, the display shows a zero, but the applicationautomatically uses the number 9999996 as the default for Accounts Receivable onall applicable reports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either thenumber you chose or the default 9999996) to the General Ledger Master file.

R21 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR BANKCHARGES?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post bank charges.

You must also add the General Ledger account number to the General LedgerMaster file.

R22 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR MCS WRITE-OFFS?

DFLT-0

If you are using multiple currency support (MCS), enter the General Ledger accountnumber you want to use to post write-offs associated with currency conversions.

You must also add this General Ledger account number to the General LedgerMaster file.

R23 WHAT DATE WAS USED ON YOUR STATEMENTS LAST MONTH? YYMMDD


You must answer question R23 in YY/MM/DD format (year first, month second, daythird). Any other format causes errors in aging transactions. For example, if you are


Accounts Receivable

bringing up AR in July of 1993, and the last statement date used was July 01, 1993,then enter 930701.

R24 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

Your answer to this question tells the computer if you have entered all yourcompanies. When you answer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question R12 toenter the next company number and name (questions R12 and R13) and theinformation that applies to that company. When you enter all of your companies,answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of the questionnaire. Thisquestion does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03.

If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question R12.

If your answer is N (No), continue with question R25.

R25 WHAT AGE PERIOD DO YOU CONSIDER AS DELINQUENT FOR PRINTINGDELINQUENCY NOTICES?


Enter a value from 1 to 4 to indicate the aging period when delinquency begins.

When requested, the application prints delinquency notices for all customers withamounts in any aging period equal to or older than the aging period you enter here.

R26 DO YOU WANT TO CUSTOMIZE DELINQUENCY NOTICE CAPTIONS?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the captions you have defined in the DelinquencyCaption file.

Enter N (No) if you want to use the captions defined by the system.

R27 DURING WHICH AGE PERIOD DO YOU WANT SERVICE CHARGES TO BECALCULATED?


Enter a value from 1 to 4 to indicate the aging period when service charges begin.


Accounts Receivable

The application calculates service charges using all customers with amounts in anyaging period equal to or older than the aging period you enter here.

R28 WHAT IS THE MINIMUM SERVICE CHARGE AMOUNT?

DFLT-0.00

The amount you enter here is used if the calculated service charge is less than thisamount. For example, if the minimum service charge is $0.50, enter .50.

R29 WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN STATEMENTS?


Enter the maximum number of days you allow in your accounting period. If you areinstalling this application for the first time, the number supplied is 35; you may adjustthis downward to 31, 32, 33, or 34. This number, along with your response to the nextquestion, regulates your month-end closing.

R30 WHAT IS THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN STATEMENTS?


Enter the minimum number of accounting days in your accounting period. Thedefault is 25. You may want to adjust this higher or lower if you can close youraccounting period earlier or later during the month. The answer to this question,along with your response to the previous question, specifies the range of days withinwhich you must close an accounting period.

R31 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you have made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes)to return to question R11. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining thereport options.


Accounts Receivable


R32 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. When youanswer N, the questionnaire is completed.

R33 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change some master record (such as a customer name andaddress) from the workstation, the information is immediately available for use byother areas of your application. If you want the application to print a report reflectinghow the information appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y(Yes). This report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your masterfiles.

When COM is installed, refer to Chapter 9. “Master File Processing” in theAccounting Management Accounts Receivable User’s Guide for information onprinting Customer Master maintenance reports.

To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install theapplication. If you decide later that the printed report of changes is no longernecessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.

Note: When you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor after linesprint on the File Maintenance report.

R34 WHAT IS THE STATEMENT TYPE YOU WANT TO USE?


Enter 1 for standard window statement.

Enter 2 for standard spread window statement.

The following four questions pertain to statement preparation. The responses youenter should be the options you most often use. Except for question R39, you canoverride any of the options you select here when you request statements to be run.


Accounts Receivable

R35 WHICH REPORT CONTENT OPTION DO YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS?


For customers designated to get statements:

Enter 1 if you want all customers who have not had current statements printed.

Enter 2 if you want only those customers who have not had current statementsprinted and have past due amounts.

Enter 3 if you want only those customers who have not had current statementsprinted and have delinquent amounts.

R36 WHICH REPORT RANGE DO YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS?


Enter 1 if you want all customers to be considered.

Enter 2 if you want a range of customers to be considered; for example, customers ofa selected company or a range of companies.


Accounts Receivable

R37 TYPE IN THE RANGE OF CUSTOMERS YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS.

DFLT-01000000008999999999

Enter the low and high limit in sequence as one number. You may want to enter arange here for a frequently used set of customers so that you can override questionR36 at run time without having to enter a range override.

The range default consists of:

Low company number 01 (2 DIGITS)

High company number 00000000 (8 DIGITS)

Low customer number 89 (2 DIGITS)

High customer number 99999999 (8 DIGITS)

R38 WHICH ZERO BALANCE PRINT OPTION DO YOU WANT FORSTATEMENTS?


Enter 1 if you want statements with current activity but zero balance to print.

Enter 2 if you do not want any statements with zero balances to print.

R39 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question R34. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.


Capacity Requirements Planning



T01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORCRP?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question T04.

T02 TYPE IN THE NAME OF YOUR COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

The 15-character company name entered at this time appears in your reportheadings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The firsttime you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the company name youtype in for the company appears.

T03 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNING SYSTEMCONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you have made a mistake or want to change your company name, answer Y (Yes)to return to question T02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.




T04 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR CRP?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question T06.

T05 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF CRP MASTERFILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master record (such as variable capacity or work centerinformation) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by otherareas of your application. If you want the system to print a report showing how theinformation appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). Thisreport is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. Youshould answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application. If youlater decide that the printed report of changes is no longer necessary in yourcompany, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after linesare printed.

T06 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion T05. Answer N (No) to end this section of the questionnaire.


Customer Order Management

Customer Or der Mana gement


B01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORCUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, youcan answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question B12.

B02 DO YOU WANT ORDERS PRICED AT ENTRY TIME?

DFLT- Y

This question allows you to select order pricing during order entry or duringinvoicing.

Answer Y (Yes) to fix prices at the time the order is entered. This means the pricesremain the same when the order is shipped, regardless of any price increase ordecrease.

Answer N (No) to have the order priced when it is shipped. This means the prices aresubject to any price increase or decrease until the goods are shipped.

B03 HOW DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE GROSS PROFIT?

1=PERCENT OF SALES2=PERCENT OF COST

LOW- 1 HILIM- 2 DFLT- 1

Choose the method that best suits your needs. If you accept the default, gross profitis calculated as a percent of net sales.



B04 DO YOU WANT TO CROSSFOOT QUANTITY ORDERED, SHIPPED, ANDBACKORDERED?

DFLT- Y

This question allows you to specify automatic crossfooting of order and shipquantities on standard orders. If the default Y (Yes) is specified, a warning messageappears unless quantity ordered is greater than or equal to quantity backorderedplus quantity shipped at release time.

B05 SHOULD SPECIAL CHARGE CODE 3 AMOUNTS BE PASSED TO SALESANALYSIS?

DFLT- N

This question allows you to have special charges associated with an order but notpassed to Sales Analysis (SA) for consideration as part of sales. The default N (No)prevents any special charge code 3 charges or costs from being passed on to SA atinvoicing. If Customer Order Management is interfacing with SA, special chargecodes 1 and 2 are never passed on.

The operator supplies the following special charge codes during order entry:

0 COMMENT ON THE ORDER; NO COST OR AMOUNT ISASSOCIATED.

1 FREIGHT; NO COST IS ASSOCIATED.2 CHARGE ONLY; NO COST IS ASSOCIATED.3 CHARGE WITH COST; OPERATOR IS REQUIRED TO ENTER A

COST WITH THE SPECIAL CHARGE RECORD DURING ORDERENTRY.

B06 DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT SHIPPED ORDER HISTORY?

DFLT- Y

This question allows you to archive order shipments after orders are fully shippedand invoices are printed.

Answer Y (Yes) to retain order shipment data after invoicing. Keeping this data on thesystem allows you to review order shipments and reprint invoices. Order shipmentdata can be archived to tape and then restored to the system.



When you answer N (No), you cannot use the following functions:

B07 DO YOU WANT BOOKING RECORDS PLACED IN THE MONTHLY ACTIVITYFILE?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) to save all the booking records monthly for use by user-writtenprograms.

Booking records are used by the Forecasting application as its source of customerorder demand and reflect quantity adjustments only. Amounts available areapproximations and do not necessarily reflect the true changes involved. You mustanswer Y (Yes) to this question if you are using the Forecasting application.

B08 DO YOU WANT TO INCLUDE GENERATED DEMAND FROM MRP WITHMFG ALLOCATIONS AND CUSTOMER ORDERS IN THE AVAILABLE TOPROMISE (ATP) CALCULATIONS?

DFLT- Y

If you answer Y (Yes), you are choosing to include generated demand from MRP andMPSP with manufacturing allocations and customer orders in the available topromise calculations.

B09 DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) for Multiple Currency Support.

Function Menu/option

Commissions Worksheet AMBM40/1

Daily Recap - Logistics measurements AMBM20/4

Daily Recap - Service level AMBM20/4

General Ledger Worksheet AMBM40/2

Order copy from history AMBM10/1, F10 on the Enter Orderpanel, then action 001

Period to Date Backlog Shipments AMBM30/3

Post-Invoicing Serial Number Assignment AMBM1B/10

Review/Select Invoices to Reprint AMBM17/13

Shipped order history inquiry AMBM20/2, then F22 on the List ofOrders - Open Panel



Foreign subsidiaries can keep reports in their own currency but send results to theirparent company in the parent company’s currency. The parent company canproduce consolidated reports showing the foreign subsidiaries’ results in side-by-side format.

This answer will change your answer to the same question on the AR questionnaire.The system uses the answer of the question answered last.

B10 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N

Customer Order Management can provide order entry journal transactions toGeneral Ledger to track your revenue from sales and cost of sales.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to have transactions edited against the General LedgerMaster file and posted to the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer N (No) if you donot want to have transactions edited against the General Ledger Master file andposted to the Temporary General Ledger file.

If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y(Yes) to N (No), you must first clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledgerfile. When you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually removethe members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger files ifother applications that interface with GL are not installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenother applications and GL. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you mustactivate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

B11 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT- Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question B02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining thecompany options.



Define company options

B12 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY INFORMATION FORCUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information.

If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question B18.

B13 TYPE THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWING RESPONSESAPPLY.


The number you enter must be between 1 and 89. The first company number mustbe 1. Remember that if you install other applications that allow for multiplecompanies, the company numbers should be consistent across all the applications.

This question does not appear if you selected single company support in the CASquestionnaire (X03=N). If you use single company support, the company numberdefaults to 1.

If IFM is installed and interfacing, be sure the companies in COM correspond to thefinancial divisions in IFM. Company and financial division refer to the same type ofunit; COM uses the term company and IFM uses the term financial division.

B14 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS).

Type a 15-character company name associated with the company number youentered in question B13. The system uses the company name as part of theheadings on your reports.

The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The first time youanswer this question, the default is MAPICS/DB. After that, the company name thatyou previously typed in for the particular company appears.

You cannot add, change, or delete company names using COM Company Master filemaintenance. You add new companies to the Company Master file using thequestionnaire. You cannot delete companies from the Company Master file once youhave added them. To “soft” delete a company, follow these steps:



1. Change the company name to one that the operators readily recognize, such as’***DELETED***’, using the System Control Data–Field Format option on the CASMaintenance/Change menu (AMZM30). (Select the CZ record and update theinformation using F23.) This should discourage the operators from selecting thiscompany.

2. Run the questionnaire. Use this question to blank out the company name.

B15 WHAT IS YOUR CURRENT PROCESSING MONTH/PERIOD?

1 = JANUARY OR PERIOD 1


Enter the number that corresponds to the month or period when you want to postcurrent Sales Analysis data.

Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise,unpredictable results may occur.

B16 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT- N

If you need to add or change more companies, answer Y (Yes) and return toquestions B13 and B14 to enter the next company number and name. If you haveadded or changed all companies, answer N (No) and continue with the nextquestion.

This question does not appear if you selected single company support in the CASquestionnaire (X03=N).

B17 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGCOMPANY INFORMATION?

DFLT- Y

This question completes the “Define company options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake and want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes)and return to question B13 or B14, depending on your response to question X03.

Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the report options.




B18 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORCUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information.

If this application is already installed, you can answer Y (Yes) or N (No) dependingon what needs to be changed.

If you answer N (No), you have completed the COM questionnaire.

B19 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF RECORDCHANGES FOR SELECTED MASTER FILES?

DFLT- Y

When you add or change a master file record from the workstation, the information isimmediately available for use by other areas of your application.

Answer Y (Yes) to print before and after images of the files maintained by thefollowing menu options:

• AMBM60 option 11, Salesreps• AMBM62 option 1, Item Master• AMBM71 option 1, Maintain Rules• AMBM71 option 2, Maintain Rule Priorities• AMBM71 option 4, Maintain Intercompany Accounts• AMBM73 option 4, Maintain Interface Control File• AMBM73 option 5, Maintain General Ledger Master (if General Ledger is not

installed)

This report is the audit trail of all manual changes made to these master files. Wesuggest that you answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application.If you decide later you no longer need a printed report of file changes, rerun thequestionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.



B20 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT- Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question B19.


COM_Net

COM_Net

Note: These questions begin with a lowercase c rather than the uppercase Cshown in this text.


C01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR COM_NET

DFLT-Y

Answering Y (Yes) allows you to see the questions associated with your installedapplicaitons

Answering N (No) exits the questionnaire.

C02 HOW DO YOU SELECT COM_NET WAREHOUSE?

DFLT - 1

This option determines the warehouse that will be assigned to the customer order.

1. Use warehouse in customer master record.

2. Use COM_Net default warehouse. (See next question.)

3. Use User Exit.

4. Unused.

C03 ENTER DEFAULT COM_NET WAREHOUSE

DFLT - BLANK

This question only appears when the previous question was answered with option 2.

Response is mandatory.

C04 SELECT PRICING OPTION

DFLT - 1

1. Entry/Update time

2. Update time only


COM_Net

Option 1 shows the user the price, but therefore takes longer. The price will berecalculated when the order is copied from offline files to live files.

Option 2 does not show the user the price and runs faster. The price will becalculated when the order is copied from offline files to live files.

C05 DO YOU WANT COM_NET TO AUTOMATICALLY UPDATE ORDERSENTERED THROUGH COM_NET ORDER ENTRY?

DFLT - Y

This option will allow the customer-entered orders to go directly to the live databasewithout user intervention. They can still be put on hold depending on the answer tothe next question.

SYSCTL position 14

C06 DO YOU WANT COM_NET TO PLACE ORDERS ON COM_NET HOLD?

DFLT - N

This option will apply an order hold with a designation of ‘CN’ to all orders comingfrom COM_Net. The order level holds will be managed in the same way as otherorder-level holds, such as PO hold, credit hold, etc.

C07 INVENTORY AVAILABILITY DEFINITION

DFLT - 1

• Available inventory = On-hand• Available inventory = On-hand - Allocated + On-order• Available inventory = On-hand - Allocated

C08 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT - Y

This question completes the COM_Net questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion c02. answer N (No) to exit the questionnaire.

Note: Within COM_Net, all question numbers begin with a lower-case ‘c’.


Enterprise Product Data Management

Enterprise Pr oduct Data Mana gement


D01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORENTERPRISE PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), skip to question D12.

D02 DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCT COSTING?

DFLT-N

If you want to use the product costing function, answer Y (Yes). This causes the sizeof the Item Master file to double from one to two records per item to accommodateEnterprise Product Data Management (EPDM) costing data. If you answer N (No),you cannot use the product costing function. For more information, see theEnterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and the PDM User’s Guide.

D03 DO YOU WANT PRODUCTION FACILITY STANDARD EFFICIENCY TO BEUSED FOR CALCULATING STANDARD AND CURRENT COSTS?

DFLT-Y

If you want production facility standard efficiency to be used in EPDM productcosting calculations, answer Y (Yes). If you answer Y (Yes), EPDM uses the valuefrom the Facility Master file. If you answer N (No) or if you do not select the FacilityMaster file, EPDM uses a value of 1.00 (100%) for production facility efficiency. (Formore information, see question D07 or the Enterprise Product Data ManagementConcepts Guide and the PDM User’s Guide).

D04 DO YOU WANT TO USE FEATURE/OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

If you want features and options, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want features andoptions, answer N (No). For more information, see the Enterprise Product DataManagement Concepts Guide and the PDM User’s Guide.



D05 DO YOU WANT TO USE “USER SEQUENCE” FOR YOUR BILLS OFMATERIAL?

DFLT-Y

If you want to be able to maintain and retrieve your bills of material in a user-specifiedsequence and have duplicate component items in your bills of material, answer Y(Yes). If you do not want this function, answer N (No), and your bills of material aremaintained and retrieved in component item sequence.

For more information, see the Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guideand the PDM User’s Guide.


Note: The sequence you choose controls the order in which the structure recordsare retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the EPDM questionnaire andchange the sequence, you must reorganize the Product Structure file for the changeto take effect.

D06 HOW DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE IN RELATION TOCOMPONENT ITEMS?1. USER SEQ./COMPONENT ITEM2. COMPONENT ITEM/USER SEQ.


This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D05. Enter thesequence in which you want components to be retrieved for maintenance, inquiry,and reports.

Continue with question D07.

Note: The sequence you choose controls the order in which the structure recordsare retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the EPDM questionnaire andchange the sequence, you must reorganize the Product Structure file for the changeto take effect.

D07 DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCTION FACILITIES?

DFLT-Y

This question does not appear if PC&C is installed and interfacing because theFacility Master file must exist for PC&C. This question does not appear if there areexisting Routing Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you areinstalling the REP application.

If you want the Facility Master file, answer Y (Yes). For more information, see theEnterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and the PDM User’s Guide.



Use the RMVM command to manually remove the Facility Master file from the disk ifall of the following conditions are true:

• This is not your initial installation.• You are changing your response to this question from Y (Yes) to N (No).• PC&C is not installed and interfacing.• REP is not installed.• The Routing file (RTGHDR) is not needed.


D08 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE STANDARD ROUTING OPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D07 or if PC&C isinstalled and interfacing. This question does not appear if there are existing RoutingMaintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you are installing theREP application.

If you want Routing data for standard operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want to useoperation yield, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use the expanded item-receivingcapability in Purchasing, answer Y (Yes). Otherwise, answer N (No). For moreinformation, see the Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and thePDM User’s Guide.


D09 DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL ROUTING DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D08. If you needmore than 20 characters of text for your routing operation descriptions, answer Y(Yes) to create the Routing Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999lines of 40-character text for each routing operation description. If you do not needadditional routing operation descriptions, answer N (No).

D10 IF MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING IS TO BE INSTALLED LATER, DOYOU WANT ADDITIONAL MRP INFORMATION IN THE ITEM MASTER FILE?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you did not request the product costing function(question D02). If you answer Y (Yes), the size of the Item Master file is doubled toaccommodate the future MRP data. If you answer N (No), the size of the Item Masterfile remains at one record per item.



D11 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made an error or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion D02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.


D12 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FOREPDM?

DFLT-Y



D13 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY

(UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

The 15-character company name entered at this time appears in your reportheadings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is notlabeled DFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that,the company name that you type in appears.

If you answered Y (Yes) to question D04 (features/options), continue with questionsD14 through D34.

If you answered N (No) to question D04 (features/options), skip to question D35.



The following questions appear only if you requested features and options (questionD04). You can type in 0, 1, or 2 for each question up to where the accumulation ofyour answers for this series of feature/options questions equals 20. When this totalequals 20, question D35 appears. If this total exceeds 20 (maximum), you areautomatically returned to the beginning of this series, question D14.

Note: Once the S-number template is defined for features and options, if youdecide to change the field sizes, you should revisit every F/O item’s structure toensure the correct options are selected.

D14 WHAT IS THE FIELD SIZE FOR THE OPTIONS OF FEATURE 01?












































D34 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you have made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to returnto question D13. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.




D35 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR EPDM?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), you have completed the EPDM portion of the questionnaire.

D36 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLENTERPRISE PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT MASTER FILE RECORDSWHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master file record (such as item or Facility Masterinformation) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by otherareas of your application. If you want the system to print a report showing how theinformation appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). Thisreport is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. Toprovide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first installthe application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no longernecessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.


D37 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define report options”section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question D36.


Financial Analysis

Financial Anal ysis


F01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR FINANCIALANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation, answer Y (Yes) to show the options. If this application isalready installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needsto be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question F08.

F02 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE AUTOMATIC JOURNAL ENTRY FEATURE OFFINANCIAL ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Automatic Journal Entry feature. If youdo not need this feature now, answer N (No).

F03 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE BUDGET PREPARATION FEATURE OFFINANCIAL ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Budget Preparation feature. If you donot need this feature now, answer N (No).

F04 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FINANCIAL RATIOS FEATURE OF FINANCIALANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Financial Ratios feature. If you do notneed this feature now, answer N (No).


Financial Analysis

F05 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FIXED ASSET ACCOUNTING FEATURE OFFINANCIAL ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Fixed Asset feature. If you do not needthis feature now, answer N (No).

F06 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FINANCIAL STATEMENT REPORT WRITERFEATURE OF FINANCIAL ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Financial Statement Report Writerfeature. If you do not need this feature now, answer N (No).

F07 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR IFM G/L LINES?

DFLT-N

This question appears only when IFM is installed. Answer Y (Yes) if you want to keeptransaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extract file. If the answer is N(No), transaction details will not be saved in the Transaction Extract File.

F08 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question F02. Answer N (No) to begin defining report options.


Financial Analysis


F09 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR FINANCIALANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation you must answer Y (Yes) so that you can enter essentialinformation. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N(No), depending on what you need to change.

F10 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLFINANCIAL ANALYSIS MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master record (such as a fixed asset) from theworkstation, the information is immediately updated in the master record andavailable for use. If you want the system to print a report showing how the informationappeared before and after the change was made, as well as when and by whom thechange was made, answer Y (Yes).

This report is the printed audit trail for all manual changes made to your master files.In case you need to recover master files for which you have no current backup, youcan use this report to identify transactions which you must type in again. Answer Y(Yes) to this question when you first install the application. At a later date you canrerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question, if you decide the printedreport of changes is no longer necessary to your company.

F11 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY


This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to X03.

The number you enter must be between 1 and 89.

Enter a valid company number and answer the next two questions as they appear.When this question appears again, enter the next valid company number. Youcontinue in the same way for each company number you need to enter. Rememberthat if you install applications that allow for multiple companies, the companynumbers must be consistent across all applications.


Financial Analysis

F12 WHAT IS THE BUDGET VARIANCE PERCENT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANTTHE BUDGET VARIANCE REPORT TO HIGHLIGHT?

DFLT-150

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to F03.

If you enter a value, the system highlights, as a warning, any proposed budgetamount whose variance from the current budget or actual amount exceeds this limit.The highlighting is on the Budget Variance Report. The message is only a warning.You can still post the proposed budget. However, you may want to review the budgetfactors and adjust the proposed budget amount before posting it. If you enter 000,the system does not edit the budget variances against a limit.

Budget variances are expressed as the proposed budget amount percentage of thecurrent budget amount. For example, if the current budget is $300 and the newbudget is $450, the budget variance prints as 150%.

Enter the budget variance percent as a whole number.

F13 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

If you answer Y (Yes), return to question F10 to enter the next company number. Afterentering all of your company numbers, answer N (No) to this question and continuewith the rest of the questionnaire.

F14 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-N


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question F09. You have now completed answering all the tailoring questionsnecessary for your Financial Analysis application.


Forecasting

Forecasting

After you complete the questionnaire, there are still more tasks to complete beforeyou are finished implementing Forecasting. Because these tasks are only done at thetime you first install Forecasting, they are referred to as implementation tasks.Throughout Forecasting, you see references to the “implementation phase.” Beforeyou answer the questionnaire for the first time, read the “Managing Forecasting”section of the Forecasting User’s Guide for a description of the implementationphase steps.


201 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORFORECASTING?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N(No), the questionnaire skips to “Define report options.”

If your answer is N (No), skip to question 227.

202 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is installed and interfacing or is beinginstalled at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing an interface betweenFCST and MRP. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate theinterface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivateinterfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

You must answer Y (Yes) to be able to release forecasted requirements of end itemsand service parts to MRP. If you answer N (No), forecasted requirements cannot bereleased to MRP.

Note: This interface must be activated before you can release requirements toMRP.


Forecasting

203 DO YOU WANT TO PASS FORECASTED REQUIREMENTS TO THE DEMANDINTERFACE FILE?

DFLT-N

You must answer Y (Yes) to be able to release forecasted requirements of end itemsand service parts to the Demand Interface file (DMDIFF) for use by MPSP. If youanswer N (No), the Demand Interface file is not loaded with forecasted requirements.

The Demand Interface file contains item number/warehouse requirements over amaximum of three years. The first year is composed of a maximum of 52 weeklyperiods; the second and third years are composed of 12 or 13 periods each.

Note: The master schedule code (MSCOD) must be set to “M” for each itemwhose forecasted requirements are to be released to the Demand Interface file.

204 HOW MANY YEARS DO YOU WANT TO FORECAST?


The answer to this question must be 1, 2, or 3 (years). Period forecasts can begenerated for up to 3 years. Forecasts for year 1 are tactical, statistical forecasts.Forecasts for years 2 and 3 are strategic projections based upon life cycles.

Note: If your answer is 2 or 3, you must supply data to define each of your lifecycle curves.

205 DO YOU WANT TO PASS SAFETY STOCK REQUIREMENTS TO THE ITEMBALANCE FILE?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the safety stock calculated in Forecasting to update thesafety stock quantity in the planning warehouse and selling warehouse Item Balancerecords. If you answer Y (Yes), the safety stock calculated in Forecasting is used inmaterial requirements calculations in MRP.

206 DO YOU WANT TO PASS REORDER POINT QUANTITY TO THE ITEMBALANCE FILE?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the reorder point calculated in Forecasting to update thereorder point quantity in the planning warehouse and selling warehouse ItemBalance records. This field is useful for master scheduling and managing non-time-phased items.


Forecasting

207 DO YOU WANT TO USE UNIT COST DEFAULT FROM THE ITEM MASTERFILE?

DFLT-Y

To value the forecasts, you must maintain an item standard cost for each end item orservice part maintained in Forecasting. If you answer Y (Yes), the unit cost defaultvalue from the Item Master file automatically updates the unit cost field inForecasting. If you answer N (No), the unit cost field in Forecasting must bemaintained manually.

Note: The unit cost field in Forecasting is a required field.

208 DO YOU WANT TO USE VALUE CLASS FROM THE ITEM MASTER FILE?

DFLT-Y

The value class is used to determine reporting priorities. If you maintain the valueclass within the Item Master file and answer Y (Yes) to this question, the value classassigned to a master level item (MLI) in the Item Master file automatically updatesthe value class field in Forecasting. If you answer N (No) to this question, the valueclass field in Forecasting must be maintained manually. If you manually maintain thisfield, the value class can be defined to mean whatever you want. For instance, youmight assign value classes based upon standard cost and annual demand.

209 DO YOU WANT TO USE ITEM CLASS FROM THE ITEM MASTER FILE?

DFLT-Y

The item class is used to determine reporting priorities. If you maintain the item classwithin the Item Master file and answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item classassigned to each forecasted item in the Item Master file automatically updates theproduct line field in Forecasting. If you answer Y (Yes), and depending on youranswer to question 210, you can maintain the other positions of the product line fieldwithin Forecasting. If you answer N (No), the product line can be defined to meanwhatever you want. For instance, you might assign product lines based uponproduct manager assignments.

Note: The product line field in Forecasting is a required field.



Forecasting

210 DO YOU WANT ITEM CLASS TO BE LEFT-ADJUSTED IN PRODUCT LINE?

DFLT-Y

If you answer Y (Yes) to question 209, you must determine whether the item classfield should be left-adjusted or right-adjusted in the product line field. If you answer Y(Yes), item class is loaded into product line left-adjusted. If you answer N (No), itemclass is loaded into product line right-adjusted.

211 DO YOU WANT TO USE CUMULATIVE MATERIAL LEAD TIME FROM THEITEM BALANCE FILE?

DFLT-Y

The cumulative material lead time (CMLT) is used to determine the time fence inwhich requirements are added to MRP. If you answer Y (Yes), the CMLT fieldmaintained in the Item Balance file automatically updates the CMLT field inForecasting. If you answer N (No), the CMLT field in Forecasting must be manuallymaintained.

Note: If the Item Balance file is not present, CMLT cannot be automatically passedfrom that file.

212 HOW MANY FIRST YEAR PERIOD FORECASTS SHOULD BECONVERTED TO WEEKLY FORECASTS?


In this question, you designate the number of forecast periods to be converted intoweekly forecast buckets. The maximum number of forecast periods to be converted is12 if you are using monthly forecast periods or if you are using 4- or 5-week forecastperiods. The maximum number of forecast periods to be converted is 13 if you areusing 4-week forecast periods. Your answer to question 213 determines the maximumnumber of forecast periods.

Note: The number of periods to convert should be as long as the longestcumulative material lead time (CMLT). This ensures that the conversion from periodsto weeks does not influence the material plan within the CMLT.

213 HOW MANY YEARS OF DEMAND HISTORY DO YOU WANT TO RETAIN?


You must designate how many years of demand history you want to retain. Themaximum number of years of demand history Forecasting retains is six. The answerto this question controls when Demand History records are removed from theDemand History file.


Forecasting

214 TYPE IN THE YEARS OF DEMAND HISTORY YOU ARE SUPPLYING (TWODIGITS FOR EACH YEAR WITH NO BLANKS OR COMMAS).

During initial installation, you must identify which years of demand history are beingsupplied. The maximum number of years of demand history Forecasting accepts issix. List the last two digits of each year of demand history supplied, beginning withthe most recent year and going back in time. The first time you answer this question,the default is blank. After that, the years of demand history that you previously typedappear.

The system sets up your current period and year to be period 12 of the year, which isone less than the system year when you install. The most recent year of history tosupply, which is the first year you enter, must also be equal to one less than thesystem year. Also, if you are not installing at the beginning of a year, you have to runmultiple period update processes to bring the system up to the real current period.

For example, if you are installing in July 1990, the system initializes your ForecastControl record to current period 12 and current year 1989; and sets you up at theend of your last full year. Your most recent year of history would then be 1989, andyou would enter 89 as the first two digits here, followed by 888786, and so on for asmany years of history as you have.

Your answer to this question is independent of the previous question (question 219).The years of history you are supplying in question 220 can be less than the years ofhistory you are retaining in question 219.

Note: You must prepare the Item Summary files and run Demand History Extract bychoosing option 1 from the Seasonal Update menu (AM2M50), after you havecompleted the install/tailor process. Refer to the Forecasting User’s Guide for theITSMnn data requirements. For example, if you answer this question with 888786,then you must prepare ITSM88, ITSM87, and ITSM86. Refer to the Forecasting User’sGuide for the ITSMXX data requirements. For example, if you answer this questionwith 888786, then you must prepare members ITSM8821, ITSM8722, and ITSM8623.

215 DO YOU WANT TO RETAIN DEMAND HISTORY BY SELLING WAREHOUSE?

DFLT-N

If you want to retain demand history by each selling warehouse, you must answer Y(Yes). If you are not using selling warehouse demand history for seasonality analysis,answer N (No) to this question.

216 WHAT IS THE HIGHEST SEASONAL GROUP PROFILE CODE ASSIGNED?


During initial installation and subsequent retailoring, you must identify the highestseasonal group profile code assigned in Forecasting. You should specify severalmore seasonal group profile codes than you actually intend to use. This allows


Forecasting

modification of your seasonal group profile code assignments without retailoring tocreate more seasonal group profile codes.

For example, if you initially assign your products into 13 seasonal groups, you shouldspecify approximately 20 seasonal group profile codes during initial installation.

A maximum of 999 seasonal group profile codes is available. Typically, less than 25seasonal group profile codes are assigned.

217 WHAT IS THE HIGHEST LIFE CYCLE PROFILE CODE ASSIGNED?


During initial installation and subsequent retailoring, you must identify the highest lifecycle profile code assigned in Forecasting. You should specify several more lifecycle profile codes than you actually intend to use. This allows modification of yourlife cycle profile code assignments without retailoring to create more life cycle profilecodes.

For example, if you initially assign your products into 13 life cycle profiles, you shouldspecify approximately 20 life cycle profile codes during initial installation.

A maximum of 999 life cycle profile codes is available. The number of life cycleprofile codes is dependent upon how uniquely the life cycle curves are defined. Youcould have one life cycle curve for the whole company or one life cycle curve foreach item.

218 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OR YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define functional options” section of the questionnaire.If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question 202. Answer N (No) to continue with the questionnaire.


Forecasting


219 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORFORECASTING?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N(No), the questionnaire skips to the end.

Note: It is recommended that you select the reports individually from the reportmenus until you become acquainted with the reports printed during a period update.After you know which reports you want, return to the questionnaire to indicate whichones you want to print during a period update.

If your answer is N (No), skip to the end of the questionnaire.

220 DO YOU WANT EFFECTIVE DATES PRINTED ON YOUR REPORTS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want effective dates to print on reports generated byForecasting. The effective date is a user-defined field that can be used to refer tohardcopy reports in the future. If the effective date is used, the first step in the periodupdate process is to revise the effective date field in the Forecast control record toreflect the last day in the demand reporting period just ended.

221 DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR THE DEMAND HISTORYCONSTRUCTION?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item foreach year of the demand history construction during initial installation. To provide anaudit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first installForecasting. If you later decide that the detailed printed report of demand historyconstruction is no longer necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire andanswer N (No) to this question.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the error records and controltotals are printed.


Forecasting

222 DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR FORECAST MASTEREXTRACTION WITH THE ITEM MASTER FILE?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation and period updates, the contents of the Forecast Master fileare extracted and compared to the contents of the Item Master file for the purpose ofautomatically reconciling the Forecast Master file. The extraction routine addsrecords to, updates records in, and deletes records from the Forecast Master file. Ifyou want the system to print a report showing how the information appeared beforeand after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). This report is the printed audit trailof all changes made to the Forecast Master file. To provide an audit trail, you shouldanswer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install Forecasting. If you later decidethat the detailed printed report of changes is no longer necessary in your company,rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed (nolist of added item numbers is generated).

223 DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR PERIOD DEMAND DATACAPTURE?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item atthe end of each period when demand data is captured. To provide an audit trail, youshould answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install Forecasting. If you laterdecide that the detailed printed report of demand data captured is no longernecessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed.

224 DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR THE INVENTORYPARAMETER CALCULATION?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item forinventory parameters. To provide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to thisquestion when you first install Forecasting. If you later decide that the detailedprinted report of inventory parameters is no longer necessary in your company, rerunthe questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed.


Forecasting

225 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLFORECASTING MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or update Forecast Master, Seasonal Group Profile, or Life CycleProfile records from the workstation, the information can be used immediately byother areas of Forecasting. If you want the system to print a report showing how theinformation appeared before and after the changes were made, answer Y (Yes). Thisreport is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to the appropriate file. Toprovide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first installForecasting. If you later decide that the detailed printed report of changes is nolonger necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after imageis printed.

226 ENTER YOUR COMPANY’S NAME (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS).

This entry is used in the headings on your reports. The default company nameappears on the last lines of the prompt. The first time you answer this question, thedefault is blank. After that, the company name that you previously typed in for theparticular company appears.

227 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 228. Answer N (No) to complete thequestionnaire.

After you have completed the installation of Forecasting, you must run an implementationprocess for this application. That process is described in “What you need to do after youinstall Forecasting” in Chapter 2 of the Forecasting User’s Guide.


Forecasting


General Ledger

General Ledg er

If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, refer to the“Assigning General Ledger account numbers” appendix in the General LedgerUser’s Guide.


G01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY FUNCTIONAL INFORMATIONFOR GENERAL LEDGER?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answeris N (No), skip to question G05.

G02 DO YOU WANT TO SAVE JOURNAL TRANSACTIONS FROM THE TEMGENFILE INTO AN ON-LINE HISTORY FILE?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to process journal transactions in a journal history file. You can thenaccumulate, archive, and restore journal history, as well as inquire into the JournalHistory file, and print journal history reports.


G03 DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN GL/FA?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to install Multiple Currency,

A foreign subsidiary can keep reports in its own currency but send results to itsparent company in the parent company’s currency. The parent company canproduce consolidated reports showing subsidiaries’ result in side-by-side format.


General Ledger

G04 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion G02. Answer N (No) to begin defining the constants options.


G05 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORGENERAL LEDGER?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answers are Y (Yes) to questions X03 and G05, continue with question G06.

If your answers are N (No) to questions X03 and G05, continue with question G16.

If your answers are N (No) to question X03 and Y (Yes) to question G05, skip toquestion G16.

G06 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY



The question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,the company number is always 1.

G07 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)


General Ledger

You must enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15-character company name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports.This name is associated with the company number entered in question G06.

The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the companyname that you entered appears on the last line as the default company name.

If you answered Y (Yes) to question X01, continue with question G09.

If you answered N (No) to question X01, continue with question G08.


General Ledger

G08 WHAT IS THIS COMPANY’S FIRST FISCAL MONTH?


If you are reinstalling the company after a processing cycle has started, continuewith question G13.

The computer assumes that each company has an independent accounting cyclefor the 12-month accounting year. The answer to this question tell General Ledger inwhich month to begin year-to-date calculations.

Answer with the fixed number associated with the month.

01 = January02 = February03 = March04 = April05 = May06 = June07 = July08 = August09 = September10 = October11 = November12 = December

For example, if this company’s first fiscal month is July, type in 07.

If you previously answered this question, your last response appears as the default.If Financial Analysis is installed, be sure to review “Changing fiscal years” in Section7 of the Forecasting User’s Guide before you change your response.

Note: The 13-period accounting year always starts with period 1.

G09 WHAT IS THE FIRST FISCAL MONTH PERIOD FOR WHICH GENERALJOURNAL TRANSACTIONS WILL BE PROCESSED?

LOW-1 HILIM-13 OR 12 DFLT-1

The answer to this question tells the computer in which fiscal period or month youwant the General Ledger application to begin processing general journaltransactions.


General Ledger

Answer with period 01-13 for period accounting or the fixed number associated withthe month.

01 = January02 = February03 = March04 = April05 = May06 = June07 = July08 = August09 = September10 = October11 = November12 = December

The General Ledger application performs control functions which require a responseto this question. When you load the General Ledger Master file, you enter accountbalances for all periods previous to this period, including the previous year amounts.However, once you enter a batch of journal transactions for this company, you canchange General Ledger amounts only by using journal entries to adjust them.

G10 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD CURRENCY IDS FOR THISCOMPANY?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to this question to set the Original and the Transaction Currency IDs.

Set the Original and Transaction Currency IDs if the balances in the General LedgerMaster file record types 1-3, Original Balances (current, budget, and last year), arenot in the local currency or will be translated for this company.

G11 ENTER ORIGINAL BALANCES CURRENCY ID (UP TO 3 CHARACTERS)

The answer to this question indicates the currency in which the balances in recordtypes 1-3, Original Balances (current, budget, and last year), in the General LedgerMaster file are recorded.

Enter the three-character Original Balances Currency ID. If balances are in the localcurrency, leave this field blank and press Enter .

Note: This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question G10.

G12 ENTER TRANSLATION CURRENCY ID (UP TO 3 CHARACTERS)

The answer to this question indicates the currency in which balances in the GeneralLedger Master file will be translated.

Enter the three-character Translation Currency ID.


General Ledger

If you entered blanks in question G11, the Original Balances Currency ID will equalthe local currency.

If you entered an ID in question G11, the Translation Currency ID will be the same.The Translation Currency ID represents the “from” currency, and the local currency isthe “to” currency.

Note: This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question G10.

G13 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

This question tells the computer if you have entered all your companies. When youanswer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question G06 to enter the next companynumber, name, and the information that applies to that company. After you enter allyour companies, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of thequestionnaire.

If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question G06.

If your answer is N (No), continue with question G14.

If you answered N (No) to question X03, question G13 is not asked.

G14 WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF MONTHS OR PERIODS TO BE USED FORCHECKING VALID POSTING DATES?


Enter a number that is the maximum number of months or periods you want betweenthe last calendar month or fiscal period and the current posting date. The answer tothis question determines which months or periods. following the last closed one(month or period), are valid for posting.

For example, you answer 02 to this question. You last closed the month of August.Any date in September or October is valid, and a warning message is issued if youenter any other posting date.

G15 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y



General Ledger

If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes).Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.

If you answered N (No) to question X03 and answered Y (Yes) to question G15, thequestionnaire returns to question G05.

If you answered Y (Yes) to questions X03 and G15, the questionnaire returns toquestion G06.

If you answered N (No) to question G15, continue with question G16.


G16 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD THE REPORT OPTION FORGENERAL LEDGER?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time. answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question G18.

G17 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALL GENERALLEDGER MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master file record, such as account definition, from theworkstation, the information can be used immediately by other areas of yourapplication. If you want the application to print a report showing how the informationappeared before and after you changed it, answer Y (Yes).

This report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files.In case you need to recover master files for which the backup is not current, you canuse this report to identify transactions which you must enter again. To provide anaudit trail, answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application. If youdecide later that the printed report of changes is N (No), no longer necessary in yourcompany, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.

Note: When you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor after linesprint on the File Maintenance Report.


General Ledger

G18 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE RESPONSE CONCERNING THE REPORTOPTION?

DFLT-N


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion G17. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.


International Financial Management

International Financial Mana gement

When IFM is installed, it interfaces and shares information with several other MAPICSXA applications. Your answers to this questionnaire affect how IFM interfaces withCOM, IM, PC&C, PUR, PR, and REP. Information about the interfaces is in the IFMUser’s Guide.


501 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORINTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y

Answering Y (Yes) allows you to see the questions associated with your installedapplications.

Answering N (No) exits the questionnaire.

502 DO YOU WANT TO PASS MAPICS LEDGER TRANSACTIONS TOINTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing COM, IM, PC&C, andREP, and PR to pass general ledger transactions to IFM.

Answering Y allows you to set up the GLI account rules and rule priorities and tosimulate account assignments using the IFM unit/nature format without actuallypassing transactions to IFM. This means that units and natures appear on the GLIdisplays instead of account numbers. However, you still use existing accountnumber rules and rule priorities, if present, to assign and edit accounts and createledger transactions.

Note: The COM assign and edit accounts and create ledger entries menu optionsare disabled when IFM is installed and interfacing because their functions occurduring COM invoicing.

To have the interfacing applications begin assigning and editing accounts andpassing ledger transactions to IFM in the unit and nature format, you must activatethe interfaces between IFM and these applications using Cross Application Support.See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces option in the “Maintenance/Change” chapterof the CAS User’s Guide.

Answering N (No) to this question does the following:

• Allows COM, IM, PC&C, and REP to continue assigning and editing accountsand generating transactions using existing account number rules and rulepriorities, if present



• Allows PR to continue generating transactions using existing account numbers, ifpresent

For more information, see “IFM and the GLI applications” in the IFM User’s Guide.

503 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MAPICS PURCHASING?

DFLT-N

This question appears only if Purchasing (PUR) is installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing IFM to perform the PURpayables processing (invoicing) functions. You must then activate the interfacebetween IFM and PUR using Cross Application Support. See the Activate/DeactivateInterfaces option in the “Maintenance/Change” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Answering N (No) to this question allows you to perform PUR file maintenance usingthe IFM format. You can set up your vendors, vendor/items, and terms for use withIFM but you cannot use IFM for invoicing.

For more information, see the “Using IFM with the other MAPICS XA applications”topic in the IFM User’s Guide.

504 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MAPICS CUSTOMER ORDERMANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

This question appears only if Customer Order Management (COM) is installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing IFM to work with theCOM invoicing and credit checking functions. You must then activate the interfacebetween IFM and COM using Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces option in the “Maintenance/Change” chapter of the CAS User’sGuide.

Answering N (No) to this question allows you to perform COM file maintenance andterms calculations using the IFM format but you cannot use IFM with COM invoicingand credit checking.

For more information, see the “Using IFM with the other MAPICS XA applications”topic in the IFM User’s Guide.



505 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the IFM questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion 502. Answer N (No) to exit the questionnaire.




Inventory Management

Inventor y Management


I01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORINVENTORY?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all optionsand enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you cananswer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question I35.

I02 DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS TRANSACTIONS IN BATCH MODE?

DFLT- Y

If you want transactions to update the master files in batch mode, answer Y (Yes) tothis question.

If you want transactions to immediately update the master files, answer N (No).

For more details, see the “Transaction Processing” chapter in the InventoryManagement User’s Guide.

I03 DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING SUPPORT FOR PURCHASE ORDERS

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to release purchase orders and process purchase receipttransactions. Y (Yes) is required if you are installing the MRP, PC&C, or PURapplications. If you answer N (No), you cannot release purchase orders or processpurchase receipt transactions, and no report or display shows purchase on-orderinformation.

Questions I45 and I48 are skipped if you answer N (No).

You must manually remove the Purchase Order Item Detail file (POITEM) from thedisk, using the RMVM command, if all of the following conditions are met:

• This is not your initial installation.• You are changing your response to this question from Y (Yes) to N (No).



• PUR is not installed and interfacing.• MRP is not installed and interfacing.

Warning: Under no other circumstances should you remove the Purchase OrderItem Detail file from the disk.

I04 DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING SUPPORT FOR MANUFACTURINGORDERS?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to be able to release manufacturing orders and trackissues to and receipts from those orders. Y (Yes) is required if you are installing thePC&C, MRP, or REP applications.

If you answer N (No), you cannot release manufacturing orders, allocate inventory tomanufacturing orders, or process manufacturing receipts and issue transactions,and no report or display shows any manufacturing on-order allocation information.Questions I08, I09, I10, I11, I12, I45, I48, I49, and I61 are skipped if you answer N(No).

You must manually remove the Manufacturing Order Master (MOMAST) file from thedisk, using the RMVM command, if all of the following conditions are met:

• This is not your initial installation.• You are changing your response to this question from Y (Yes) to N (No).• PC&C is not installed and interfacing.• MRP is not installed and interfacing.• REP is not installed and interfacing.

You must manually remove the Manufacturing Order Detail (MODATA) file from thedisk, using the RMVM command, if all of the following conditions are met:

• This is not your initial installation.• You previously answered Y (Yes) to question I03 or I04.• You are now answering N (No) to both questions I03 and I04.• COM is not installed and interfacing.• REP is not installed and interfacing.

The Manufacturing Order Master and Manufacturing Order Detail files must not beremoved from the disk unless all of the conditions listed for the file are met.

I05 WHAT TYPE OF LIFO/FIFO SUPPORT DO YOU WANT?


Answer with one of the following codes:

Code MEANING0 NONE1 LIFO2 FIFO3 BOTH



See “Period Closing Activity” (LIFO/FIFO valuations) chapter in the InventoryManagement User’s Guide for detailed information on LIFO/FIFO support. QuestionsI57 and I58 are skipped if you accept the 0 (NONE) default.

If this application is already installed and you are changing your response from 1, 2,or 3 to 0, you must manually remove the LIFO/FIFO Transaction Save (LIFITR) filefrom the disk using the DELETE command. A LIFO/FIFO transaction file is notcreated if your answer is 0 (NONE). If your answer is 1, 2, or 3, the file is created.

I06 WHAT COSTING METHOD DO YOU WANT FOR INVENTORYACCOUNTING?



Code MEANING1 STANDARD2 AVERAGE3 LAST

See “Item costing” in Chapter 2 of the Inventory Management User’s Guide for moreinformation.

I07 DO YOU WANT PHYSICAL INVENTORY/CYCLE COUNT SUPPORT?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the cycle counting function as described in the“Physical Inventory” chapter of the Inventory Management User’s Guide.

If you answer Y (Yes), you must also answer questions I59 and I60.

I08 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR THE MATERIAL DETAILLIST?

1=COMPONENT2=WH/LOCATION/COMPONENT3=USER SEQUENCE/COMPONENT



Code MEANING1 COMPONENT2 WAREHOUSE/LOCATION/COMPONENT3 USER SEQUENCE/COMPONENT



This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. See the“Managing Inventory Management,” “Order Release and Closeout,” and “Reportdescriptions” chapters in the Inventory Management User’s Guide for additionalinformation.

I09 DO YOU WANT A SEPARATE WAREHOUSE PICKING LIST?

DFLT- Y

This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04.

The warehouse picking list is a shop packet function. If you want a separate pickinglist to be printed in warehouse stocking location sequence, answer Y (Yes). Theseparate warehouse picking list is printed before the shop packet worksheets.

If you do not want a separate warehouse picking list, answer N (No).

See the “Managing Inventory Management,” “Order Release and Closeout,” and“Report descriptions” chapters in the Inventory Management User’s Guide foradditional information.


I10 DO YOU WANT THE SEPARATE WAREHOUSE PICKING LISTCONSOLIDATED FOR BULK PICK?

DFLT- Y

This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions I04 and I09.

If you want the warehouse picking list consolidated by item for all orders beingreleased, answer Y (Yes). If you want a separate picking list for each order, answer N(No).


I11 WHICH ORDER RELEASE SHORTAGE REPORTS DO YOU WANT TO PRINTDURING BATCH RELEASE OF MANUFACTURING ORDERS?





Code MEANING1 SHORTAGE BY ITEM2 SHORTAGE BY ORDER3 BOTH4 NONE



I12 DO YOU WANT PAGE OVERFLOW WHEN PRINTING COMPONENTEXPLOSIONS?

DFLT- N


If printing of component explosion is requested, answering Y (Yes) causes each neworder to begin on a new page. Answering N (No) causes more than one order to beprinted per page.

I13 DO YOU WANT THE COMPONENTS OF A PHANTOM ITEM TO USE THEIROWN OPERATION WHERE FIRST USED?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the component items of the phantom (created duringorder release) to use their own operation where first used.

For example, if you have a phantom item at operation 20, your component items willhave the operation sequence that you defined for the component in the PSTRUC file.

Answer N (No) to make the components of the phantom item adopt the operationwhere first used of the phantom item. If the component of a phantom item is anotherphantom item, the components for the second phantom item will adopt the operationwhere first used of the first level phantom item.

For example, if you have a phantom item at operation sequence of 20, yourcomponent items of that phantom will all have operation sequence of 20.

I14 SHOULD THE SYSTEM ALLOW A NEGATIVE LOCATION QUANTITY?1- ONCE 2- NEVER 3- ALWAYS





Code MEANING

1 ALLOW THE LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVEBALANCE, BUT ONCE NEGATIVE, DO NOT ALLOW THE QUANTITYTO BECOME MORE NEGATIVE.

2 NEVER ALLOW A LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVEBALANCE THERE IS ONE EXCEPTION TO THIS RULE. IF AN ITEMDEFINED AS INSPECT-ON-RECEIPT IS RECEIVED WITH ANEGATIVE QUANTITY, IT IS ALLOWED. THIS IS NECESSARY INORDER TO CORRECT AN ERROR DURING THE QC (QUALITYCONTROL) OF THE ITEM. THERE IS NO OTHER WAY TO REVERSEA QC TRANSACTION.

3 ALLOW THE LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVEBALANCE, AND ONCE NEGATIVE, ISSUE A WARNING MESSAGEIF AN ATTEMPT IS MADE TO MAKE IT MORE NEGATIVE. THIS WILLALLOW THE QUANTITY TO BE MADE MORE NEGATIVE.

I15 DO YOU WANT QUALITY CONTROL?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to control shelf life on any items stocked in a controlledwarehouse.

If the answer to this question is Y (Yes), then I16 and I18 default to Y (Yes), and thequestionnaire skips to question I17 and then to question I19.

I16 DO YOU WANT BATCH/LOT CONTROL?

DFLT- Y

If you answer Y (Yes), batch/lot numbers are validated during transaction processingin this application, Purchasing, and Customer Order Management if installed andinterfacing. This applies to items stocked in controlled warehouses only. If youanswer Y (Yes), I18 defaults to Y (Yes) and the questionnaire skips to I19.

If you answer N (No), batch/lot numbers can still be entered; however, they are notvalidated.

I17 WILL YOU BE USING DEFAULT LOCATION SUPPORT FOR CONTROLLEDWAREHOUSES?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want transaction entry to issue stock or receive stock into thedefault location which is kept in the ITEMBL file.



I18 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP A HISTORY OF TRANSACTIONS FOR INVENTORYMANAGEMENT?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to look at past inventory transactions in detail.

A transaction history file is updated by the system and contains all transactions in thesequence that they were posted. You can review transaction history on inquirydisplays or on reports. You can choose from a number of sequence and formatoptions for the inquiries and reports. You can also save transactions that you purgefrom the system and restore them temporarily for review.

Answer N (No) if you do not want to maintain a transaction history file for reviewingpast inventory transactions.

You must answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the Invoice To Receipt Matching functionin IFM.

119 DO YOU WANT TO USE GOODS RECEIVED NOTES?

DFLT- N

If you answer Y (Yes), all menu options referring to the Goods Received Notes will beavailable for controlled warehouses.

If you answer N (No), any reference to Goods Received Notes will not function. If youare installing the application for the first time, the Goods Received Notes Master fileis not created if your answer is N (No). If you answer N (No) after initially answering Y(Yes), the file is ignored. You may delete it if you want to.

Note: This question only controls the non-IFM use of the GRN function. If you planto use the GRN field in conjunction with the IFM Invoice to Receipt Matching function,you should answer N (No).

I20 DO YOU WANT FIFO DATE INTEGRITY?

DFLT- N

If you answer Y (Yes), you must include a date for every transaction entered duringInventory Management transaction processing. This function applies to all controlledwarehouses in IM.

Note: Refer to “FIFO date control” in chapter 2 of the Inventory ManagementUser’s Guide for additional information on this option.



I21 DO YOU WANT A WORK IN PROCESS STORE AREA?

DFLT- Y

If you answer Y (Yes), any reference to the Bulk Store Area 01 for each controlledwarehouse will name it Work in Process (WIP).

If you answer N (No), the Bulk Store Area 01 will be referred to as ST01.

I22 DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT TO BE THE FIRST AVAILABLE LOCATIONFOR IOR OR BATCH/LOT ITEMS?

DFLT- N

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I21.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the program to search for the first available approvedstock location for Inspect on Receipt (IOR) or Batch/Lot items.

Answering N (No) causes display AMI3D14L to appear and allows you to type in thestocking location of your choice for the IOR or Batch/Lot items.

Note: Normally IOR and Batch/Lot items are not allowed in a WIP (ST01) location.If you use a WIP location, this message appears: WIP LOCATION IS EMPTY ORNEGATIVE.

I23 DO YOU WANT ALPHABETIC OR NUMERIC SUBDIVISIONS? A = ALPHABETIC N = NUMERIC

DFLT- N

Answering A allows you to establish location subdivisions from A to E only.

Answering N allows subdivision from 1 to 5 only.

The default appears on the last line of the prompt.

Note: Changing the answer to this question after assigning stock to these locationscauses unpredictable results throughout the application. Move your stock out of allsubdivisions before changing your answer.

I24 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLINVENTORY MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT- Y

To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes). Then when you add or change master filerecords (such as item number or description) from the workstation, the information isimmediately available for use by other areas of your application. You may find it



useful to be able to print a report reflecting how the file records appeared bothbefore and after any changes. If, at a later date, you decide the report of changes isnot needed, rerun the questionnaire and change the answer to N (No).

Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after lines areprinted on maintenance edit lists.

I25 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTION CONTROL ANDCOSTING?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the PC&C application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenInventory Management and Production Control and Costing. After answering Y (Yes)to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support.See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

I26 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenInventory Management and Customer Order Management. After answering Y (Yes)to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support.See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: When Inventory Management and Customer Order Management are notinstalled together, the Manufacturing Order Detail file must be reorganizedimmediately after the interface is activated to ensure proper processing of data.

I27 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenInventory Management and Material Requirements Planning. After answering Y (Yes)

For more information about the following interface questions, refer to “How information flows between IM and otherapplications” in Chapter 1 of the Inventory Management User’s Guide.

You will be prompted to answer questions I25 through I29 only if the associated application is not currently installedand interfacing.



to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support.See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

I28 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the PDM application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenInventory Management and Product Data Management. After answering Y (Yes) tothis question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. Seethe “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: If you have activated EPDM or if you activate it a later time, PDM will beunavailable. IM then will access EPDM files (BOM, Routings, Facility Master). OnceEPDM has been activated, you cannot go back to using the PDM file set. Attemptingto do so will result in corrupted data and unpredictable results, because the PDM fileset is not maintained after EPDM is activated.

I29 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the Accounts Payable application is being installed at thistime.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenInventory Management and Accounts Payable. After answering Y (Yes) to thisquestion, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the“Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: When interfacing Inventory Management with Accounts Payable, you mustprovide at least one Transaction Entry Batch to be used by Accounts Payable whenoutputting transactions to Inventory Management.

I30 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT- N


If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y(Yes) to N (No), you must first clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledgerfile. When you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually remove



the members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger files ifother applications that interface with GL are not installed.


I31 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP HISTORY FOR MANUFACTURING ORDERS?

DFLT- N

If you answer Y (Yes), manufacturing orders are saved to the manufacturing orderhistory files.

If you answer N (No), history for manufacturing orders is not saved.

I32 DO YOU WANT THE TRANSACTION AMOUNT TO BE CALCULATED FORTHE RP TRANSACTION?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you don’t enter the transaction amount and you want the RP andPQ transaction amounts (last cost and average cost) calculated. If you leave thetransaction amount blank and this question is answered No, then no variance will becalculated for the receipt transaction. If this question is answered No, the PO amountis not used. So even if the PO unit price was overridden, this system will notrecognize the amount.

This question appears only if Purchasing is installed and interfacing.

I33 DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE AVERAGE AND LAST COSTS WHENRECEIVING A MANUFACTURING ORDER OR SCHEDULE COMPLETE?

DFLT- N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the average and last cost to be calculated when a lasttransaction manufacturing receipt is entered.

See “Item costing” in Chapter 2 of the Inventory Management User’s Guide for moreinformation.



I34 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT- Y


If you have made an error or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes)to return to question I02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining theconstants options.


I35 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORINVENTORY MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y



I36 WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF ACTIVE BUSINESS DAYS THIS YEAR?

DFLT- 250

This value is used in the order point calculation.

See “Order point” in the “Managing Inventory Management” chapter of the InventoryManagement User’s Guide for additional information.

I37 WHAT IS THE CARRYING COST PERCENT FACTOR?

DFLT- 20

This value is the default for the item master carrying rate and is used in the economicorder quantity calculation.

See “Economic order quantity” in the “Managing Inventory Management” chapter ofthe Inventory Management User’s Guide.



I38 WHAT IS THE COST DEVIATION PERCENT ALLOWED ON THE RECEIPT OFAN ITEM?

DFLT- 10.0

This value is used to print a warning message on the Transaction Register if the costof a receipt deviates significantly from the unit cost. This field has one decimal place.For example, if 20 is entered, 2.0 percent is used. You do not need to type thedecimal point.

I39 WHAT IS THE ESTIMATED COST OF PLACING AN ORDER FOR AN ITEM?

DFLT- 10.00

This value is used in the economic order quantity calculation. See “Economic orderquantity” in the “Managing Inventory Management” chapter of the InventoryManagement User’s Guide. This field has two decimal places.

I40 WHAT IS THE REORDER TOLERANCE PERCENT?

DFLT- .000

This value is used to determine if an item’s available quantity is near enough to thereorder point to cause it to be printed on the reorder report. This field is threepositions long and has three decimal places.

I41 WHAT IS YOUR INVENTORY AVERAGING FACTOR?

DFLT- .25

This value is used in averaging calculations. See “Alpha factor/averagingcalculations” in the “Managing Inventory Management” chapter of the InventoryManagement User’s Guide.

I42 ENTER YOUR COMPANY’S NAME (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

This entry is used in the headings on your reports. The default company nameappears on the last line of the prompt. The first time you answer this question, thedefault is blank. After that, the company name that you previously typed in for theparticular company appears as the default.



I43 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGINVENTORY SYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT- Y


If you have made an error or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes)to return to question I36. If your answer is N (No), continue with the next question.


The next group of questions asks for default values for report option displays. Thesevalues can be changed each time you run a report. See the “Report descriptions”chapter of the Inventory Management User’s Guide for information on reports.

I44 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR INVENTORYMANAGEMENT?

DFLT- Y


If your answer is N (No), this question completes the questionnaire for thisapplication.

I45 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PURCHASE ORDER STATUSREPORTS?


Answer with one of the following codes for the print sequence you want:

Code MEANING1 DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE2 PLANNER/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE3 ITEM/WAREHOUSE/ORDER4 PLANNER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE/ORDER5 VENDOR/ORDER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE6 VENDOR/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE7 PLANNER/VENDOR/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE8 ORDER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE

This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I03. This responsecan be overridden on the options display when the program is run.



I46 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR MANUFACTURING ORDERSTATUS REPORTS?

LOW- 1 HILIM-6 DFLT- 1


Code MEANING1 DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE2 PLANNER/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE3 ITEM/WAREHOUSE/DUE DATE4 PLANNER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE5 START DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE6 PLANNER/START DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE


I47 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PURCHASING ANDMANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 DUE DATE2 PLANNER/DUE DATE3 ITEM4 PLANNER/ITEM

This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions I03 or I04. Thisresponse can be overridden on the options display when the program is run.

I48 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM DESCRIPTION AND REFERENCENUMBERS ON PURCHASE ORDER STATUS REPORTS?

DFLT- Y




I49 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM DESCRIPTION AND QUANTITYBREAKDOWN ON MANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?

DFLT- Y


I50 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT EXPLOSION ONMANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?

DFLT- Y

This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. Answering Y(Yes) causes the printing of component detail in addition to manufacturing ordersummary information.

This response can be overridden on the options display when the program is run.

I51 WHICH SECONDARY CALCULATION DO YOU WANT ON THE ABCANALYSIS REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 COST X ON-HAND QUANTITY2 PRICE X ESTIMATED ANNUAL USAGE


I52 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ITEM DESCRIPTION ON REORDER REPORTS?

DFLT- Y

Answer Y (Yes) or N (No). This response can be overridden on the options displaywhen the program is run.



I53 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR FINANCIAL STOCKANALYSIS REPORTS?

LOW- 1 HILIM-6 DFLT- 1


Code MEANING1 ITEM NUMBER2 VENDOR3 DATE OF LAST USE4 PROFIT AMOUNT5 PROFIT PERCENT6 ON-HAND COST


I54 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR STOCK MOVEMENTANALYSIS REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 ITEM NUMBER2 VENDOR3 DATE OF LAST USE


I55 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR REORDER REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 WAREHOUSE2 VENDOR3 ITEM




I56 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR STOCK STATUS REVIEWREPORTS?



Code MEANING1 ITEM2 CLASS3 VENDOR


I57 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PERIOD-END/YEAR-ENDCLOSE STOCK STATUS REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 ITEM2 CLASS


I58 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR LIFO/FIFO REPORTS?



Code MEANING1 WAREHOUSE2 ITEM3 ITEM TYPE4 ITEM CLASS


Note: If you answered 0 to question I05, this question is skipped.



I59 WHICH UNIT COST DO YOU WANT TO USE WHEN CALCULATING ON-HAND COST FOR LIFO/FIFO INVENTORY VALUATION REPORTS?


Answer with one of the following codes for the unit cost you want to use:

Code MEANING1 STANDARD2 AVERAGE3 LAST


Note: If you answered 0 to question I05, this question is skipped.

I60 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR THE TOTAL PHYSICAL/CYCLE COUNT LIST?



Code MEANING1 ITEM2 WAREHOUSE3 STOCK LOCATION



Note: If you answered N (No) to question I07, this question is skipped.

I61 DO YOU WANT THE QUANTITY ON-HAND TO PRINT ON THE TOTALPHYSICAL/CYCLE COUNT LIST?

DFLT- Y


Answer Y (Yes) or N (No). This response can be overridden on the options displaywhen the program is run.

Note: If you answered N (No) to question I07, this question is skipped.



I62 WHAT DEFAULT OPTION DO YOU WANT FOR MANUFACTURING ORDERRELEASE PER CUSTOMER ORDER?


This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. Answer with oneof the following codes:

Code MEANING1 ONLY ITEMS WITH S-NUMBERS2 ALL ITEMS ON CUSTOMER’S ORDERS

If you are not installing PDM, answer with code 2. This response can be overriddenon the options display when the program is run.

I63 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT- Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses in the “Define reportoptions” section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question I45.


Manufacturing Performance Analysis

Manufacturing P erformance Anal ysis

MPA application dependencies

For MPA to be installed, Inventory Management must be installed. In addition, thefollowing measurements require other MAPICS XA applications to be functional:

Some measurements optionally use data from Material Requirements Planning if it isinstalled and interfacing with MPA:

• Master Schedule Performance (MPM 3)• Inventory Performance Profile (MPM 5)• Inventory Turnover Trend (MPM 14)• Excess Inventory Analysis (MPM 15).

Before you answer your MPA questionnaire, review the answers to the followingquestions in Customer Order Management and Inventory Management to ensurethat all of your Manufacturing Performance Measurements are selectable.

Measurement Required Application

Customer Order Booking Performance (MPM 1) Customer Order Management

Customer Order Backlog Analysis (MPM 2) Customer Order Management

Shipping Performance (MPM 4) Customer Order Management

Bill of Material Accuracy Performance (MPM 7) Product Data Management

Queue Performance (MPM 12) Production Control & Costing

Output Performance (MPM 13) Production Control & Costing




Answer YES to the tailoring question, “Do you want booking records placed in theMonthly Activity File.” The following measurement is dependent on this question:

Customer Order Booking Performance (MPM 1)

Production Monitoring & Control

Answer YES to the tailoring question, “Do you want to interface with InventoryManagement.” The interface must be activated before transaction receipts formanufacturing and purchase orders will be passed to MPA.


Answer YES to the tailoring question, “Do you want order tracking support forPurchasing Orders.” The following measurements are dependent on this question:

• Purchase Commitment Performance (MPM 8)• Order Reschedule Reliability (MPM 9).

Answer YES to the tailoring question, “Do you want order tracking support forManufacturing Orders.” The following measurements are dependent on thisquestion.

• Master Schedule Performance (MPM 3)• Bill of Materials Record Accuracy (MPM 7)• Order Reschedule Reliability (MPM 9)• Order Release Reliability (MPM 10)• Material Availability Reliability (MPM 11).

Note: If you retailor the tracking for purchase orders or manufacturing orders fromNO to YES in IM, you must answer your MPA questionnaire again.

Purchasing

Purchasing always sets the IM question for purchase order tracking to YES. If youinstall Purchasing after MPA, and IM did not have purchase order tracking, you mustanswer your MPA questionnaire again.

Preinstallation

Before installing MPA, review the “Functional Description” and “Implementation”sections of the User’s Guide. After you load the MPA application, answer this tailoringquestionnaire to activate the appropriate application interfaces for your MAPICS XAenvironment.

After you install the program and tailor the application, review and maintain eachmeasurement using the Measurement Master Maintenance option from the FileMaintenance menu (AM7M30). The “Implementing and using” section of the User’sGuide describes the Measurement Master Maintenance options available and theimplementation steps you should follow when you install MPA.



Use the following table to define your defaults.

Table B-1. Measurement Master defaults

MPM Fre

quen

cy

Low

targ

et v

alue

Hig

h ta

rget

val

ue

Dol

lar

basi

s

Uni

t bas

is

# of

his

tory

per

iods

# of

fore

cast

per

iods

(hi

stor

y +

fore

cast

= 2

6)

Def

ault

date

for

past

due

R/M

Cos

t cal

cula

tion

met

hod

Use

req

/pla

nned

ord

ers

in M

RP

Incl

ude

sche

dule

rec

eipt

s

# of

per

iods

to d

eter

min

e av

aila

bilit

y

Incl

ude

cust

omer

req

s in

ava

ilabi

lity

calc

ulat

ions

Exc

ess

perio

d le

ngth

s

1–Booking

2–Backlog

3–MSP

4–Shipping

5–InventoryPerformance

6–Inventory Record

7–BOM

8–POs

9–Order reschedule

10–Order release

11–Material availability

12–Queue

13–Output

14–Inventory Turnover

15–Excess Inventory

Notes:1 (Booking), 2 (Backlog), and 4 (Shipping) should be the same frequency.3 (MSP) should be a frequency equal to changes to your master production schedule.5 (Inv perf) and 14 (Inv turn) should be the same.6 (Inv record) should correspond to your cycle counting frequency.7 (BOM), 12 (Queue), and 13 (Output) depend on order closeout and purge in IM and PCC9 (Order reschedule), 10 (Order release), and 11 (Material avail) correspond to MRP regeneration or re-planinventories.




701 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORMANUFACTURING PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all optionsand enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you cananswer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.


Note: Questions 702 through 705 are shown only if the associated applications arenot currently installed and interfacing.

702 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenManufacturing Performance Analysis and Customer Order Management. After youanswer Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” section of the CASUser’s Guide.

703 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTION CONTROL ANDCOSTING?

DFLT-N


Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenManufacturing Performance Analysis and Production Control and Costing. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” section of the CASUser’s Guide.



704 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenManufacturing Performance Analysis and Material Requirements Planning. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” section of the CASUser’s Guide.


DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define functionaloptions” section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 702.



Define constant options

706 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANTS INFORMATIONFOR MANUFACTURING PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all optionsand enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you cananswer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.

If your answer is N (No), you have completed the Manufacturing PerformanceAnalysis portion of the questionnaire.

707 HOW DO YOU WANT TO SPECIFY YOUR MODEL CODE DEFAULT IN THEITEM MEASUREMENT FILE?


Use one of the following codes to select your default:

1 THERE IS NO RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MODEL CODE ANDTHE ITEM CLASS IN ITEM MASTER. YOU MUST ENTER ALL YOURMODEL CODES IN ITEM MEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.

2 WHEN THE MODEL CODE IS BLANK, THE ITEM CLASS FROMITEM MASTER WILL BE USED AS A DEFAULT. IF YOU DO NOTWANT THE ITEM CLASS TO BE USED AS A DEFAULT FOR ANITEM, YOU MUST ENTER A MODEL CODE FOR THAT ITEM IN THEITEM MEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.

3 THEMODEL CODE WILL ALWAYS EQUAL THE ITEM CLASS. THEMODEL CODE FIELD CANNOT BE ENTERED IN ITEMMEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.

Note: Your default should be carefully considered. If you change your value from 1or 2 to a 3, all of the Model Codes in the Item Measurement file will be changed to theItem Class.

708 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define constant options” section of the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define constant options”section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 707.


Master Production Schedule Planning

Master Pr oduction Sc hedule Planning


L01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR MASTERPRODUCTION SCHEDULE PLANNING?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), skip to question L07.

L02 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-

Answer Y (Yes) for MPSP to use customer order data from COM. MPSP usescustomer orders extensively. For example, MPSP blends customer orders withforecasts to determine an item’s independent demand for master schedulegeneration. MPSP also uses customer orders during aggregation of productionfamilies to determine a family’s total demand. Many displays and reports also showthe current information about customer orders.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenMaster Production Schedule Planning and Customer Order Management. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate interfaces” chapter of the CASUser’s Guide.

Answer N (No) if you do not want MPSP to use customer order data from COM.However, if the Demand Interface file (DMDIFF) exists, MPSP looks into that file forany customer order data. See the “Creating and using the Demand Interface file”appendix in the MPSP User’s Guide for more information about the DMDIFF file.

L03 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to get the master scheduled orders into MRP’s planning run. Thenyou can also release master scheduled orders through MRP’s order release functionand update MPSP with order release information from MRP.



If you do not want to plan master scheduled orders in MRP and release them throughMRP’s order release function, answer N (No). MRP runs as if MPSP is not installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenMaster Production Schedule Planning and Material Requirements Planning. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate interfaces” chapter of the CASUser’s Guide.

L04 DO YOU WANT TO SEE YOUR FAMILY OPERATING PLAN INFORMATION INCOSTS OR IN UNITS?1-COSTS 2-UNITS


Enter 1 to review production planning data for production families in terms of costs.

Enter 2 to review production planning data for production families in terms of units.

Your answer to this question sets up defaults for how production planning informationappears. You can change this default at runtime.

L05 WHAT COSTS DO YOU WANT TO USE FOR CALCULATING FAMILY PLANINQUIRIES?1-BASE PLAN COSTS 2-OPERATING PLAN COSTS


Enter 1 to calculate family plan inquiries using the costs in effect when youestablished your base plans.

Enter 2 to calculate family plan inquiries using the costs in effect when youestablished your current family operating plan.

Your answer to this question sets up defaults for how cost information appears on thefamily plan inquiries. You can change this default at runtime.

L06 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question L02. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.




L07 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR MPSP?

DFLT-Y


Answer N (No) to complete the questionnaire.

L08 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLRESOURCE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

If you answer Y (Yes), the Resource Master File Maintenance Edit List (AML599)prints after each Resource Master file maintenance session.

To provide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you firstinstall the application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is nolonger necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.


L09 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT DAILY RATES ON THE FAMILY OPERATING PLANREPORT?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to print daily rates for all family operating plans and theiritem production plans (if included) on the Family Operating Plan Report. Your answerto this question sets defaults vfor printing this report. You can override the default atruntime.

L10 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM PRODUCTION PLANS FOR EACHFAMILY INCLUDED IN THE FAMILY OPERATING PLAN REPORT?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to print the item production plans for each family includedin the Family Operating Plan Report. Answer N (No) if you do not want to print the



item production plans. Your answer to this question sets defaults for printing thisreport. You can override the default at runtime.

L11 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question L07. Answer N (No) to complete thequestionnaire.


Material Requirements Planning



M01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR MATERIALREQUIREMENTS PLANNING?

DFLT-Y


M02 DO YOU WANT TO USE NET CHANGE PLANNING?

DFLT-Y

If you will be running only Generation Runs and no Net Change Planning Runs,answer N (No) to this question because product structure maintenance performancewill be significantly improved.

If Customer Order Management is not installed, skip question M03.

M03 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH THE CUSTOMER ORDERMANAGEMENT APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to include customer backlog information in your inquiries and on yourreports. Otherwise, answer N (No).

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenMaterial Requirements Planning and Customer Order Management. After answeringY (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross ApplicationSupport. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: This interface must be activated before you can receive customer backloginformation from COM.

M04 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH THE INVENTORY APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y



Answer Y (Yes) to be able to release orders from MRP (planning system) to InventoryManagement (execution system). If you answer N (No), you cannot release ordersfrom MRP to IM.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenMaterial Requirements Planning and Inventory Management. After answering Y (Yes)to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support.See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Note: This interface must be activated before you can release orders to IM.

M05 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question M02. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.


Payroll

Payroll

If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, see“Assigning general ledger account numbers” appendix in the Payroll User’s Guide.

If IFM is installed, Payroll accounts are in the IFM unit/nature account format ratherthan the GL account number format. For information on setting up the Payroll unit/nature defaults, see the Work with Financial Divisions option in the InternationalFinancial Management User’s Guide.


P01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR PAYROLL?

DFLT-Y

When you first install Payroll, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),depending on what you want to change. If you answer N (No), skip to question P26.

P02 DO YOU WANT TO USE ORDER DISTRIBUTION INFORMATION?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to this question if you plan to install or have already installedProduction Control and Costing (PC&C). The Payroll application generates an OrderDistribution register. If you install PC&C, the Payroll application automaticallygenerates input transactions to PC&C. Enter the following for each transaction youwant to pass to PC&C:

• Order number• Job operation• Sequence number• Run code• Completion code

If you want information to be passed to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) to the Payroll interfacequestion in PC&C.

Answer N (No) and the system does not prompt for these fields. The informationdoes not appear on reports.

P03 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N


Payroll

Answer Y (Yes) if you plan to install or have already installed the General Ledgerapplication. Perform the following tasks while you establish the master files used inPayroll:

• Associate account numbers for each of the department/production facilitycombinations established in the Labor Distribution file. These accounts are theexpense accounts against which the gross payroll is to be debited.

• Associate account numbers with each of the following deductions when youestablish the Deduction Distribution file:

- Miscellaneous- Directed- State- County- Local- Union- SUI- SDI- Other compensation/payments

• These accounts generate the majority of the credit entries for each payroll run.Establish the rest of the accounts to be credited later in this questionnaire.

Even if you have not installed nor plan to install the General Ledger application, youcan still take advantage of this feature. Enter your chart of accounts into the GeneralLedger master file so the system can edit the account numbers. The systemgenerates all transactions for your general ledger and combines them by accountnumber at the end of the month. You can manually capture the transaction amountfor your books. Continue to question P04.

This is the first step in providing the interface between Payroll and General Ledger.You must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” section of the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

If Payroll is already installed and you want to change your response, clear all entriesfrom the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer the questionnaire again. Manuallyremove members from the General Ledger master and Temporary General Ledgerfiles if other applications that interface to General Ledger are not installed.

Answer N (No) so the system will not generate transactions for your general ledger.Use manually prepared journal entries to apply the payroll transactions to yourgeneral ledger. Questions P04, P05, P33 through P41, and P46 do not appear if youanswer N (No).

P04 DO YOU WANT TO DISTRIBUTE PAYROLL EXPENSES TO GENERALLEDGER BY ORDER NUMBER?

DFLT-N

Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions P02 and P03.


Payroll

Answer Y (Yes) to debit the payroll expense accounts by order number withindepartment/production facility. If you answer Y (Yes), the manufacturing ordernumber is included in the General Ledger entry.

Answer N (No) to distribute payroll expenses by department/production facility only.

P05 WILL YOU BE USING A CASH ACCOUNTING METHOD?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to manually prepare and post accrual entries at the end of the month.Question P36 does not appear.

Answer N (No) to let the system make the accrual entries for the end of the month.Enter the accrual period during data entry. The Labor Distribution register prints in asequence of accrual period within company. The system writes records to theGeneral Ledger master file for each accrual period you entered during data entry.The application may write many more records to the general ledger than if cashaccounting is used.

P06 DO YOU WANT TO ENTER HOURS BY DAY?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to balance time records to attendance or to check each employee’stotal daily hours, or if you plan to use automatic overtime calculation on a daily basis.

Answer N (No) to group all time for a pay period. You will be unable to distinguishtime entered for a particular day. Question P42 does not appear.

P07 DO YOU WANT TO DO UNION PROCESSING? (DEDUCTIONS ANDREPORTING)

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if any of the following are true:

• You calculate union deduction using the same hourly rate or the samepercentage of gross for everyone in the union.

• You divide union deduction into several categories, such as pension fund, grouplife, benefit fund, and so on.

• You need the weekly and monthly reports that show who worked in each union,how much each employee was paid, and what the deduction amount was foreach category.

Answer N (No) to treat your union deductions as miscellaneous deductions. Thesystem does not report money deducted from the employee’s check to the union.Questions P08 and P35 do not appear.


Payroll

P08 DO YOU WANT EMPLOYER PAID UNION FRINGES APPLIED AS INDIRECTLABOR?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to apply the cost of employer-paid rate-per-hour or percent-of-grossunion fringe benefit expenses to a specific account as indirect labor. Answer N (No)if you do not have this requirement.

Note: The system applies all employer-paid fixed-amount union fringe benefitexpenses as indirect labor.

P09 DO YOU WANT STATE DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if of the following are true:

• You must report earnings of employees who work in more than one state to theappropriate state.

• You withhold a state income tax from each employee’s wages.

• You report state unemployment insurance (SUI).

• You report state disability insurance (SDI).

Answer N (No) if you none of these is true. Question P10 does not appear.

P10 DO YOU WANT TO WITHHOLD STATE DISABILITY INSURANCE?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if any state in which your employees work requires a state disabilityinsurance (SDI) deduction from the employee’s check.

Answer N (No) if you do not have this requirement.

P11 DO YOU WANT COUNTY DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you withhold a county income tax from each employee’s wages.

Answer N (No) if you have no county income tax to withhold.


Payroll

P12 DO YOU WANT CITY OR LOCAL DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you withhold local or city (municipality) income tax from eachemployee’s wages.

Answer N (No) if you have no local income tax to withhold.

P13 DO YOU WANT TO RECONCILE YOUR PAYROLL CHECKS ON THESYSTEM?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) so the system can add a summary of each check you wrote to theCheck Reconciliation file. When you receive your bank statement and canceledchecks each month, you can enter the number of each check that has been cashedor voided. The system compares the canceled paycheck numbers to the ones in thefile, and prints a listing of non-canceled checks.

Answer N (No) so no operations connected with check reconciliation in Payroll areactive.

P14 DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW EMPLOYEES TO WORK IN COMPANIES OTHERTHAN THEIR HOME COMPANY?

DFLT-N

Appears only if you select multiple-company support.

Answer Y (Yes) to automatically create the intercompany payable and intercompanyreceivable accounting transactions when an employee works for a company otherthan the one to which he or she is assigned.

Answer N (No) to flag as an error any employees assigned to one company andclaiming time worked for another company. Questions P40 and P41 do not appear.

P15 DO YOU WANT AUTOMATIC OVERTIME CALCULATIONS?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to automatically calculate overtime hours for employees who are paidweekly or biweekly. Define an overtime parameter record in the Labor Distribution filefor each department in which the system should calculate automatic overtime.


Payroll

See the “Automatic overtime calculation” appendix in the Payroll User’s Guide todecide if this function applies to your company.

P16 DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT PAYROLL HISTORY?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to capture payroll check and stub information and store it in theHistory file.

P17 DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW ELECTRONIC DEPOSIT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to allow electronic deposit deductions. You can take an electronicdeposit deduction, create prenotes, and format records to NACHA requirements.

Warning: Payroll does not transmit the deposits. See the “Electronic deposit”section in the Payroll User’s Guide to decide if this function applies to your company.

P25 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion P02. Answer N (No) to continue.


Payroll


P26 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORPAYROLL?

DFLT-Y

When you first install Payroll, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),depending on what you want to change.

Answer N (No) to skip to question P56.

P27 WHAT IS THE CHECK AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THE PAYROLLSYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT HOURLY EMPLOYEES? (ZERO ASSUMES NO HIGHLIGHTING)

DFLT-0.00

Enter a reasonable maximum amount that any hourly employee can be paid in oneperiod. The Payroll register sends a warning message if an hourly employee’s checkexceeds the value you enter. For example, to specify a maximum check of $250,enter 25000; the application inserts the decimal point. The system writes the check,but you have an audit of this exceptional condition. If the Gross Earnings registerprogram detects an employee with a gross amount above this limit, the system printsa warning on the register. The system provides early warning of a possible error inthe number of hours or rates. If you do not enter a value, Payroll does not check for amaximum check amount.

P28 WHAT IS THE CHECK AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THE PAYROLLSYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT SALARIED EMPLOYEES? (ZERO ASSUMES NO HIGHLIGHTING)

DFLT-0.00

This question is the same as question P27, but relates to salaried employees. Whenyou establish this maximum, remember that company executives will normally beincluded in this category (salaried pay type).

P29 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY CONSTANTSRELATED TO PAYROLL?

DFLT-Y


Payroll

When you first install Payroll, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) orN (No), depending on what you want to change.

Answer N (No) to skip to question P55.

P30 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY.


Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question X03.

Enter a number between 1 and 89. The first company number you choose must be 1.Company numbers should be consistent across all MAPICS XA applications youinstall.

If IFM is installed, be sure the companies in PR correspond the financial divisions inIFM. Company and financial division refer to the same type of unit; PR uses the termcompany and IFM uses the term financial division.

P31 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

Enter a 15-character name for each company number you plan to install. The nameappears as part of the headings on your reports and is associated with the companynumber entered in question P30 or company 1 if you answered N (No) to questionX03.

When you first install Payroll, the default is blank. After that, the company name youhave previously typed in for the particular company appears on the last line as thedefault company name.

P32 WHAT IS THE LENGTH OF YOUR PAYROLL CHECK FORM? 1 = 7 INCHES 2 = 11 INCHES


Choose the length of the check form you want this company to use. The standardcheck form has a 3-1/2-inch stub and a 3-1/2-inch check. The standard stub showsup to 12 detailed lines of earnings/advances and deductions/benefits. The long formhas a 7-1/2-inch stub over a 3-1/2-inch check. The long stub shows up to 34 detailedlines.


Payroll

P33 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR CASH-IN-BANK?

DFLT-0

Enter the account number you normally credit as a result of writing a payroll check.All payroll checks for this company credit this account number with the net amount ofthe check. If you have several payroll accounts, enter the account number used mostoften; manually transfer the amounts to be credited to the other accounts, using ajournal entry each pay period. The number you enter must be a valid general ledgeraccount number for this company.

If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), a zero appears on displays,The system uses the number 9999997 as the default on all reports. Add the generalledger number (either the number you chose or the default—9999997) to the GeneralLedger master file.

P34 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FEDERALINCOME TAX WITHHELD?

DFLT-0

Enter the liability account established for the income tax payable to the Federalgovernment. The total amount of FIT deducted during each payroll run is credited tothis account. The number you enter must be a valid account number for thiscompany.

If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), zero appears on displays. Thesystem uses the number 9999997 as the default on all reports. Add the generalledger number (either the number you chose or the default—9999997) to the GeneralLedger master file.

P35 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR EMPLOYER-PAID UNION FRINGE BENEFITS EXPENSE?

DFLT-0

Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question P07.

Enter the expense account debited for any union benefits the employer must pay.The account to be credited is the one established in the Deduction Distributionmaster file for the union. If you answered Y (Yes) to question P08, this account isused for all employer-paid union fringe benefit expenses. The number you enter mustbe a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.

If you answered N (No) to question P08, this account is used for employer-paid fixed-amount union fringe benefit expenses only.


Payroll


P36 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCRUEDSALARIES AND WAGES?

DFLT-0

Appears only if you answered N (No) to question P05.

Enter the liability account number established for the accrual of wages in a periodother than the period in which the payroll check is printed. The number you entermust be a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.


P37 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORINTERCOMPANY RECEIVABLES?

DFLT-0


Enter the asset account debited when an employee from this company works inanother company but is paid by his or her home company. The number you entermust be a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.


P38 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FORINTERCOMPANY PAYABLES?

DFLT-0


Enter the account number, corresponding to the account in Question P37, that youwant to credit for the company in which the employee worked (other than his or herhome company). The number you enter must be a valid account number in thegeneral ledger for this company.


Payroll


P39 WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REGULAR HOURS PER DAY ANEMPLOYEE SHOULD WORK?

HILIM-24 DFLT-0


Enter a number of regular hours that, if exceeded, you want the system to issue awarning message. (In most cases, eight is the maximum.) The application prints awarning message on the Current Hours Proof if, for any one day, more than thespecified maximum appears for the total regular hours for that day. This editindicates that some hours should have been put into overtime.

If you enter no value, the application assumes no maximum regular hours per dayand prints no warning messages. If you calculate hours on a premium-hours basis,consider how often your employees work more than their regular hours before youdecide whether to enter a value.

P40 WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REGULAR HOURS PER PAY CYCLEAN EMPLOYEE SHOULD WORK?

HILIM-99 DFLT-0

This question is the same as question P39, but for pay cycle instead of day. Itestablishes whether the system prints warning messages when a maximum numberof regular hours per pay cycle is exceeded. The system compares the value youenter to the total regular hours entered for an employee for one pay cycle. Thesystem prints a warning message on the Current Hours Proof if the maximum isexceeded. If you have employees paid on several pay schedules, such as weekly,biweekly, and semimonthly, enter the maximum hours associated with the cycle inwhich most employees are paid. For instance, if the largest pay cycle is biweekly,you should enter 80. In this case, if you also have employees who are paidsemimonthly and monthly, the warning message appears for each one of thembecause their normal regular hours exceed the normal biweekly value.

If you enter no value, the system assumes no maximum hours per pay period andprints no warning messages.

P41 DO YOU REQUIRE SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL RATES?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to apply a shift differential rate to the employees’ normal rates forsecond and third shift work.


Payroll

Answer N (No) if you do not need a shift differential.

If you answer N (No) to this question and to question X03, skip to question P55. If youanswer N (No) to this question and Y (Yes) to question X03, skip to question P44.

P42 IS YOUR SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL COST APPLIED AS INDIRECT LABOR?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if shift differential ¥ hours worked is directed to a burden account,and is not considered part of the direct labor cost.

Answer N (No) if it is a part of direct labor cost.

If Production Control and Costing (PC&C) is installed and you use the applicationinterface to transfer data from Payroll to PC&C, changing your response can result ina mixture of some direct labor that includes shift differentials and some direct laborthat does not. For example, if you previously answered N (No) to this question, thesystem has been including shift differential on the direct labor passed to PC&C. Ifyou change your answer to Y (Yes), shift differential is no longer included in directlabor passed to PC&C. Therefore, jobs currently open will have some labor costs thatinclude shift differential and some that do not.

P43 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SHIFTDIFFERENTIAL COST?

DFLT-0


Enter the indirect labor account assigned to the extension of shift differential ¥ hours.The number you enter must be a valid general ledger account number for thiscompany.

If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), zero appears only display. Thesystem uses the number 9999997 as the default on all reports. Add the generalledger number (either the number you chose or the default—9999997) to the GeneralLedger master file.

P44 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

Appears only if you answered N (No) question X03.

Answer Y (Yes) if you have more companies. Return to question P30 to enter the nextcompany number and name (questions P30 and P31) and the information thatapplies to that company. Return to question P30.


Payroll

Answer N (No) when you have entered all companies. Continue to question P55.

P55 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion P29. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.


P56 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORPAYROLL?

DFLT-Y

When you first install Payroll, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer Y (Yes) or N (No),depending on what you want to change.

Answer N (No) to complete the questionnaire.

P57 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES FOR ALLPAYROLL MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to print a report that shows how information appeared before andafter you changed a master record. When you add or change a master record (suchas an employee name and address), the information is immediately available for useby other areas of your application. The report is the printed audit trail of all manualchanges made to your master files. When you first install Payroll, you should answerY (Yes) to this question. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is nolonger necessary, run the questionnaire again and answer N (No).

P58 DO YOU WANT YEAR-TO-DATE AMOUNTS TO PRINT ON THE PAYROLLCHECK STUB?

DFLT-N


Payroll

Answer Y (Yes) to see year-to-date gross earnings and taxes on the check stub of allchecks written on the system.

If you do not answer this question, the system assumes the default of N (No). See“Special forms” on page C-1 for more information.

P59 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE EMPLOYEE’S ADDRESS ON THE PAYROLLCHECKS?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print the employee’s address on the check.

If you do not answer this question, the system assumes the default of N (No). See“Special forms” on page C-1 for more information.

P60 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT QUARTER-TO-DATE YEAR-TO-DATE REGISTER?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print the Year-To-Date/Quarter-To-Date Earnings register with thenormal reports each pay period.

Answer N (No) to not print it.

You can override your answer when you print checks and reports.

P61 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE VACATION HOLIDAY SICK-PAY REGISTER?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print the Vacation/Holiday/Sick register with the normal reportseach pay period.



P62 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE STATE COUNTY AND LOCAL REPORT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print the State, County and Local Report with the normal reportseach pay period.


Payroll



P63 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE WORKER’S COMPENSATION WORKSHEET?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print the Worker’s Compensation Worksheet with the normalreports each pay period.


Payroll



P64 DO YOU WANT TO SHOW PROD. FACILITY DISTRIBUTION ON YOURLABOR DISTRIBUTION REPORT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you have established production facilities within departments andwant the report to show totals for each of these facilities. The Labor Distributionregister prints in total by department number. You must enter the time using thedepartment and facility numbers associated with the hours worked before thesystem can calculate any meaningful facility totals. The system uses the home facility(or the production facility associated with the order if Production Control and Costingis installed) as the default.

P70 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion P57.

Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.


Product Data Management

Product Data Mana gement


E01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR PRODUCTDATA MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), skip to question E12.

E02 DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCT COSTING?

DFLT-N

If you want to use the product costing function, answer Y (Yes). This causes the sizeof the Item Master file to double from one to two records per item to accommodatefuture Material Requirements Planning (MRP) data and Product Data Management(PDM) costing data. If you answer N (No), you cannot use the product costingfunction. For more information, see “Managing Product Data Management” in theProduct Data Management User’s Guide.

E03 DO YOU WANT PRODUCTION FACILITY STANDARD EFFICIENCY TO BEUSED FOR CALCULATING STANDARD AND CURRENT COSTS?

DFLT-Y

If you want production facility standard efficiency to be used in PDM product costingcalculations, answer Y (Yes). If you answer Y (Yes), PDM uses the value from theProduction Facility file. If you answer N (No) or if you do not select the ProductionFacility file, PDM uses a value of 1.00 (100%) for production facility efficiency. (Formore information, see question E07 or the Product Data Management User’s Guide.)

E04 DO YOU WANT TO USE FEATURE/OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

If you want features and options, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want features andoptions, answer N (No). For more information, see “Managing Product DataManagement” in the Product Data Management User’s Guide.



E05 DO YOU WANT TO USE “USER SEQUENCE” FOR YOUR BILLS OFMATERIAL?

DFLT-Y

If you want to be able to maintain and retrieve your bills of material in a user-specifiedsequence and have duplicate component items in your bills of material, answer Y(Yes). If you do not want this function, answer N (No), and your bills of material aremaintained and retrieved in component item sequence.

For more information, see “Managing Product Data Management” in the ProductData Management User’s Guide.


Note: The sequence you choose controls the order in which the structure recordsare retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the PDM questionnaire andchange the sequence, you must reorganize the Product Structure file for the changeto take effect.

E06 HOW DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE IN RELATION TOCOMPONENT ITEMS?1. USER SEQ./COMPONENT ITEM2. COMPONENT ITEM/USER SEQ.


This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E05. Enter thesequence in which you want components to be retrieved for maintenance, inquiry,and reports.

Continue with question E07.

Note: The sequence you choose controls the order in which the structure recordsare retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the PDM questionnaire andchange the sequence, you must reorganize the Product Structure file for the changeto take effect.

E07 DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCTION FACILITIES?

DFLT-Y

This question does not appear if PC&C is installed and interfacing because theProduction Facility file must exist for PC&C. This question does not appear if thereare existing Routing Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if youare installing the REP application.



If you want the Production Facility file, answer Y (Yes). For more information, see“Managing Product Data Management” in the Product Data Management User’sGuide.

Use the RMVM command to manually remove the Production Facility file from thedisk if all of the following conditions are true:

• This is not your initial installation.• You are changing your response to this question from Y (Yes) to N (No).• PC&C is not installed and interfacing.• REP is not installed.• The Routing file (ROUTNG) is not needed.


E08 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE STANDARD ROUTING OPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E07 or if PC&C isinstalled and interfacing. This question does not appear if there are existing RoutingMaintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you are installing theREP application.

If you want Routing data for standard operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want to useoperation yield, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use the expanded item-receivingcapability in Purchasing, answer Y (Yes). Otherwise, answer N (No). For moreinformation, see “Managing Product Data Management” in the Product DataManagement User’s Guide.


E09 DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL ROUTING DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E08. If you needmore than 20 characters of text for your routing operation descriptions, answer Y(Yes) to create the Routing Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999lines of 40-character text for each routing operation description. If you do not needadditional routing operation descriptions, answer N (No).

E10 IF MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING IS TO BE INSTALLED LATER, DOYOU WANT ADDITIONAL MRP INFORMATION IN THE ITEM MASTER FILE?

DFLT-Y

This question appears only if you did not request the product costing function(question E02). If you answer Y (Yes), the size of the Item Master file is doubled to



accommodate the future MRP data. If you answer N (No), the size of the Item Masterfile remains at one record per item.

E11 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made an error or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion E02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.


E12 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORPDM?

DFLT-Y



E13 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY

(UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

The 15-character company name entered at this time appears in your reportheadings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is notlabeled DFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that,the company name that you type in appears.

If you answered Y (Yes) to question E04 (features/options), continue with questionsE14 through E34.

If you answered N (No) to question E04 (features/options), skip to question E35.



The following questions appear only if you requested features and options (questionE04). You can type in 0, 1, or 2 for each question up to where the accumulation ofyour answers for this series of feature/options questions equals 20. When this totalequals 20, question E35 appears. If this total exceeds 20 (maximum), you areautomatically returned to the beginning of this series, question E14.

E14 WHAT IS THE FIELD SIZE FOR THE OPTIONS OF FEATURE 01?












































E34 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you have made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to returnto question E13. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.




E35 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR PDM?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), you have completed the PDM portion of the questionnaire.

E36 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALL PRODUCTDATA MANAGEMENT MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master file record (such as item or production facilityinformation) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by otherareas of your application. If you want the system to print a report showing how theinformation appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). Thisreport is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. Toprovide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first installthe application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no longernecessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.


E37 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define report options”section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question E36.


Production Control and Costing

Production Contr ol and Costing


C01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORPRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, youcan answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question C20.

C02 DO YOU WANT TO SCHEDULE MANUFACTURING OPERATIONSBACKWARD FROM THE ORDER DUE DATES?

DFLT-N

Your answer here tells the system if you want to use forward scheduling or backwardscheduling in figuring operation dates.

A Y (Yes) answer means you want backward scheduling. The operation dates arebased on the order due date.

A N (No) answer means you want forward scheduling. The operation dates arebased on the system date, the date of work list generation.

If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y(Yes) to N (No), be sure to run option 7 from the File Maintenance menu (AMCM70) toreschedule all of your open manufacturing orders.

C03 WHICH METHOD OF ORDER COSTING DO YOU WANT?

1-NO ORDER COSTING, 2-STANDARD ORDER COSTING,3-ACTUAL ORDER COSTING




This defines to the system the order costing routines to be used in the generation ofboth standard and actual (or transaction) costs. Answer with one of the followingcodes:

Code MEANING

1 NO ORDER COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE PERFORMED. THESYSTEM PLACES ZEROS IN ALL OF THE STANDARD AND ACTUALCOST FIELDS.

2 STANDARD COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE USED IN THEGENERATION OF ACTUAL (OR TRANSACTION) COSTS. THESYSTEM EXTENDS WORK CENTER STANDARD RATES BY LABORTRANSACTIONS FOR ACTUAL COSTS.

3 ACTUAL COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE PERFORMED. THESYSTEM USES EMPLOYEE RATES TO GENERATE LABORTRANSACTION COSTS. AN ACTUAL TRANSACTION COST CANBE ENTERED BY ITSELF USING THIS OPTION. ACTUAL COSTSCAN BE CALCULATED ONLY IN SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE.

Note: Employee rates are used only if the Payroll application is installed andinterfacing with Production Control and Costing.

C04 DO YOU WANT TO REFRESH OPERATION RATES FROM PRODUCTIONFACILITY FOR INITIAL OPERATION CHARGE?

DFLT-Y

When you release a manufacturing order, the operation record gets the standardwork center rate from the Production Facility file. This rate may change over time. Touse the work center rate that is in effect at the time an operation is started, answer Y(Yes). Answer N (No) to use the standard work center rate that was in effect when themanufacturing order was released.

C05 HOW WOULD YOU LIKE YOUR PRODUCTION RATIO EXPRESSED?

1-HOURS PER PIECES 2-PIECES PER HOURS


This defines to the system the way to express the production ratio on the OrderStatus—Production Report. If you want the ratio expressed as hours per piece,answer 1. The system then divides total to date operation hours by total to datequantity worked. If you want the ratio expressed as pieces per hour, answer 2. Thesystem will divide total to date quantity worked by total to date actual operationhours.

C06 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY SHOP ACTIVITY TRANSACTION EDITS?

DFLT-Y



If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, you cananswer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.

Shop activity transaction edits occur during the data entry and edit programs of shopactivity update. They affect the move and labor transaction edit logic by activating ordeactivating the edits specified in the explanations of questions C07, C08, C09, C10,C11, and C12. A Y (Yes) answer also allows you to create a shop activity errorrecovery file in question C13. If your answer is N (No), skip to question C14.

C07 DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS SHOP ACTIVITY IN SEQUENCE?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). This defines to the systemthe relationship between operation status changes in shop activity update and theoperation sequence of open manufacturing orders. If you want to process insequence, answer Y (Yes) so that the system requires labor and move completes tobe in sequence. Also, move transactions have to be consecutive. If you do not wantto process in sequence, then answer N (No), and the system processes statuschanges without checking previous operation status.

C08 HOW SHOULD MOVE TRANSACTIONS OCCUR?

1-NO MOVE TRANSACTIONS, 2-MOVE TO NEXT OPERATION,3-MOVE TO NEXT WORK AREA


This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). This defines to the systemhow to edit the move transaction in shop activity update. Answer with one of thefollowing codes:

Code MEANING

1 DO NOT ALLOW ANY MOVE TRANSACTIONS.

2 ALLOW THE MOVE TRANSACTION TO GO TO THE NEXTOPERATION ONLY, SO THAT THE NEXT OPERATION FIELD CAN BEEDITED PROPERLY.

3 ALLOW THE MOVE TO GO TO A WORK AREA ON OTHER THANAN OPERATION, SO THE SYSTEM CAN USE THE NEXT WORKAREA FIELD.



A move to the next operation may change the next operation’s status. Also, theorder’s current work area may be updated to be at that operation. A move to a workarea may update only the order summary to show the order’s current work area. Theoperation status of the next operation is changed only by the first transaction againstit. The order summary’s current work area is updated to show the order to be at thisoperation at that time. Additionally, the move install options for no moves and moveto work area causes the work list generation programs to include in queue analysisany operation with a status of 10 that follows an operation with a status of 40 or 50within a manufacturing order.

C09 DO YOU WANT SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE TO EDIT TRANSACTIONQUANTITY COMPLETE?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to compare theactual (or transaction) operation quantity reported (worked and scrapped) to dateagainst the expected operation quantity for an exception message, answer Y (Yes).The expected quantity is the quantity worked of the previous operation. For the firstoperation, the expected quantity is the order quantity, minus the quantity in splitorders, plus the order quantity deviation. When the actual quantity reported is overthe expected quantity by the tolerance entered in question C10, the system prints awarning exception message in the shop activity edit programs. If you do not want theedit to occur, answer N (No). When an operation status is changed to labor complete(40), a further check is made due to this option between the operation quantityreported and the expected quantity. If the quantity reported is less than the quantityexpected by more than the tolerance specified in question C10, then an exceptionmessage is printed.

C10 WHAT IS YOUR EDIT TOLERANCE PERCENTAGE FOR QUANTITYCOMPLETE?


This question is asked only if C06 and C09 were answered Y (Yes). The tolerancepercentage specified here is used in the two edits requested by question C09. Thetolerance is a whole number and is added to 100% before the edits are performed. Avalue of 25 is 125% and represents 1-1/4 times the comparison value.

C11 DO YOU WANT SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE TO EDIT TRANSACTION HOURSWORKED?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to compare theactual (or transaction) operation time reported to date against the standard time ofthe expected operation quantity for an exception message, answer Y (Yes). Theexpected quantity is the quantity worked of the previous operation. For the firstoperation, the expected quantity is the order quantity, minus the quantity in split



orders, plus the order quantity deviation. The actual time includes setup and run forboth labor and machine hours where these values exist. When the actual timereported is more than the standard expected time by the tolerance entered inquestion C12, a warning exception message is printed in the shop activity editprograms. If you do not want the edit to occur, answer N (No).

C12 WHAT IS YOUR EDIT TOLERANCE PERCENTAGE FOR HOURS WORKED?


This question is asked only if C06 and C11 were answered Y (Yes). The tolerancepercentage specified here is used in the edit requested by question C11. Thetolerance is a whole number and is added to 100 percent before the edit isperformed. A value of 25 is 125 percent and represents one and one quarter timesthe comparison value.

C13 DO YOU WANT TO USE A SHOP ACTIVITY ERROR RECOVERY FILE?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to retain errorsencountered in the batch processing of shop activity update after the updateprogram has been performed, answer Y (Yes) so that the Error Recovery file can becreated. If you do not want the Error Recovery file, answer N (No) and the systemdoes not create one. If you want to remove the Error Recovery file, answer N (No)and the system removes an existing one even if there is data in it.

C14 DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-N

If you need more than 20 characters of text for your manufacturing order operationdescriptions, answer Y (Yes) to use the Manufacturing Order Operation AdditionalDescription file. This file allows you to enter up to 999 lines of 40-character text foreach operation. If you do not need additional operation descriptions, answer N (No).

C15 SHOULD PAYROLL APPLICATION INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTIONCONTROL AND COSTING?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want payroll labortransactions to interface with manufacturing orders in shop activity update, answer Y(Yes) so that the system can copy data from Payroll data entry batches to shopactivity update data entry batches. You still have to activate the interface using the



Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want Payroll labor transactionsto update manufacturing orders, answer N (No).

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Control and Costing and Payroll. After answering Y (Yes) to this question,you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

C16 SHOULD ACCOUNTS PAYABLE APPLICATION INTERFACE WITHPRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want AccountsPayable miscellaneous charge transactions and outside operation cost transactionsto interface with manufacturing orders in shop activity update, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system can copy data from the Accounts Payable data entry batches to shopactivity update data entry batches. You still have to activate the interface using theCross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want Accounts Payablemiscellaneous charge transactions or outside operation cost transactions to updatemanufacturing orders, answer N (No).

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Control and Costing and Accounts Payable. After answering Y (Yes) tothis question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See“Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

C17 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N






C18 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR IFM G/L LINES?

DFLT-N

This question appears only when IFM is installed and the answer to “Do you want tohave General Ledger distribution” is yes. Answer Y (Yes) to have the Create LedgerEntries function keep transaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extractfile. Answer N (No) to not save the transaction details in the Transaction Extract file.

C19 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question C02. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.




C20 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORPRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING?

DFLT-Y



C21 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

The 15-character company name entered at this time appears in your reportheadings. It specifies the name of the company identified for company number one.PC&C does not contain multiple company support. The company name of companynumber one is, however, printed in the heading of each of the PC&C reports.

The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is not labeledDFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, thecompany name that you previously typed in for the particular company appears.

C22 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define constants options” section of the questionnaire.If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return toquestion C21. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.




C23 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORPRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all optionsand enter essential information. If this application is already installed and interfacing,answer Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

C24 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLPRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING MASTER FILES RECORDS WHENTHEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you add or change a master file record (such as production facilitydescription) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by otherareas of your application. If you want the system to print a report showing how theinformation appeared before and after a change was made, answer Y (Yes). Thisreport is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files, suchas the Manufacturing Order Operation Detail file, Manufacturing OrderMiscellaneous Charge Detail file, Manufacturing Order Master file, ManufacturingOrder Material Detail file, and Production Facility file. When these file maintenanceprograms are called by menus in other MAPICS XA applications, the option forbefore and after printing is controlled by the answers in their questionnaires. Toprovide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first installthe application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no longernecessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to thisquestion.


C25 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORT OPTIONS FOR CREATINGSHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?

DFLT-Y


The shop packet is created once for any manufacturing order when requested aspart of a batch flow. Shop packets can be called for multiple orders both in InventoryManagement and in PC&C. The fixed options for this version of the shop packet arespecified in questions C26 through C40, which are used when you run order releasewith shop packets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop



packet creations separately. Refer to the Shop Packet Options—Multiple Ordersdisplay (AMI4E3) in the “Shop Packet Creation” chapter of the Production Controland Costing User’s Guide.


C26 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer is N(No), skip to question C36. If you want shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) sothat the system prints them. If you do not want worksheets, answer N (No).

C27 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you want amaterial picking list, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the material detailinformation while it prints the shop packet worksheets. If you do not want materialcomponent information on your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No). If you wantto work with milestone operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want shop packetworksheets or milestone reporting, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints theworksheets and milestone tickets. If you do not want worksheets or milestone tickets,answer N (No).

C28 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATIONS DETAIL?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantoperations detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system prints the manufacturing order routing after the picking list. If a picking listis requested (question C27), there is a skip to a new page before the operations list.If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).



C29 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE INACTIVEOPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25, C26, and C28 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantinactive operations (operation status is 00) to print within the operation detail list onyour shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints inactiveoperations with the manufacturing order routing. The PC&C order status inquiries arethe only procedures other than the shop packet procedures that allows you to reviewinactive operations within manufacturing orders. All other PC&C procedures areconcerned only with active operations. If you do not want inactive operations to beprinted with the operations list, answer N (No).

C30 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE ADDITIONALOPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C14, C25, C26, and C28 were answered Y (Yes). If youwant additional operation descriptions on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y(Yes) so the system prints this information along with the manufacturing orderrouting. If you do not want the additional operation descriptions to be printed, answerN (No).

C31 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD TIMES?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantstandard times to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system prints them with the operations detail information. You are required tohave a special security clearance to see this information if you activate applicationsecurity using the Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not wantstandard times to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).



C32 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUSDETAIL?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantmiscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packet worksheets, answerY (Yes) so that the system prints the charges list right after the operations list. Thereis a page skip after the material picking list but not after the operations list. If you donot want miscellaneous charges to be printed on your shop packet worksheets,answer N (No).

C33 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD COSTS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantstandard costs to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that thesystem prints the standard summary and detail record costs. If you do not want anycosts to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).

C34 DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING DATES ON YOUR WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you wanttracking dates to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that thesystem prints the tracking summary and detail record dates. If you do not want anydates to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).

C35 DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you areinstalling this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options andenter essential information. If this application is already installed, you can answereither Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answeris N (No), skip to question C39.

If you want paper labor and milestone tickets to serve as the turnaround media forthe reporting of operation transactions to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) so that the systemcreates paper labor and milestone tickets with the shop packets for multiple orders.Answer N (No) if you do not want paper labor and milestone tickets.



C36 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER FORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C35 was answered Y (Yes). If you answered N (No) toC35, go to question C40.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints eachlabor or milestone ticket on a single form, one over another (also called the over/under format), so you can report milestone operation transactions.

Answer N (No) if you want the system to print labor tickets only. The system thenprints two labor tickets on one form, side by side.

The side by side format is not available if PM&C is installed.

See Appendix C. for sample labor and milestone tickets.

C37 DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toprint labor and milestone tickets for multiple orders on preprinted forms, answer Y(Yes) so that the system prints only the operation identification information. Thespecial characters and field descriptions are all suppressed with this option. If youwant to use blank paper for your paper labor and milestone tickets for multipleorders, answer N (No).

Both the preprinted forms and the blank paper you use for labor and milestonetickets are special forms. You may want to print the tickets on regular stock paper,but the labor tickets are printed over the perforations of the stock paper. When labortickets are printed, you will see system messages which allow you to change andalign the forms. If you want to print the tickets on regular stock paper, respond to thesystem messages without changing the forms.

C38 WHAT IS THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT PRINTED?


This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). This questionspecifies a low-limit for the number of tickets printed for each manufacturingoperation. The operation duration (standard hours according to the operation’s primeload code) is calculated for each operation. A ticket would then be printed for everyfour standard operation hours. If this value is lower than the low-limit value specifiedby the answer to this question, then the low-limit value is used.



C39 WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT PRINTED?


This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). This specifies ahigh-limit for the number of tickets that the system prints for each manufacturingoperation. The operation duration (standard hours according to the operation’s primeload code) is calculated for each operation. A ticket would then be printed by thesystem for every four standard operation hours. If this value is higher than the high-limit value specified by the answer to this question, then the high-limit value is used.

C40 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORT OPTIONS FOR CREATINGSHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?

DFLT-Y


The shop packet can be created multiple times for any individual manufacturingorder. Shop packets can be called for individual orders both in InventoryManagement and in PC&C. The fixed options for this version of the shop packet arespecified in questions C40 through C53. These options can be overridden when yourun shop packet creation for individual orders. Refer to the Shop Packet Options—Multiple Orders display (AMI4E4) in the “Shop Packet Creation” chapter of theProduction Control and Costing User’s Guide.


C41 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C51.

If you want shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints them.

Also answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system printsmilestone reporting tickets with the worksheets. Answer N (No) if you do not wantworksheets or milestone reporting tickets.



C42 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you want amaterial picking list, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the material detailinformation while it prints the shop packet worksheets. If you do not want materialcomponent information on your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).

C43 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATION DETAIL?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantoperation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system prints the manufacturing order routing after the picking list. If a picking listis requested (question C42), there is a skip to a new page before the operations list.

Also answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system printsmilestone reporting tickets so you can report milestone operation transactions.Answer N (No) if you do not want the operations list or milestone reporting tickets.

C44 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE INACTIVEOPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40, C41, and C43 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantinactive operations (operation status is 00) to be printed within the operations detaillist on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system printsinactive operations with the manufacturing order routing. The PC&C order statusinquiries are the only procedures other than the shop packet procedures that allowyou to review inactive operations within manufacturing orders. All other PC&Cprocedures are concerned only with active operations. If you do not want inactiveoperations to be printed with the operations list, answer N (No).

C45 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE ADDITIONALOPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y



This question is asked only if C14, C40, C41, and C43 were answered Y (Yes). If youwant additional operation descriptions on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y(Yes) so the system prints the additional operation descriptions along with themanufacturing order routing.

If you do not want the additional operation descriptions to be printed, answer N (No).

C46 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD TIMES?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantstandard times to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system prints them with the operations detail information. You are required tohave a special security clearance to see this information if you activate applicationsecurity using the Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not wantstandard times to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).

C47 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUSDETAIL?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantmiscellaneous charges information to be printed on your shop packet worksheets,answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the charges list right after the operations list.There is a page skip after the material picking list but not after the operations list. Ifyou do not want miscellaneous charges to be printed on your shop packetworksheets, answer N (No).

C48 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD COSTS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you wantstandard costs to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so thatthe system prints the standard summary and detail record costs. If you do not wantany costs to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).

C49 DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING DATES ON YOUR WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you wanttracking dates to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the



system prints the tracking summary and detail record dates. If you do not want anydates to print on your worksheets, answer N (No).

C50 DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C40 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer is N(No), the questionnaire skips to question C55.

If you want paper labor and milestone tickets to serve as turnaround media for thereporting of operation transactions to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) so that the systemcreates paper labor and milestone tickets with the shop packets for individual orders.Answer N (No) if you do not want paper labor and milestone tickets.

C51 DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER FORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C50 was answered Y (Yes). If you answered N (No) toC50, go to question C55.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints eachlabor or milestone ticket on a single form, one over another (also called the over/under format), so you can report milestone operation transactions.

Answer N (No) if you want the system to print labor tickets only. The system thenprints two labor tickets on one form, side by side.


See Appendix C. for sample labor and milestone tickets.

C52 HOW MANY DO YOU WANT PRINTED?


This question is asked only if C40 and C50 were answered Y (Yes). This specifies thenumber of tickets that the system prints for each manufacturing operation.



C53 DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if C40 and C50 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toprint your labor and milestone tickets for individual orders on preprinted forms,answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints only the operation identification information.Special characters and field descriptions are all suppressed with this option. If youwant to use blank paper for your paper labor and milestone tickets for individualorders, answer N (No).

Both the preprinted forms and the blank paper you use for labor and milestonetickets are special forms. You may want to print the tickets on regular stock paper,but the tickets are printed over the perforations. When labor and milestone tickets areprinted, you see system messages which allow you to change and align the forms. Ifyou want to print labor and milestone tickets on regular stock paper, respond to thesystem messages without changing the forms.

C54 DO YOU WANT ALL OF THE OPERATIONS FOR A MANUFACTURINGORDER TO PRINT ON THE PAPER LABOR TICKETS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C40 and C50 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toprint labor and milestone tickets for all of the operations of each individually selectedmanufacturing order, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want to produce labor andmilestone tickets for all of an order’s operations, answer N (No). The system lets youidentify a specific operation when you select the order for shop packet creation.

C55 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR WORK LIST GENERATION OPTIONSFOR REPORT SELECTION?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, youcan answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. Ifyour answer is N (No), skip to question C64.

The operations are in priority sequence within reverse operation status sequence.Running orders (status 30 operations) are first, with waiting orders (status 20operations) next and arriving orders (status 10 operations) last. Certain reports canbe selected to run during this procedure by the responses to questions C56 throughC62. These options can be overridden when you run work list generation. See theWork List Generation display (AMC710) in the “Work List Generation” chapter of theProduction Control and Costing User’s Guide.



C56 DO YOU WANT A LIST OF ALL ORDERS UNDER THE CRITICAL RATIOVALUE?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a critical orderslist, answer Y (Yes) so that the work list generation procedure produces one. Criticalratios are recalculated for all orders while each order is rescheduled. Right after thisoccurs, an order summary list can be produced showing these orders organized bythe priority routine selected for this work list generation run. The critical ratio is justone of four possible priority routines. If it is selected as the priority, then the ordersare in critical ratio order with only the ones appearing less than the value entered inquestion C57. If the priority is other than critical ratio, the orders are in the othersequence but they still appear only if they are below the ratio limit specified inquestion C57. If you do not want a Critical Orders list produced in work listgeneration, answer N (No).


C57 WHAT IS THE CRITICAL RATIO VALUE?

LOW-0.00 HILIM-999.99 DFLT-1.20

This question is asked only if C55 and C56 were answered Y (Yes). If you want tospecify a critical order limit to be used on the critical ratio listing, answer Y (Yes). If avalue is entered it is used only to limit the number of orders printed on the report. Acritical ratio is calculated for all open orders regardless of this entry. The critical ratiois the time remaining on an order divided by the work remaining in an order. The timeremaining is the difference in shop days between the order due date and the orderstart date (or the system run date if it is more current). This value is replaced with azero whenever it goes negative. The work remaining is the difference in shop daysbetween the scheduled completion date and the order start date (or a more currentrun date). When one order’s critical ratio is lower than the critical ratio of anotherorder, then the first order is more critical than the second order. If you do not want tospecify a critical ratio limit, answer N (No) and the system prints all of the orders inpriority sequence.

C58 DO YOU WANT A LIST OF PRIORITY VALUES WITHIN OPERATION STATUSCODES ON THE LIST?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C54 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a work list to beprinted during work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints one priorto the creation of the Work List Inquiry file. This report is in priority sequence withinreverse operation status sequence. Running orders (status 30 operations) are first,with waiting orders (status 20 operations) next and arriving orders (status 10operations) last. There is a skip to a new page with each change in work center ID. Ifyou do not want the Work List report to be printed, answer N (No).



C59 DO YOU WANT A WORK LIST BY DEPARTMENT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work List byDepartment to be printed within work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that thesystem prints one. This report is the same as the regular Work List report except thatthe work center department ID provides the major sort category. There is a skip to anew page with each change in department and with each change of work centerwithin department. If you do not want a Work List by Department report, answer N(No).

C60 DO YOU WANT A WORK LIST BY FOREMAN?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work List byForeman to be printed within work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that the systemprints one. This report is the same as the regular Work List report except that thework center foreman ID provides the major sort category. There is a skip to a newpage with each change in foreman and with each change of work center withinforeman. If you do not want a Work List by Foreman report, answer N (No).

C61 DO YOU WANT A WORK CENTER ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work CenterAnalysis report, answer Y (Yes) so that the system will run this report within the worklist generation procedure. The Work Center Analysis report can also be run as part ofthe order closeout procedure. The only difference in the function of the twoprocedures is that only during order closeout is it possible to update the outputaverages (standard output, actual output, and efficiency) back into the ProductionFacility file. The queue averages are updated back into the Production Facility fileevery time the report is run. The report looks the same regardless of its updateoptions. When run in work list generation, all status 30 and 20 operations areincluded in queue analysis. When the install option for move transactions (questionC08) is for no moves or move to work area, the status 10 operations that occur rightafter status 40 or 50 operations within a manufacturing order are included in queue.In work list generation, all completed operations (status 40 or 50) are included in theoutput calculations if they have any nonzero values in their this-period fields. If youdo not want to run a Work Center Analysis report as part of work list generation,answer N (No).

Note: Either question C62 or C63 is asked, depending on your response to usingthe option schedule to due dates, question C02.



C62 WHAT PRIORITY DO YOU WANT TO PRINT YOUR WORK LIST?

1-ORDER DUE DATE, 2-SLACK TIME PER OPERATION, 3-CRITICAL RATIO


This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes).

If you answered N (No) to question C02 to use forward scheduling, then answer withone of the following codes:

Code MEANING1 ORDER DUE DATE2 SLACK TIME PER OPERATION3 CRITICAL RATIO.

This install time option selects the work list generation priority routine. With eachrunning of work list generation, both the critical ratio and the work list priority valueare updated into each Manufacturing Order Master record. If critical ratio is selected,then both fields contain the same value. The order due date is already contained inthe summary record and is just moved to the priority field if that is the selectedpriority routine. The slack time per operation is the sum of the remaining standardqueue time in days in an order divided by the number of open operations remainingin an order. The critical ratio is explained in question C57. When the priority value ofone order is lower than the priority value of another order, then the first order is morecritical.

C63 HOW DO YOU WANT TO PRINT WORK LISTS?

1-ORDER DUE DATE, 2-SLACK TIME PER OPERATION,3-CRITICAL RATIO, 4-OPERATION DUE DATE


This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes).

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C02 to use backward scheduling, then answerwith one of the listed codes.

C64 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORTING AND PURGING OPTIONSFOR ORDER CLOSEOUT?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of theoptions and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, youcan answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. Ifyour answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C78.



The order closeout procedure removes from the open order database the summaryand the detail records of the orders identified for closeout by the order closeoutselection procedure. Certain reports can be selected to be run during this procedureby the response to questions C65 and C77. You can override these options when yourun order closeout reporting and purging. See the Order Closeout Options displays(AMC530, AMC531, AMC532, and AMC533) in the “Order Closeout” chapter of theProduction Costing and Control User’s Guide.

C65 DO YOU WANT A WORK CENTER ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N (No),the questionnaire skips to question C67. If you want a Work Center Analysis report,answer Y (Yes) so that the system runs this report within the order closeoutprocedure.

The Work Center Analysis report can also be run as part of the work list generationprocedure. The only difference in the report’s function between the two procedures isthat only during order closeout is it possible to update the output averages (standardoutput, actual output, and efficiency) back into the Production Facility file. The queueaverages are updated back into the Production Facility file every time the report isrun. The report looks the same regardless of its update options. When run in ordercloseout, status 30 and 20 operations are included in queue analysis. When theinstall option for move transactions (question C08) is for no moves or move tolocation, the status 10 operations that occur right after status 40 or 50 operationswithin a manufacturing order are included in queue. In order closeout, the outputcalculations include all completed operations (status 40 or 50) and operations withinorders to be closed out are included in the output calculations if they have anynonzero values in their this-period fields. If you do not want to run a Work CenterAnalysis report in order closeout, answer N (No).

C66 DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE YOUR WORK CENTER AVERAGES?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 and C65 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toupdate the new smoothed average values for output (standard output, actual output,and efficiency) into the Production Facility file, answer Y (Yes). The new smoothedaverage fields involved with queue analysis are updated into the Production Facilityfile every time the Work Center Analysis report is run. The Period Analysis CostSummary report should be selected (question C76) to clear this-period fields(question C77) after the update of the new output values of the Production Facilityfile. If you do not want to update the new output averages back into the ProductionFacility file, answer N (No).



C67 DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE CURRENT VALUES IN YOUR ROUTINGFILE?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer is N(No), the questionnaire skips to question C72.

If you want to update the new smoothed average values for completed operationtime back into the Routing file, answer Y (Yes). The system selects the completedoperations (status 40 or 50) of manufacturing orders selected for closeout andaverages their total to date actual times into corresponding routing recordsaccording to the end item of the order. The current values become the averagevalues without smoothing when the first operation updates a routing record. If you donot want to average actual times back into the Routing file, answer N (No).

C68 WHAT IS YOUR ALPHA FACTOR?

LOW-.00 HILIM-.99 DFLT-.20

This question is asked only if C64 and C67 were answered Y (Yes). The routingcurrent values update alpha factor is the weighted averaging factor used to averageactual setup labor, run labor, and run machine times back into the Routing file. Thefactor is the ratio of the weight of each of the new values divided by thecorresponding old values. This factor is ignored for the very first update of a routingrecord. Refer to “Alpha factor/averaging calculations” in the Inventory ManagementUser’s Guide for more information.

C69 DO YOU WANT EXCEPTION PRINTING?

1-NO PRINTING, 2-EXCEPTION WITH TOLERANCE PERCENT,3-FULL PRINT


This question is asked only if C64 and C67 were answered Y (Yes). If you areinstalling this application for the first time, you should answer 2 so that the optionsappear.

If this application is already installed, you can answer 1, 2, or 3, depending uponwhat needs to be changed. If your answer is 1 or 3, the questionnaire skips toquestion C72. If you do not want any printing, answer 1 so that the system does notprint on an exception basis. If you want printing on an exception basis, answer 2 sothat the system uses the tolerance percentage for exception printing. If you wantprinting with each update that occurs, answer 3 so that the system does not usetolerance percentages. The exception is defined by establishing tolerance limits



both high and low. The averaging calculations are asked in questions C68 and C69.When any of the three average fields is changed by a value greater than specifiedtolerance limits, an exception occurs.

If you answer 2, continue with question C70. If you answer 1 or 3, skip to questionC72.

C70 WHAT IS YOUR OVER PERCENTAGE TOLERANCE DURING EXCEPTIONPRINTING?


This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions C64 and C67 and 2to question C69. To see only those values that have been changed significantlyduring the current value update run, enter a whole number that indicates thepercentage above which a change is considered significant. This number is addedto 100 percent before the run. For example, a value of 25 is125 percent andrepresents one and one-quarter times the old average values.

C71 WHAT IS YOUR UNDER PERCENTAGE TOLERANCE DURING EXCEPTIONPRINTING?


This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions C64 and C67 and 2to question C69. The tolerance is a whole number and is subtracted from 100percent before the update run is performed. A value of 25 is 75 percent andrepresents three-quarters of the old average values.

C72 DO YOU WANT A PRODUCTION REPORT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you want an OrderStatus—Production Report to be printed during order closeout, answer Y (Yes). Thereport is the same as the one that can be produced on a demand basis from theReport Analysis menu (AMCM20). A report is printed for each noncanceled ordercloseout candidate (status not 99). If you do not want an Order Status—ProductionReport, answer N (No).

C73 DO YOU WANT AN ACCOUNTING REPORT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enter



essential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want an OrderStatus—Accounting Report to be printed during order closeout, answer Y (Yes). Thereport is the same as the one that can be produced on a demand basis from theReport Analysis menu (AMCM20). A report is printed for each non-canceled ordercloseout candidate (status not 99). If you do not want an Order Status—AccountingReport, answer N (No). If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to questionC76.

C74 DO YOU WANT MACHINE TOTALS TO PRINT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 and C73 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toprint machine totals for cost, time and quantity scrapped values, answer Y (Yes). Aline is printed for each operation detail record showing these machine values.Machine costs are included in overhead costs which are printed on another line foreach operation. If you do not want a separate printing of zero machine totals, answerN (No), and only lines with machine values are printed.

C75 DO YOU WANT OPERATION TOTALS BY OPERATION TO PRINT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 and C73 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toprint an operation total line for each operation detail record, answer Y (Yes). The totalline is a summary of the time and costs broken down by categories for eachoperation detail record. If you do not want a separate line of printing of zerooperation totals, answer N (No), and only lines with operation totals are printed.

C76 DO YOU WANT A CURRENT PERIOD ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing thisapplication for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want a currentPeriod Analysis Cost Summary report, answer Y (Yes).

This report summarizes the work-in-process costs of the open order database for thecurrent manufacturing accounting period as well as for all orders to date. Thebreakdown of costs is the same as that which appears on all work-in-process andcost totals sheets. If you do not want a current Period Analysis Cost Summary report,answer N (No). If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C78.



C77 DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR YOUR CURRENT PERIOD VALUES?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C64 and C76 were answered Y (Yes). If you want toclear the period fields after the current period report has been run, answer Y (Yes).This, in effect, serves as a period-end cutover. The open order database is able toaccept transaction information into the period fields for the next manufacturingaccounting period. If you do not want to clear the period fields, answer N (No), andthe current period report can serve as a checkpoint of the current period.

C78 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR WORK CENTER ANALYSIS OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if C61 or C65 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installingthis application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enteressential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want to changethe parameters required for the calculations performed by the Work Center AnalysisReport program, answer Y (Yes).

The Work Center Analysis Report can be produced both in work list generation andin order closeout. The values entered here affect the report calculations regardless ofwhere it is run. This parameter information is presented again as runtime optionsbefore the running of the Work Center Analysis Report.

If you do not want to change your Work Center Analysis Report parameters, answerN (No). You can override these options when you do work center analysis eitherduring order closeout reporting and purge, or during work list generation. See theOrder Closeout Options—Work Center Analysis Report display (AMC531) in the“Order Closeout” chapter and the Work List Generation display (AMC710) in the“Work List Generation” chapter of the Production Costing and Control User’s Guide.If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C86.

C79 WHAT IS YOUR QUEUE ALPHA FACTOR?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The queue alpha factor isthe weighted averaging factor used to average current queue values back into theProduction Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the weight of the new value dividedby the old value. The factor is used to calculate a new average current queue and anew mean absolute deviation value between current queue and averaged queue.Refer to “Alpha factor/averaging calculations” in the Inventory Management User’sGuide for more information.



C80 WHAT IS YOUR STANDARD OUTPUT ALPHA FACTOR?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The standard output alphafactor is the weighted averaging factor used to average standard output values backinto the Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by theold value.

C81 WHAT IS YOUR ACTUAL OUTPUT ALPHA FACTOR?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The actual output alphafactor is the weighted averaging factor used to average actual output values backinto the Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by theold value.

C82 WHAT IS YOUR EFFICIENCY ALPHA FACTOR?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The efficiency alpha factoris the weighted averaging factor used to average efficiency values back into theProduction Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by the oldvalue.

C83 WHAT IS YOUR QUEUE RANGE?

LOW-0.00 HILIM-9.99 DFLT-2.50

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The queue range defines ahigh and a low tolerance limit for both the average queue time and the standardqueue time (high norm and low norm, respectively). When the new current queue fora work center is above or below these limits on the Work Center Analysis Report, aqueue exception message is noted. The value entered here is multiplied by the meanabsolute deviation to develop the tolerances. The lower limit is replaced with a zerowhenever it goes negative. There are separate tolerance checks for queueexceptions. The new current queue in hours is compared with the old average queue(range) in hours for one exception, while the new current queue (in days) iscompared with the work center standard queue (range) in days for a secondexception.



C84 HOW MANY DAYS IN THE PERIOD?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The number of days in theperiod is used by the Work Center Analysis program to calculate the amount ofplanned capacity from a work center’s shift capacities. This capacity valuerepresents the amount of work capable of being done by a work center during thatperiod of time. The number of days in the period is also used to calculate theaverage actual output per day and the average standard output per day.

C85 WHAT IS YOUR TRACKING SIGNAL TRIP?


This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The tracking signal tripdefines the limit that causes the work center tracking signal to be reset once thesignal has exceeded the limit value. The entered value is multiplied by the new meanabsolute deviation to develop the tracking signal trip limit. The tracking signal is thesum of the errors (or differences) between current queue and the old average queue.The Work Center Analysis Report shows an exception message with the date that thetracking signal was last tripped and the current signal value before it is reset to zero.Use a higher value such as 8.0 if you want fewer warning messages to be printed onthe Work Center Analysis Report.

C86 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define report options”section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question C24.



Production Monitoring and Control

Production Monitoring and Contr ol


J01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORPRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL?

DFLT-Y


If your answer is N (No), skip to question J09.

Note: You are prompted to answer questions J2 through J4 only if the associatedapplication is not currently installed and interfacing.

J02 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH INVENTORY MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the IM application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Monitoring and Control and Inventory Management. After answering Y(Yes) to this questions, you must activate the interface through Cross ApplicationSupport. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

J03 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTION CONTROL ANDCOSTING?

DFLT-N


Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Monitoring and Control and Production Control and Costing. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CASUser’s Guide.



J04 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PAYROLL?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the PR application is being installed at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Monitoring and Control and Payroll. After answering Y (Yes) to thisquestion, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the“Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

J05 DO YOU WANT TO CREATE LABOR TIME BATCHES?

DFLT-N

Answering Y (Yes) to this question creates transactions for you to use. Thesetransactions can be used with your payroll system. If Payroll is installed, thetransactions are moved to a payroll transaction batch.

J06 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH REPETITIVE PRODUCTIONMANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the Repetitive Production Management application is beinginstalled at this time.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenProduction Monitoring and Control and Repetitive Production Management. Afteranswering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through CrossApplication Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of the CASUser’s Guide.

J07 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLPRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL MASTER FILE RECORDSWHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes). Then when you add or change master filerecords (such as item number or description) from the workstation, the information isimmediately available for use by other areas of your application. You may find ituseful to be able to print a report reflecting how the file records appeared bothbefore and after any changes. If, at a later date, you decide the report of changes isnot needed, rerun the questionnaire and change the answer to N (No).



Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after linesare printed on maintenance edit lists.

J08 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define functionaloptions” section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J02.


J09 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANTS INFORMATIONFOR PRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL?

DFLT-Y



J10 WHAT IS THE LOWEST NUMBER FOR A TEMPORARY BADGE?

DFLT-00001

You can limit the temporary badge numbers that are assigned to the range that youspecify here. If you enter no range, the numbers are assigned starting at 1.

You must be aware, however, that if you are using the Payroll application with PM&C,the employee number in the Employee Master file (EMPMAS) is used as part of thebadge number in PM&C. Please do not enter a range that you currently intend onassigning for employee numbers in Payroll. For example, your Payroll employeenumbers may be from 1 to 80000, while temporary badge numbers may be from80001 to 99999.

J11 WHAT IS THE HIGHEST NUMBER FOR A TEMPORARY BADGE?

DFLT-99999



You can limit the temporary badge numbers that are assigned to the range that youspecify here. If you enter no range, the highest limit is assigned at

Note: Please refer to question J10 before assigning this number. You must ensurethat the highest temporary badge number is greater than the lowest temporarybadge number entered in J10.

J12 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define constantsoptions” section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J10.


J13 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR PRODUCTIONMONITORING AND CONTROL?

DFLT-Y



The following questions apply to MULTIPLE ORDERS only.

J14 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORT OPTIONS FOR CREATINGSHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?

DFLT-Y


The shop packet is created once for any manufacturing order when requested aspart of a batch flow. Shop packets for multiple orders can be called in PM&C, IM,and PC&C. The fixed options are used when you run order release with shoppackets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop packetcreations separately.




Note: If you answered N (No) to question C24 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS? inthe PC&C questionnaire, questions J15 through J17 are skipped.

J15 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODES ON THEWORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This answer is needed only if you answered Y (Yes) to question C25 DO YOU WANTYOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire.

If you use the worksheets as the turnaround media for individual componenttransactions, answer Y (Yes) so that the turnaround number bar code is printed onthe shop packet worksheet. If you want to print the components for informationalpurposes, but are not using the worksheet as a transaction entry document, enter N(No) so that the worksheets print more quickly and have more components per page.

J16 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT OPERATION BAR CODES ON THEWORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This answer is needed only if you answered Y (Yes) to question C26 DO YOU WANTYOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATIONS DETAIL? in the PC&Cquestionnaire.

If you want operation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer is Y(Yes), then the system prints the manufacturing order routing after the material detail.If material detail is requested (question J14), there is a skip to a new page before theoperations list. If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).

J17 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MISCELLANEOUS CHARGE BAR CODES ONTHE WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

This answer is needed only if you answered Y (Yes) to question C30 DO YOU WANTYOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL? in the PC&Cquestionnaire.

If you want miscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packetworksheets, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want miscellaneous charges to print onyour shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).



J18 DO YOU WANT MANUFACTURING RECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N

If you want manufacturing receiving tickets to serve as the turnaround media forreporting production receipts, answer is Y (Yes), manufacturing receiving ticketsprint with the shop packet. If you do not want receiving tickets, answer N (No).

If you answer Y (Yes), continue with the next question.

If you answer N (No), skip to question J24.

J19 DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR YOUR MANUFACTURINGRECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N

If you want to print your receiving tickets on preprinted forms, answer Y (Yes). If youwant to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N (No). Both the preprintedforms and the blank forms you use for receiving tickets are special forms. Whenreceiving tickets are printed, you see the system messages that allow you to changethe forms.

Note: If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to “Special forms” on page C-1 forform detail.

J20 HOW SHOULD THE NUMBER OF TICKETS PER ORDER BE CALCULATED?(1 = FIXED NUMBER OF TICKETS PER ORDER 2 = ONE TICKET PERNUMBER OF ITEMS)

DFLT-1

Enter 1 if you want to print a fixed number of receiving tickets for all orders. Enter 2 ifyou want the number of tickets per order to vary, depending on the size of the order.

If you answer 1, continue with the next question.

If you answer 2, skip to question J22.



J21 WHAT IS THE FIXED NUMBER OF TICKETS THAT PRINT FOR EACHORDER?

DFLT-1

If you chose option 1 for question J20, the value you enter here is the fixed number ofreceiving tickets that print for each order.

After answering this question, skip to question J24.

J22 WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU REQUIRE FOR EACH ITEM?

DFLT-1

If you chose option 2 for question J20, the order quantity is divided by the value youenter here to determine the number of receiving tickets required.

J23 WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT TO PRINT?

DFLT-0

You can enter a value here to limit the number of tickets printed for each order. If youaccept the default of zero or if you enter a value of zero, the total number of ticketsprinted is calculated using your response to question J22.

J24 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE RESPONSES ABOUT REPORT OPTIONS FORCREATING SHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define report options” for multiple orders section of thequestionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J14. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.

The following questions apply to INDIVIDUAL ORDERS only.



J25 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORT OPTIONS FOR CREATINGSHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?

DFLT-Y


The shop packet is created once for any manufacturing order when requested aspart of a batch flow. Shop packets for multiple orders can be called in PM&C, IM,and PC&C. The fixed options are used when you run order release with shoppackets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop packetcreations separately.


Note: If you answered N (No) to question C38 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS? inthe PC&C questionnaire, then skip questions J26 through J28.

J26 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODE ON THEWORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C39 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TOINCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.

If you use the worksheets as the turnaround media for individual componenttransactions, answer Y (Yes) so that the turnaround number bar code is printed onthe shop packet worksheet. If you want to print the components for informationalpurposes, but are not using the worksheet as a transaction entry document, enter N(No) so that the worksheets print more quickly and have more components per page.

J27 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT OPERATION DETAIL BAR CODES ON THEWORKSHEET?

DFLT-Y

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C40 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TOINCLUDE OPERATION DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.

If you want operation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y(Yes). If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).



J28 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL BAR CODES ON THEWORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C44 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS TOINCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this questionappears.

If you want miscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packetworksheets, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want miscellaneous charges to print onyour shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).

J29 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MANUFACTURING RECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N

If you want manufacturing receiving tickets to serve as the turnaround media forreporting production receipts, answer is Y (Yes), manufacturing receiving ticketsprint with the shop packet. If you do not want receiving tickets, answer N (No).

If you answer Y (Yes), continue with the next question.

If you answer N (No), skip to question J32.

J30 DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR MANUFACTURING RECEIVINGTICKETS?

DFLT-N

If you want to print your receiving tickets on preprinted forms, answer Y (Yes). If youwant to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N. Both the preprintedforms and the blank forms you use for receiving tickets are special forms. Whenreceiving tickets are printed, you see the system messages that allow you to changethe forms.

Note: If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to “Special forms” for form detail.

J31 HOW MANY TICKETS DO YOU WANT TO PRINT PER ORDER?

DFLT-1

Your answer specifies the number of tickets printed for the order.



J32 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE RESPONSES ABOUT REPORT OPTIONS FORCREATING SHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define report options” for individual orders section ofthe questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J25. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.

The following questions establish the default printing options for shop packets thatinclude both multiple and individual orders, as well as other printing options inPM&C.

J33 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODE ON THE PICKINGLIST?

DFLT-Y

If you use the picking list as a turnaround document for individual componenttransactions, answer Y (Yes) so that the turnaround number bar code is printed onthe picking list.

J34 DO YOU WANT LOCATION BAR CODE ON THE PICKING LIST?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want location bar code on the picking list.

Answer N (No) if you do not want location bar code on the picking list.

J35 DO YOU WANT LOCATION BAR CODE ON THE WORKSHEET?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) if you want location bar code on the worksheet.

Answer N (No) if you do not want location bar code on the worksheet.



J36 WHICH WORKSHEET FORMAT DO YOU WANT?


If you answered Y (Yes) to either question C23 or C38 DO YOU WANTWORKSHEETS? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.

If you enter 1, the worksheets print on standard computer paper. If you enter 2, theworksheets print in a more compact format on 8 1/2" x 11" paper. If you are using a3812 printer to print your Shop Packets, you must enter 2. If you enter 3, theworksheets print using the IM format without the bar codes.

J37 WHICH PICKING LIST FORMAT DO YOU WANT?


If you enter 1, the picking lists print on standard computer paper. If you enter 2, thepicking lists print in a more compact format on 8 1/ 2" x 11" paper. If you are using aIPDS Laser printer to print your Shop Packets, you must enter 2. If you enter 3, thepicking lists print using the IM format without bar codes.

J38 WHICH TEMPORARY BADGE FORMAT DO YOU WANT?


This question allows you to select the forms length of your temporary badges. If youselect 1, the format for your badge will be large. If you select 2, the format for yourbadge will be small.

Please refer to the “Special forms” appendix of this book for the temporary badgeforms.

J39 DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR YOUR PURCHASINGRECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N

If you want to print your receiving tickets on preprinted forms, answer Y (Yes). If youwant to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N. Both the preprintedforms and the blank forms you use for receiving tickets are special forms. Whenreceiving tickets are printed, you see the system messages that allow you to changethe forms.

Note: If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to the “Special forms” appendix in thisbook for form detail.



J40 DO YOU WANT TO USE RECEIVING TICKETS AS INVENTORY TAGS?

DFLT-N

If you enter Y (Yes), the item number prints on the receiving tickets in largecharacters. The item number prints in large characters on the manufacturing, as wellas the purchasing, receiving tickets.

J41 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the “Define report options”section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J14.


Purchasing

Purchasing


601 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORPURCHASING?

DFLT-Y

When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so theoptions appear. If Purchasing is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No).

If you answer N (No), skip to question 617.

602 DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS INVOICES IN PURCHASING?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to capture actual cost against the order. You must receive andinvoice all purchase orders before you can close and purge them from Purchasing.You may enter your payable invoices in Purchasing or Accounts Payable (AP).

Answer N (No) to not capture actual cost against the order. You must receive but notinvoice all purchase orders before you can close and purge them from Purchasing.You may only enter your payable invoices in Accounts Payable (AP).

603 DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE ORDERQUANTITY IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a ‘G’ type comment for yourpurchase orders when you change an order quantity. This comment prints onpurchase orders. You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) toquestion 606.

Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to generate a ‘G’ type comment for yourpurchase orders when you change an order quantity.

604 DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE ORDERPRICE IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?

DFLT-Y


Purchasing

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a comment for your purchaseorders when you change an order price. This comment prints on purchase orders.You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) to question 606.

Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to generate a ‘G’ type comment for yourpurchase orders when you change an order price.

605 DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE DATETO DOCK IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a ‘G’ type comment for yourpurchase orders when you change the date to dock. This comment prints onpurchase orders. You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) toquestion 606.

Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to generate a ‘G’ type comment for yourpurchase orders when you change the date to dock.

606 DO YOU WANT ‘G’ TYPE COMMENTS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to send all ‘G’ type comments generated during purchase orderprocessing to the online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge. AnswerN (No) if you do not want to send ‘G’ type comments to the history file.

607 DO YOU WANT ‘T’ TYPE COMMENTS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to send all ‘T’ type comments generated during transactionprocessing to the online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge. AnswerN (No) if you do not want to send ‘T’ type comments to the history file.

608 DO YOU WANT MISCELLANEOUS AND SERVICE ITEMS ON A PURCHASEORDER TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to send all miscellaneous and service items with ReceiptRequired = Yes that appear on purchase orders to the online Purchase History file(POHIST). The system calculates vendor performance for them.


Purchasing

Answer N (No) to send only inventory items to the Purchase History file (POHIST).The system will calculate vendor performance for them.

609 DO YOU WANT DEBIT MEMOS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to send all debit memos generated during transaction processing tothe online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge.

Answer N (No) to not send debit memos to the history file.

610 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLPURCHASING MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) to providean audit trail. When you add or change master file records (such as buyer numberand name), the information is immediately available for use. You may find it useful toreport “before and after” file records. If, at a later date, you decide you do not needthe report of changes, run the questionnaire again and change the answer to N (No).

If you answer N (No) to this question, the system reports neither the before nor theafter lines.

611 DO YOU WANT THE ORDER UNIT OF MEASURE TO PRINT ON THEPURCHASE ORDER AND DEBIT MEMO?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to print the unit of measure entered during PO entry/edit on purchaseorders and debit memos.

Answer N (No) to print the purchasing unit of measure associated with eachpurchase order or debit memo.

612 DO YOU WANT THE QUANTITY RECEIVED TO STOCK TO BE USED ASTHE QUANTITY RECEIVED?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to use the quantity received to stock (RP transaction) as the quantityreceived on inquiries and reports.


Purchasing

Answer N (No) to use the quantity received to dock (RD transaction) as the quantityreceived. If you answer N (No) and never perform an RD transaction for itemsreceived, the system does not update the Quantity Received field. The system willgenerate invalid data on inquiries and reports.

613 DO YOU WANT ITEMS WITHIN PURCHASE ORDERS TO BE REPORTED/DISPLAYED IN “AS ENTERED” SEQUENCE (ARRIVAL SEQUENCE)?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to print all items in the order in which you entered them on reports,displays, and printed purchase orders.

Answer N (No) to print all items in item-number sequence on reports, displays, andprinted purchase orders.

614 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE TO MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if you are installing or have installed the Material RequirementsPlanning (MRP) application. This is the first step in providing the interface betweenPurchasing and MRP. After you answer Y (Yes) to this question, activate the interfacethrough Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate interfaces” sectionof the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

615 DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN PURCHASING ANDACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to enter amounts in trading currency. The system converts theamounts to local currency. Reports and displays show both trading and localamounts where applicable. The system posts to General Ledger in local currencyonly. If you accept the default, trading and local currency amounts are the same, andthe system assumes you use local currency.


DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Define functional options” section of the questionnaire.Answer Y (Yes) if you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses.


Purchasing

Return to question 602. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining thevendor performance constants. Continue to question 618.

617 DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE VENDOR AND BUYER PERFORMANCE?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to calculate interim performance for an order whenever an item orrelease is completed. Only actuals are saved until the order is closed and purged.

Answer Y (Yes) to calculate the following at order closeout and purge:

• Performance for each vendor• Performance for each item purchased from each vendor• Performance for each order for each item purchased from each vendor• Performance for each buyer.

Continue to the next question.

If, at a later time, you want to calculate vendor and buyer performance again, run thequestionnaire again and answer this and question 618 Y (Yes). The system clears allpresent vendor and buyer performance calculations. You can start performancecalculations with fresh information.

Answer N (No) to not calculate vendor and buyer performance. If you answer N (No),skip to question 634.


Purchasing


618 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY VENDOR PERFORMANCECONSTANT INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so youcan enter information essential to vendor performance measurement. If thisapplication is already installed, answer Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what youwant to change. If your answer is Y (Yes), continue to the next question.


619 DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR ALL VENDOR AND BUYER PERFORMANCESTATISTICS?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to clear all vendor and buyer performance statistics in the currentenvironment. You should clear the vendor and buyer performance statistics in thefollowing situations:

• If you have converted to MAPICS XA from a previous system

• If you want to experiment with different weighting factors and alpha factors to seethe results

Answer N (No) to not clear the vendor and buyer performance statistics.

YOU WILL CLEAR ALL OF YOUR BUYER AND VENDOR PERFORMANCESTATISTICS. DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE?

DFLT-N

This message warns you that you will clear all buyer and vendor performancestatistics. Answer Y (Yes) to clear all your calculated vendor and buyer performancestatistics.

Answer N (No) to not clear your performance statistics. Question 619 appears again.Change your answer to question 619 to N (No).


Purchasing

620 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR LEAD TIMES?


Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations to lead time.

621 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR QUANTITYDELIVERED?


Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to differences between the quantityordered and quantity delivered.

622 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR QUALITY?


Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations in quality standards.

623 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR PRICE?


Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations between standard andactual price.

Note: The following weighting factors are secondary factors. See the PurchasingUser’s Guide for more information about weighting factors.

624 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR DAYS EARLY?


Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case of early delivery to your dock.

625 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR DAYS LATE?


Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case of late delivery to your dock.


Purchasing

626 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR LOW QUANTITYDELIVERED?


Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case the quantity delivered to yourdock is less than you expected.

627 WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR HIGH QUANTITYDELIVERED?


Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case the quantity delivered to yourdock is more than you expected.

628 WHAT IS YOUR ALPHA FACTOR FOR VENDOR PERFORMANCEANALYSIS?


The vendor rating on each order averages an overall rating for a vendor. The factor isthe ratio of the weight of each of the new values divided by the corresponding oldvalues. See “Alpha factor/averaging calculations” in the Inventory ManagementUser’s Guide for more information.

629 DO YOU WANT TO INCLUDE FORCE CLOSED ORDERS FORPERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to include orders that are force closed for vendor analysis. Answer N(No) to not include force closed orders.

630 FOR PURPOSES OF PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS, SHOULD DATE RECEIVEDBE INTERPRETED AS THE FIRST DATE RECEIVED?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to use the first date received for days early or late measurement.Answer N (No) to use the last date received for this comparison.


Purchasing

631 FOR PURPOSES OF PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS, WHAT COST DO YOUWISH TO USE FOR YOUR BASE STANDARD COST WHEN CALCULATINGPRICE?

DFLT-1

1 STANDARD UNIT COST OR (ITEMBL) OR UNIT COST DEFAULT(ITEMASA)

2 STANDARD MATERIAL CONTENT THIS LEVEL (ITEMASB)

3 CURRENT MATERIAL CONTENT THIS LEVEL (ITEMASB)

4 AVERAGE COST (ITEMBL)

5 LAST COST (ITEMBL).

The system uses the cost you select to calculate the overall vendor performancerating for each order/item/release. Select a 1 to default to unit cost.

632 DO YOU WANT VENDOR PERFORMANCE TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to calculate and send a vendor/item performance history record tohistory for every inventory item on every order. If you answered Y (Yes) to question608, the system creates an identical record for every miscellaneous item with areceipt required on every order. You must answer Y (Yes) to get interim performanceon an order.

Answer N (No), the system does not send the vendor/item history record to history;however, the system still calculates vendor/item performance and accumulates it inthe Vendor/Item and Vendor files.

633 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGVENDOR PERFORMANCE CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y



Purchasing

If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 617. Answer N (No) to continue withthe questionnaire.

634 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY INVOICE CONSTANTINFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so youcan enter information essential to invoice constants. If Purchasing is alreadyinstalled, answer Y (Yes) or N (No) depending on what you want to change.

If your answer is Y (Yes), continue to the next question.

Note: If IFM is interfacing, questions 635 through 641 do not appear.

635 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN THE OVERINVOICING OF MATERIAL QUANTITY VERSUS WHAT WAS RECEIVED?


Enter the percentage variance you allow the system to process without issuing a haltcode when it processes an invoice for a quantity greater than the amount ordered orreceived.

636 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN THE UNDERINVOICING OF MATERIAL QUANTITY VERSUS WHAT WAS RECEIVED?


Enter the percentage variance you allow the system to process without issuing a haltcode when it processes an invoice for a quantity less than the amount ordered orreceived.

637 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN OVERCHARGE OF THE INVOICE UNIT PRICE VERSUS WHAT WAS EXPECTED?


Enter the over-charge tolerance of the invoice unit price versus what you expected.


Purchasing

638 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN UNDERCHARGE OF THE INVOICE UNIT PRICE VERSUS WHAT WAS EXPECTED?


Enter the under-charge tolerance of the invoice unit price versus what you expected.

639 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN OVERCHARGE OF THE INVOICE EXTENDED AMOUNT VERSUS WHAT WASEXPECTED?


Enter the percentage variance you allow the system to process without issuing a haltcode when it processes an invoice for an amount greater than the purchase orderamount.

640 WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN UNDERCHARGE OF THE INVOICE EXTENDED AMOUNT VERSUS WHAT WASEXPECTED?


Enter the percentage variance you allow the system to process without issuing a haltcode when it processes an invoice for an amount less than the purchase orderamount.

641 DO YOU WANT TO ENTER VOUCHER NUMBER AS A SYSTEM CONTROLMEDIUM?

DFLT-N

If your company uses vouchers or wants to introduce them for payables control andreference, this question lets you use your own numbering scheme. Answer Y (Yes) touse your own voucher number system as part of invoice entry. The maximumsequence number is 99999 (five digits), and each invoice must be assigned aunique voucher number per vendor.

Answer N (No) to let the Purchasing application assign voucher numbers as youenter invoices. The sequence begins with the first open payables data you enterwhen your Purchasing application is operational.

This question is asked from both Accounts Payable and Purchasing. The lastapplication to answer the question determines how the system creates vouchernumbers by both Accounts Payable and Purchasing.


Purchasing

Note: Questions 642 to 654 appear only if you answered Y (Yes) to invoicingquestion 602 and the Accounts Payable application is not installed. The explanationthat follows these questions is based on Purchasing installed without AccountsPayable.

642 DO YOU WANT INVOICING COST ADJUSTMENTS PASSED TO IM?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) to enter cost adjustments against line items. Purchasing passesthese adjustments to Inventory Management.

643 DO YOU WANT INVOICING MISCELLANEOUS CHARGE AND OUTSIDEOPERATIONS PASSED TO PC&C?

DFLT-N

Appears if PC&C is installed. Answer Y (Yes) to enter miscellaneous charges oroutside operations against line items on invoices. Purchasing passes these chargesto PC&C.

644 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N

Purchasing can provide purchase journal transactions to General Ledger to trackyour purchases. If Accounts Payable is installed, it can provide Cash Disbursementstransactions for your payments.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the application to create these journal transactions. Youmust answer Y (Yes) to activate an interface to the General Ledger application and toautomatically transfer these transactions to General Ledger.

Even if you have not installed nor plan to install the General Ledger application, youcan still take advantage of this feature. Enter your Chart of Accounts into the GeneralLedger Master file so the system can edit the account numbers. The systemgenerates all transactions for your general ledger and writes them to the temporaryGeneral Ledger file. You can then capture the transaction amount and transfer it toyour ledger.

This is the first step in providing the interface to General Ledger. After you answer Y(Yes), you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the“Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” section of the CAS User’s Guide for moreinformation.

Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to create any journal transactions. Youmust manually enter these transactions into your general ledger using data entry.The system creates no journal distribution reports.


Purchasing

If this function is already active and you plan to change your response from Y (Yes)to N (No), first, clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledger file. Run thequestionnaire again, and remove the numbers from the General Ledger Master andTemporary General Ledger files. Use the RMVM command to do this if the AccountsReceivable, Payroll, Financial Analysis, and General Ledger applications are notinstalled.

Note: If IFM is interfacing, questions 645 through 654 do not appear.

645 DO YOU WANT THE ITEM NUMBER PASSED TO GENERAL LEDGER ASDESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item number will be passed to GeneralLedger from those invoice detail lines that contain an item number. If the item numberis not present, the invoice detail line is passed to General Ledger. If neither the itemnumber nor the invoice detail description is present, the invoice header descriptionis passed to General Ledger.

If you answer N (No), the item number will never be passed to General Ledger. If theitem description is present, it is passed to General Ledger; otherwise, the invoicedescription is passed.

This question is also asked in Accounts Payable.

646 DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY COMPANY CONSTANTSRELATED TO INVOICE ENTRY?

DFLT-Y

When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) to see allof the options and to enter essential information. If this application is alreadyinstalled, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.Answer N (No) and skip to Question 655.

647 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY.


Enter a company number for each company you plan to install. Enter a numberbetween 1 and 89. The first time you answer this question, the company numberdefaults to 1. Remember, if you install other applications that allow for multiplecompanies, the company numbers and names should be consistent across all theapplications.

This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,the company number is always 1.


Purchasing

648 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

Enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15-charactercompany name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports. This name isassociated with the company number entered in question 647 or company 1 if youanswered N (No) question X03.

The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the companyname that you have previously typed in for the particular company appears on thelast line as the default company name.

649 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCOUNTSPAYABLE?

DFLT-0

Enter the general ledger number you want to credit when you enter invoices payableto vendors. You can enter your own 15-digit account number.

You can have several accounts to which you credit invoices, such as notes payable(2030), interest payable (2050), accounts payable—vendors (2000). (The accountnumbers in parentheses refer to numbers from the sample chart of accounts. Youraccount numbers may be different.) The number requested by this question is forinvoices payable to vendors.

If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), the display shows a zero, butPurchasing uses 9999998 as the default for the accounts payable account on allapplicable reports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either thenumber you chose or the default—9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.

The following applications reserve default general ledger account numbers toprevent out-of-balance conditions:

• Financial Analysis—9999995• Accounts Receivable—9999996• Payroll—9999997• Accounts Payable—9999998.

To keep the system from posting an out-of-balance entry, applications use theirnumbers if a valid account number is not available when the system posts atransaction. If the system uses one of these numbers, manually transfer the entry tothe proper account before you close the period.

650 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR CASH-IN-BANK?

DFLT-0


Purchasing

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when you writeaccounts payable checks. If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), thedisplay shows a zero, but Purchasing uses 9999998 as the default for accountspayable on all applicable reports. Add the general ledger number (either the numberyou chose or the default—9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.

651 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR DISCOUNTSEARNED?

DFLT-0

Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when you writeaccounts payable checks and take any discount amounts. If you must distribute thediscounts earned account to multiple accounts, you can do so by making manualjournal entries.

If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), the display shows a zero, butPurchasing uses 9999998 as the default for accounts payable on all applicablereports. Add the general ledger number (either the number you chose or thedefault—9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.

652 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FREIGHT?

Enter the general ledger account number you want to use as the default freightaccount during invoice entry. If you have the General Ledger application installed,add the general ledger account number to the General Ledger master file; otherwise,when the system uses this account number as a default, edit errors occur.

653 WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SALES TAX?

Enter the general ledger account number you want to use as the default sales taxaccount during invoice entry. If you have the General Ledger application installed,add the general ledger account number to the General Ledger master file; otherwise,when the system uses this account number as a default, edit errors occur.

654 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question X03.

Answer Y (Yes) to tell the system if you have any more companies. Question 647appears.

Answer N (No) to tell the system you have no more companies.


Purchasing

655 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGINVOICE CONSTANT INFORMATION?

DFLT-Y

This question completes the “Invoice Constants” section of the questionnaire andalso completes the tailoring necessary for your Purchasing application. If you madea mistake or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes) and return toquestion 634. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.


Repetitive Production Management

Repetitive Pr oduction Mana gement


Q01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FORREPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation, answer Y (Yes) so that the options are shown. Duringreinstallation, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No).

If your answer is N (No), skip to question Q10.

Q02 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTSPLANNING?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is installed or is being installed at thistime.

Answer Y (Yes) to extract schedule requirements from MRP planned orders. MRP isthe primary source for schedule requirements. You can override MRP as a source forindividual items, using the extract source code in the Item Balance file.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenRepetitive Production Management and MRP. After this installation run you mustactivate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Q03 DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N

Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is installed or is being installed at thistime. Answer Y (Yes) to extract schedule requirements from COM customer orders. IfCOM is installed and interfacing, but MRP is not, then COM customer orders and theSchedule Interface file are the primary sources for schedule requirements. You canoverride the Extract Source Code using the extract source code in the Item Balancefile.

You must answer Y (Yes) to this question in order to be able to maintain customermanufacturing dates from either COM and REP.



Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface betweenRepetitive Production Management and COM. After this installation run you mustactivate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate interfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide.

Q04 DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT- N




Q05 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR IFM G/L LINES?

DFLT-N

If your answer is N (No), transaction details will not be saved in the TransactionExtract file. If your answer is Y(Yes), the Create Ledger Entries function will keeptransaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extract file.

This question appears only when IFM is installed and you have answered Y(Yes) to“Do you want to have General Ledger distribution?”.

Q06 WHAT PERCENTAGE OF A PRODUCTION LINES AVAILABLE HOURS WILLBE USED FOR THE LOWER LIMIT?

LOW-0 HILIM=100 DFLT-75

Type in the percentage that determines if a production line is underloaded incomparison to total available hours. Available hours are the sum of desired shifthours in the line capacity record for a production line on a given day.

This question affects the daily production line schedule hours edit on the SequenceSchedule displays. Daily line schedule hours below this percentage are highlighted.



Q07 DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) if you need more than 20 characters of text for your manufacturingschedule operation descriptions in order to create the Manufacturing Order RoutingDescription file. This file allows you to enter up to 999 lines of 40-character text foreach operation. If you do not need additional operation descriptions, answer N (No).

If you answer Y (Yes), you must also answer Y (Yes) to PDM question E09 or EPDMquestion D09.

Q08 DO YOU WANT TO KEEP HISTORY FOR PURGED SCHEDULES?

DFLT-Y

Answer Y (Yes) to have records being purged from the manufacturing order filesretained in schedule purge files:

You have the responsibility for managing and deleting data in these schedule purgefiles (MOHMST, MOHRTG, and MOHDTA), as required.

Answer N (No) to purge schedules without retaining purged records.

Q09 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question Q02. Answer N (No) to continue thequestionnaire.

Data purged from: Will be retained in:

MOMAST MOHMST

MOROUT MOHRTG

MODATA MOHDTA




Q10 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FORREPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation you must answer Y (Yes) so that essential information can beentered. During reinstallation, you can answer Y or N, depending on what needs tobe changed.

If you answer N (No), the questionnaire is completed.

Q11 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALLREPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT RECORDS WHEN THEY AREMAINTAINED?

DFLT-Y

To provide an audit trail of master file maintenance changes, answer Y (Yes).

If you answer N (No), neither the before nor the after lines are printed on themaintenance edit lists.

Q12 WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR REQUESTED REPETITIVEPRODUCTION MANAGEMENT REPORTS?

1 - PRODUCTION LINE2 - ITEM


This question selects the sequence of the information in these reports:

• Schedule Performance Report• Released Schedules Report• Production Schedules Report• Item/Line Process Report• Item/Line Report

Answer with one of the following codes for the sequence you want:

1 REPORTS ARE SEQUENCED BY PRODUCTION LINE AS THEPRIMARY SEQUENCING FIELD.

2 REPORTS ARE SEQUENCED BY ITEM AS THE PRIMARYSEQUENCING FIELD.



You can override this response by using each of the report options shown when yourun the program.

Q13 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BAR CODES AND ENLARGED CHARACTERS?

DFLT-N

This question appears only if the PM&C application is installed and interfacing withRepetitive Production Management.

Answer Y (Yes) to print bar codes on pick lists, container labels, component returnlists, and production reporting lists. In addition, you can print enlarged print oncontainer labels. If you answer Y (Yes), production line, line location, component,and supply location appear in enlarged type on container information printed onthese labels. Printers with special characteristics (IPDS printers) are required to printbar codes and enlarged type.

Answer N (No) to print pick lists, container labels, component return lists, andproduction reporting lists without bar codes and enlarged characters.

Q14 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previousquestions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question Q10.





Sales Analysis

Sales Anal ysis


S01 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR SALESANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all optionsand enter essential information. If this application is already installed and interfacing,you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

If you answer N (No), skip to question S07.

S02 HOW DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE YOUR GROSS PROFIT PERCENT?

0=PERCENT OF SALES, 1=PERCENT OF COST


Choose the method that best suits your needs. Enter 0 to calculate gross profit as apercent of gross sales; enter 1 to calculate gross profit as a percent of cost.

S03 SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE ACCOUNTSRECEIVABLE APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if you have previously installed AR and the AR interface isnot already active.

Answer Y (Yes) if AR is to interface with SA.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step towards installing and interfacingSA and AR. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interfacethrough Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapterof the CAS User’s Guide for more information.


Sales Analysis

S04 SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE CUSTOMER ORDERMANAGEMENT APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if you have previously installed COM and the COMinterface is not already active.

Answer Y (Yes) if COM is to interface with SA.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step towards installing and interfacingSA and COM. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate theinterface through Cross Application Support. See the “Activate/DeactivateInterfaces” chapter of the CAS User’s Guide for more information.

S05 SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE INVENTORYMANAGEMENT APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if you have previously installed IM and the IM interface isnot already active.

Answer Y (Yes) if IM is to interface with SA.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step towards installing and interfacingSA and IM. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must interface throughCross Application Support. See the “Activate/Deactivate Interfaces” chapter of theCAS User’s Guide for more information.

The following statement appears if none of the interfacing applications (AR, COM,and IM) has been selected to interface with SA.

IN ORDER TO INSTALL SALES ANALYSIS, YOU MUST INTERFACE WITHACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE, CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT, OR INVENTORYMANAGEMENT—PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE—

S06 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGFUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question S02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining theconstants options.


Sales Analysis


S07 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FORSALES ANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

If you are installing this application for the first time, you must answer Y (Yes) so thatessential information to run the company can be entered. If this application is alreadyinstalled and interfacing, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending uponwhat needs to be changed.

If your answer is N (No), skip to question S16.

S08 SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS CLOSE AUTOMATICALLY UPDATE THECUSTOMER AND ITEM CLASS CODES?

DFLT-N

If you wish, Sales Analysis will update every summary record for the current fiscalyear during each Sales Analysis Close with the current value of class stored in theCustomer and Item Master files.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want this processing to occur during Sales Analysis Close.Answer N (No) if you want to manually update the class values using filemaintenance to match the master files or to purposely be different from the masterfiles.

Note: Question S09 is not shown if you answered N (No) to question X03. thecompany number is always 1 in this case.

S09 TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWINGRESPONSES WILL APPLY


The number you enter must be from 1 to 89. The first company number defaults to a1. Remember that if you install other applications that allow for multiple companies,the company numbers and names should be consistent across all the applications.

S10 TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)

The 15-character company name entered at this time is used as part of the headingson your reports. This name is associated with the company number entered inquestion S09 or company 1 if the question was not shown. A name must be entered


Sales Analysis

for each company number you plan to enter. This is the only way the system candetermine that the company is active and the number is valid.

The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The first time youanswer this question, the default is blank. After that, the company name that youhave previously typed in for the particular company appears.

Note: Question S11 is not shown if you answered Y (Yes) to question X01.

S11 IN WHAT MONTH DOES YOUR FISCAL YEAR BEGIN?

1 = JANUARY


The computer assumes that each company has an independent accounting cyclefor the 12-month accounting year. The answer to this question tells Sales Analysis inwhich month to begin year-to-date calculations. If you elected 13-period accountingsystem (question X01), this question does not appear.

Enter the number that corresponds to the first month that you want your fiscal year tobegin.

Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise, unpredictableresults may occur.

Note: The 13-period accounting year always starts with period 1.

S12 WHAT IS YOUR CURRENT PROCESSING MONTH/PERIOD?

1 = JANUARY OR PERIOD


Enter the number that corresponds to the month or period that you want current dataentered to be posted.

Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise, unpredictableresults may occur.

S13 IN WHAT MONTH/PERIOD WAS YOUR LAST SALES ANALYSIS CLOSE? 1 =JANUARY OR PERIOD 1


If this is the initial installation of Sales Analysis, enter a number that corresponds toone period prior to the current period. For example, in 12 month processing, if thecurrent period is 1, then enter 12 for the last Sales Analysis close.


Sales Analysis

If this is not the initial installation of Sales Analysis, enter the number of the period ormonth last closed by either a Sales Analysis close or a year-end close.

Notes:

1. At the end of a reporting period, after “Reporting Period Close” and before“Sales Analysis Close,” the last Sales Analysis close field is two periods prior tothe current field (assuming that you close at the end of each period).

2. Question S14 is not shown if you answered N (No) to question X33.

S14 DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N

This question is a decision or test point for the system to determine if all yourcompanies have been entered. Answer Y (Yes) to return to question S09 to enter thenext company number and name (questions S09 and S10). When all your companiesare entered, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of thequestionnaire.

S15 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGSYSTEM CONSTANTS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) toreturn to question S08. Answer N (No) to continue with the questionnaire.


S16 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR SALESANALYSIS?

DFLT-Y

During initial installation, you should answer Y (Yes) so that the options are shown toyou. If this application is already installed and interfacing, you can answer Y (Yes) orN (No), depending on what needs to be changed.

S17 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE CUSTOMERS ONLY?

DFLT-N


Sales Analysis

This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either AR or COM.

You may choose to print all customers on the customer reports or only thosecustomers that have had sales activity during the current reporting period.

Answering Y (Yes) causes all customers to be printed on the reports. Answering N(No) causes only those customers with sales activity during the current reportingperiod to be printed on the reports.

S18 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE ITEMS ONLY?

DFLT-N

This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either COM or IM.

You may choose to print all items selected for SA on the item reports or only thoseitems selected for SA with activity during the current reporting period.

Answering Y (Yes) causes all items selected for SA to be printed on the reports.Answering N (No) causes only those items selected for SA with activity during thecurrent reporting period to print on the reports.

S19 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE SALESREPS ONLY?

DFLT-N

You may choose to print all sales representatives selected for SA on the salesrepreports or only those sales representatives selected for SA with activity during thecurrent reporting period.

Answering Y (Yes) causes all sales representatives selected for SA to be printed onthe reports. Answering N (No) causes only those sales representatives selected forSA with activity during the current reporting period to print on the reports.

S20 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT REPORTS AT MONTH/PERIOD OR YEAR-ENDCLOSE?

DFLT-Y

If you answer N (No) to this question, you may manually choose, prior to updating thefiles, to print certain reports at month or period close and at year-end close. If youanswer Y (Yes) to this question, the reports you select are printed automatically. Youmay also print other reports by manual selection prior to updating the files.


Sales Analysis

S21 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY CUSTOMER?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either AR or COM.

Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Customer to be printed prior to month orperiod close and year-end close.

Answering N (No) causes month or period close and year-end close to update thefiles without printing Sales Analysis by Customer.

S22 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY ITEM?

DFLT-Y

This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either COM or IM.

Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Item to be printed prior to month orperiod close and year-end close.

Answering N (No) causes month or period close and year-end close to update thefiles without printing Sales Analysis by Item.

S23 DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY SALESREP?

DFLT-N

Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Salesrep to be printed prior to month orperiod close and year-end close.

Answering N (No) causes month or period close and year-end close to update thefiles without printing Sales Analysis by Salesrep.

The following statement appears if none of the month/period or year-end closereports have been selected.

REPORT(S) HAVE BEEN SELECTED TO PRINT AT MONTH/PERIOD OR YEAR-ENDCLOSE AT LEAST ONE REPORT MUST BE SELECTED —PRESS ENTER TOCONTINUE—


Sales Analysis

S24 DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNINGREPORT OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y


If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses in the “Define reportoptions” section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question S17. Answer N (No) tocomplete the questionnaire.

Contents Index Exit Page C-1

Special forms

Appendix C. Special f orms

This appendix gives you information about the special forms that you need for someMAPICS XA applications.

Overview.................................................................................................................. C-2Accounts Payable ................................................................................................... C-4Accounts Receivable .............................................................................................. C-9Customer Order Management .............................................................................. C-16Manufacturing Performance Analysis ................................................................... C-20Payroll .................................................................................................................... C-21Production Control and Costing ............................................................................ C-29Production Monitoring and Control........................................................................ C-32Purchasing ............................................................................................................ C-49Repetitive Production Management ...................................................................... C-61


Special forms

Overview

Some application reports require special forms other than the standard sizecomputer forms. Depending on the application function, these special forms havepreprinted headings or are blank and the application prints the headings. Thischapter contains, by application, the samples and suggested layouts for thepreprinted forms and the samples and dimensions for the blank forms.

When you need a special form, the printer stops and sends a message containingthe form type you should load into the printer. For example, the form type for PM&Clabor tickets is LABORTKT and the form type for standard computer paper is *STD.(You find the form type in the beginning of the discussion of forms for eachapplication.) After you indicate that the form is loaded, you may see additionalmessages for assistance with forms alignment.

For example, when you print Accounts Payable or Payroll checks, the first checkprinted is for alignment purposes. A line of information prints, printing stops, and amessage is shown. You can then check and adjust the alignment. Depending onyour response to the message, either the alignment process is repeated or checksare printed. The check printed during alignment is always voided.

At the end of any printing operation with special forms, printing again stops. Systemmessages tell you to load another special form or to load the printer with standardcomputer paper.

Be sure to refer to the manual that comes with your printer for any additionalinstructions.

The following table summarizes the special forms by application.

Application Form Type Description

Accounts Payable Vendor check CKxx Preprinted

Remittance advice RAxx Preprinted

1099 1099 Government

Accounts Receivable Statement type 1 or 2 S00 Preprinted

Delinquency notice DELQ Preprinted

Customer OrderManagement

Acknowledgment ACKNOWLEDG Preprinted

Invoice INVOICE Preprinted

Quote QUOTE Preprinted

Manufacturing PerformanceAnalysis

Inventory tags TAGS Blank

Payroll Employee check type1 or 2

PCxx Preprinted

941A 941A Government

W-2 W-2 Government

Production Control andCosting

Labor ticket LT01 or LABORTKT (ifPM&C is installed)

Preprinted


Special forms

Production Monitoring andControl

Employee badge EMPBDG Blank

Temporary employeebadge

TMPEMPBDG Blank

Labor ticket LABORTKT Preprintedor blank

Physical inventory tag INVTAGS Blank

Quality control ticket -manufactured,purchased, or cyclicitems

QCTKTMQ,QCTKTPQ, orQCTKTCQ

Preprintedor blank

Manufacturing orderreceiving ticket

MFGTKT Preprintedor blank

Purchase orderreceiving ticket

PURTKT Preprintedor blank

Purchasing Debit memo DBFM Preprinted

Purchase orderformats - vendoracknowledgment

POFM3 Preprinted

Quotation request QUOTEFORM4 Preprinted

Repetitive ProductionManagement

Container label -single or doubleformat

CLBLS-1UP orCLBLS-2UP

Blank

Note:1BAxx2 is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI acknowledgments.2BIxx2 is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI invoices.3POFM-EDI is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI purchase orders.4QTE-EDI is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI quotation orders.

Application Form Type Description


Special forms

Accounts Payable

Vendor checks

The check stub lists up to 12 invoices that may be included in the check total. Ifinvoices overflow the check stub, the system prints CONTINUED ON REMITTANCEADVICE on line 17, in positions 22 through 51. If the payment is to an assignee, thevendor’s name and address print on the check stub.

Form width: 8-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)

Form length: 7˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)

First body line: 5

Last body line: 17

First total line: 19

Last total line: 19

Page number line: 21

First check line: 26

Last check line: 38

Fits standard #10 window envelope.

Form Type Description

Vendor checks CKxx, where xx is the company number forwhich checks are being written. If you haveonly one company, xx is always 01.

Preprinted

Remittance advice RAxx, where xx is the company number Preprinted

1099 Miscellaneous form(not shown in this appendix)

1099 Government


Special forms

Figure C-1. Accounts Payable vendor check sample

XX

0 0 4 5 2L T 4 4

CHECK NUMBER TOTALS

P

V E N D O R J O H N S O N8 X 1 0 C A M2 1 / 4 C A5 5 M M L E

B & W E N

C H E M I C A LT O N E RT H E R M O M EB A C K G R O US T U D I O LC O N T I N U E

& P A R T NE R AM E R AN S

L A R G E R

S

T E R SN D SI G H T SD O N R E

R S C O .

I T A N C E

5 7 5 . 0 0

A D V I C E

C H E C K D A T E 1 1 2 0 / *

0 1

INVOICE NO. INVOICE DATE DESCRIPTION GROSS AMOUNT DISCOUNT NET AMOUNT

1 1 / 2 0 * 1 3 2CHECK DATE CHECK NO.

* 0 5 6CHECK AMOUNT

3 0

*N D F I T Y S I X A N- DU S A 0 / 1T H R E

H EOT TO R D E R O F

O .J O H N S O N & P A R T N E R S CS O U T H C U R T R IO G H T

3 2B U F A L O N Y 2 0 1 5 - 0

AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE


L T 4 5L T 4 6L T 4 7L T 4 8L T 4 9L T 5 0L T 5 1L T 5 2L T 5 3L T 5 4

1 1 / 1 0 / * *1 1 / 1 0 / * *1 1 / 1 0 / * *1 1 / 1 0 / * *1 1 / 1 1 / * *1 1 / 1 1 / * *1 1 / 1 1 / * *1 1 / 1 1 / * *1 1 / 1 1 / * *1 1 / 1 2 / * *1 1 / 1 2 / * *

1 3 2

E

2 8 M M L E N S

C L R E N L A R G E RO O

M M T

3 2 4 . 0 08 5 . 0 0

1 1 5 . 0 01 5 0 . 0 0

6 5 . 0 03 7 5 . 0 0

2 0 . 0 03 5 . 0 0

3 2 0 . 0 06 5 0 . 0 0

0 5 6 . 0 0,3

5 7 5 . 0 03 2 4 . 0 0

8 5 . 0 01 1 5 . 0 01 5 0 . 0 0

6 5 . 0 03 7 5 . 0 0

2 0 . 0 03 5 . 0 0

3 2 0 . 0 06 5 0 . 0 0

0 5 6 . 0 0,3

*/

0 0

/ *

0*******

E T H O F 0 0 0 * ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** * **

FW

5 5

, .


Special forms

Figure C-2. Accounts Payable vendor check form layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

8.5 inches

7 inches

Perforationline

XX

X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X

CHECK NUMBER X X X X X X TOTALS

P


X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X


X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X X



X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X







X X X X


X X X X X X X X X X X X X XCHECK DATE CHECK NO.

X X X X X X X X X X X X X XCHECK AMOUNT

X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X

H EOT TO R D E R O F

X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X XX

85

84

83

82

81

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

27

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321



X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX

X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

3.5 inches3.5 inches


Special forms

Remittance advice

When all the invoices paid by an Accounts Payable check cannot be listed on thecheck stub, the additional invoices are listed separately on this form.

Form width: 8-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)

Form length: 7˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)

Page number line: 2

First body line: 5

Last body line: 38

First total line: 40

Last total line: 40

Fits standard #10 envelope.

Figure C-3. Accounts Payable Remittance Advice sample

XX

0 0 0 4 5 2L T 5 5L T 5 6L T 5 7L T 5 8

CHECK NUMBER 1 3 2 TOTALS

P

V E N D O R J1 1 / 1 2 / * *

H N S O N &L I G H T M OC L O S E - U P5 0 - 2 0 0S C R E E N S

P A R T N E RU N T S

L E N S E SM M Z O O

C O .7 0 . 0 03 0 . 0 0

3 , 0 5 6 . 0 0

C H E C K D A T E 1 / 2 0 / * *

2 0 0 . 0 0

0 0 0 1

INVOICE NO. INVOICE DATE DESCRIPTION GROSS AMOUNT DISCOUNT NET AMOUNTO

1 1 / 1 2 / * *1 1 / 1 2 / * *1 1 / 1 2 / * *

S

M 2 0 . 0 00 04 2 . 0 0

1

3 0 . 0 07 0 . 0 0

4 2 . 0 0

3 , 0 5 6 . 0 0


Special forms

Figure C-4. Accounts Payable Remittance Advice forms layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

8.5 inches

7 inches3.5 inches

3.5 inches

Fold

XX

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


85

84

83

82

81

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

27

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

X X X X X X

CHECK NUMBER

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

TOTALSX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

P X X X X


Special forms

Accounts Receivable

Statement type 1 (standard window statement)

Line item for each invoice, payment, and adjustment

Summarized aging for customer account

Tear strip

Date of line item on tear strip


Form width: 11˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)Form length: 8-1/2˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)First body line: 3Number of detail lines: 22Last body line: 49


Statements type 1 or 2 S00 Preprinted

Delinquency notice DELQ Preprinted


Special forms

Figure C-5. Accounts Receivable Statement type 1 sample

DATE

0 1 / 29 / *

1

SUAP LO Y .C

ST OGL6 2 WE5 A .E RPHAT NL

- 297GA 0 13 8

YOU FTH KAN RW TBU NESI H DGO

H P YFO AR RNE YEW

DATE TRNREFER.NUMBER

CASH RECEIVEDADJUSTMENT AMT. DISCOUNT DATE TRN

REFER.NUMBER AMOUNT

CURRENT

PAST 90

SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE

PAST 60

PAST 120

EURO TOTAL

AMOUNT DUE

* NVI30 /1 /, 1 . 0

3 .5 4 0PAST 30

. 0 .

.5 .0 .

TOTAL DUEPLEASE PAY THIS AMOUNTEURO TOTALSC CALCULATED ON BALANCE

82 ..,

56543

4087

2 A 1 . 05 R% AP

AMOUNT

* 1

100

0 1 / 2 9 / * * 1

1 100

P LO PPL O

T O E VEA TA

0 1

O YOURSS I O W SHI SE

A P A

1 * 1 100011* MTP15 /0 /, 8 . 0 1 * 1 10001 0* NVI30 /1 /, . 0 1 * 1 20001 00* MTP15 /0 /, 0 1 * 1 20001 00 .* NVI15 //, 0 2 * 1 30051 02 1.* MTP15 /0 /, 0 1 * 1 30051 02 .* NVI30 /1 /0 2 * 1 40001 01, .* MTP15 /0 /0 1 * 1 4008 02 .* DJA15 /0 /0 1 * 1 40080 .*30 /1 /1 . 5 2 *63*9 /1 /. 5 2 *73 0

, 1 . 00011, 8 . 0001 0, . 0001 00, 0001 00 ., 0051 02 ., 0051 02 .

0001 01, .008 02 .0080 .

1 . 563. 573

-

-

-

--

00

0002

00

0

0

0

0

08T. 0002 A 1 . 05 R% AP08T. 000

* NVI30 /1 /1 * 1 10* MTP15 /0 /1 * 1 10* NVI30 /1 /1 * 1 20* MTP15 /0 /1 * 1 20* NVI15 //2 * 1 301* MTP15 /0 /1 * 1 30* NVI30 /1 /2 * 1 40* MTP15 /0 /1 * 1 40* DJA15 /0 /1 * 1 40*30 /1 /2 **9 /1 / 2 *0

5 . 0005 . 0005 . 0009

. 0005, 0001 00 . 00.

00., 001 0 .00 0052 .

0008 .0002 .008 0 .0

DJA - 1

PAGE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY

PAGEDATE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY


Special forms

Figure C-6. Accounts Receivable Statement type 1 layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

11 inches

8.5 inches

Fold

X

FoldFold

XX XDATE/

/ /

//

/ /

/

X

X

X X

X XX XX XX XX X

XX

X X

XX

XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XXX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XXX X X XX X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

XXX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

XXX

X

X

X

X

- - -

-

---

-

-

-

-

XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XX XX . . .

.

...

.

.

.

.

X

X XX XX XX

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

X

X X

X XX XX XX XX X

XX

X X

XX

X XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XXX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X XX XX XX

XXX

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X XX X

XXXX

X X

XXXX

X X

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

XXXX

DATE TRNREFER.NUMBER

CASH RECEIVEDADJUSTMENT AMT. DISCOUNT DATE TRN

REFER.NUMBER AMOUNT

CURRENT

PAST 90

PAST 60

PAST 120

EURO TOTAL

AMOUNT DUE

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

100

99

98

97

96

95

94

93

92

91

90

89

88

87

86

85

84

83

82

81

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

PAST 30TOTAL DUE

PLEASE PAY THIS AMOUNTEURO TOTAL


Perforationline

AMOUNT

Fold

PAGE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY

PAGEDATE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY

X


Special forms

Statement type 2 (standard spread window statement)

Line item for each invoice, payment, and adjustment

Summarized aging for customer account

Aging by line item

Tear strip


Form width: 11˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)Form length: 8-1/2˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)First body line: 3Number of detail lines: 23Last body line: 50

Figure C-7. Accounts Receivable Statement type 2 sample

XXDATE/

/ // // // // // // /

/ /

/ // // /

//

/ // /

/1

1 11 1

1 11 10 0

19

0 05 5

9*

N NM M

, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,

AU A

0A

AB

5C C

0O .

TTTTTTTT

AAAAAAAA

0 00 0

0 00 00 00 00 00 0

1T E 8

24

25

0

.D 5O 00F % APR

56

0

0 00 00 0

0

047

0

0

0

0

0 00 0 -

-

-

--

0 0

0

008

0

0

0

0

00000000

V VT T

1 10 00 00 00 00 0

2 22 2

5 55 5

0 00 0

0 00 0

1

TL N

3

1 11 1

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

.

...

.

.

.

.

1 1

A

TBF

P

HUO

ASR

O

NI

L

KNA

L

E

O

YSH

OS WI TH GOOD WI SHESA

S

U

P

U

P

P

F

Y

P

O

L

R

N

Y

E

Y

W

C

O

O

U

Y

R

E

.

AR

0

1 1

1 10 01 10 01 10 00 01 10 01 12 29 9

2 23 30 01 11 15 5/ /

/ // /

/ // // /

1 11 15 5/ // /2 23 30 0/ /1 11 15 52 2

1 11 11 1

1 15 55 5

3 30 00 0

0 0

02

3 31 1

2*

***********

****

**

***

**

***********

***

***

*

**

**

I IP PI IP PI IP PM MT TI IP PA AD DJ J

M MT TN NV V

N NV VM MT TN NV V

1

11

1

11

1 11 11 11 11 1

8 82 28 83 31 1

3 37 75 56 65 5

0 00 00 00 00 00 0

0 00 00 00 0

CR

L T.

02

S0

00

LP

A A0 %

N 0

SSSSSSSS

PPPPPPPPCC

UU

RR

RR

EE

NN

TT

1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1

0 00 00 00 00 00 00 0

3 33 34 44 44 4

2 22 2

1 16 60 00 0

A C 1

,

3

5

8E 2 .

85

0

99333333

* *

.EVAEPROHTE

6

L

7

G

9

O

2-

T

1

SA0

ET3

WN0

A3

5L

2TA

6AG

DATE TRNREFER.NUMBER AGE AMOUNT DATE TRN

REFER.NUMBER AMOUNT

CURRENT

PAST 90

PAST 60

PAST 120

EURO TOTAL

AMOUNT DUE

PAST 30TOTAL DUE


SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE OF

TOTAL

PAGE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY

PAGEDATE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY


Special forms

Figure C-8. Accounts Receivable Statement type 2 layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

11 inches

8.5 inches

Fold

X

Fold

434445464748495051

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

Fold

XX XDATE/

/ /

//

/ /

/

XX

X

X X

X XX XX XX XX X

XX

X X

XX

X XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XXX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XXX X X XX X XX

XX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

XXX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

XXX

X

X

X

X

- - -

-

---

-

-

-

-

XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XX XX . . .

.

...

.

.

.

.

X

X XX XX XX

XXXXXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

XXX

X

X

X X

X XX XX XX XX X

XX

X X

XX

X XX XX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

XXX XX X X X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

XXX X

XXX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X XX XX XX

XXX

XXXXXXXX

XX

X XX X

XXXXX

X XX X

XXXXX

X XX X

XXXXX

X XX X

XXXXX

X XX X

XXXXX

X XX X

XXXXX

X X

XXXXX

X X

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

DATE TRNREFERNUMBER AGE AMOUNT DATE TRN

REFER.NUMBER AMOUNT

CURRENT

PAST 90

PAST 60

PAST 120

EURO TOTAL

AMOUNT DUE

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

100

99

98

97

96

95

94

93

92

91

90

89

88

87

86

85

84

83

82

81

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

PAST 30TOTAL DUE



Perforationline

TOTAL

Fold

PAGE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY

PAGEDATE

CO CUSTOMER

CURRENCY


Special forms

Delinquency noticeForm width: 10˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)Form length: 3-1/2˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)First body line: 3Last body line: 19Fits standard #10 window envelope.

Figure C-9. Delinquency notice sample

X X

0 1 29 * *

S ATH II SUENCYDE NQL I NO CET I

/ /

DATE CO CUSTOMER CURRENCY

1 100

SUPPLAP LOOL Y .CO

ST OGL62 WE5 E AVE .ET RPHOAT NTLA A

01 - 297GA 033 6

CURRENT PAST 30 PAST 60

35 40. 00. 200 00.

PAST 90 PAST 120 TOTAL DUE

00. 50 00. 285 40.

DELINQUENT AMT.

,243EURO TOTAL

55

06

07

08

.

.

Figure C-10. Delinquency notice layout

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

10 inches

3.5 inches

X 123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

X

XX XX XX

XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX X

100

99

98

97

96

95

94

93

92

91

90

89

88

87

86

85

84

83

82

81

80

79

78

77

76

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

X X

DATE CUSTOMERCO CURRENCY

XX XX XX XXX X XX XX XXX X X XX XXX X

XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX X

XX XX XXX X

CURRENT PAST 30 PAST 60

XXX XX XX. XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX. XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX.

XX XX XXX X

PAST 90 PAST 120 TOTAL DUE

XXX XX XX. XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX. XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX.

DELINQUENT AMOUNT

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XEURO TOTAL X

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

.

.


Special forms

Figure C-11. Standard number 10 window envelope

0.825"

0.5"

9.5"

1.5"

4.5"

1.5"


Special forms


Acknowledgment, Invoice, and QuoteForm width: 8-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch)Form length: 11˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)First body line: 2Number of detail lines: 32Last body line: 65Fits standard #10 window envelope


Acknowledgment ACKNOWLEDG Preprinted

Invoice INVOICE Preprinted

Quote QUOTE Preprinted


Special forms

Figure C-12. Customer Order Management Acknowledgment preprinted form

1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

4 5 6 7 8 911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

8.5 inches

11 inches

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

DATE PAGEACKNOWLEDGEMENT9 9 / 9 9 / 9 9 9 9 9

51525354555657585960616263646566

9

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

EXPORT CURRENCYX X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX

TERMSX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

CUSTOMER ORDER SLS.REP. P. O. NUMBER P. O. REV.9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 X X X X X X X X X 9 9 9 9 9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONSX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X

LINE NO. ITEM NUMBER/DESCRIPTION U/M QUANTITY/PRICE NET SALES AMOUNT

NET SALES TRADE DISCOUNT, 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 -MISC CHARGES TERMS DISCOUNT, 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 -FREIGHT ,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

,

,

,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

.

.

9

9

9

9

-

-

TAXES ,

,,

,9

9

99

9

99

9

9,

,,

,9

9

99

9

99

9

99

9X X X T T A L 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9:O

9,

,,

,,

,,

,9

9

99

9

99

9

99

9

99

9

99

9

9.

.

..9

9

99

9

9-

-

--

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X X X

X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

X X

SHIP

TO

SOLD

TO

ORDERTOTAL


Special forms

Figure C-13. Customer Order Management Invoice preprinted form

1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

4 5 6 7 8 911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

8.5 inches

11 inches

XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

INVOICE PAGEINVOICE

99 9 9 9 9 9 99 9 9

9 9 9 9DATE

DUE ON

51525354555657585960616263646566

9

SHIP

TO

SOLD

TO

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


CUSTOMER ORDER SLS.REP. PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER P.O. REV.9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 X X X X X X X X X 9 9 9 9 9 XXXX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X

SHIP NO. SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS SHIP DATE SHIP WEIGHT9 99 9 9 9 X X X9 X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X

LINE NO. LINE NUMBER/DESCRIPTION U/M QUANTITY/PRICE NET SALES AMOUNT

9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

/ 9 9/

9 9 9 9/ 9 9/

SELLER TAX I.D.X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

XX X X X X X 9 9 / 9 9 / 99 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 99

X X

X X

X XX X X X XX X XX XX X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X XX X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X X X XX XX X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X

X X

X X

XXXX9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X

X

9 9 X X X X

X -

* -

R I I C E ARERO D MOUN T DU E =NQ T Y . .D I I NC L UD DESCVOERDOITLUM -

NET SALES TRADE DISCOUNT

AMOUNTDUE

TERMS DISCOUNTMISC CHARGESFREIGHTTAXES

9,9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

X X X

9

X X X T T A L :O9

,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

99 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9, , , ,

9

,

,

9

9

9

9

9

9

.

..

9

9

9

9

--

-


Special forms

Figure C-14. Customer Order Management Quote prepinted form

1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXXXX

4 5 6 7 8 911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

8.5 inches

11 inches

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X

DATE PAGEQUOTE9 9 / 9 9 / 9 9 9 9 9

51525354555657585960616263646566

9

X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X


X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X


CUSTOMER QUOTE SLS.REP. CONTACT9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X

LINE NO. ITEM NUMBER/DESCRIPTION U/M QUANTITY/PRICE NET SALES AMOUNT

NET SALES , 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 - TRADE DISCOUNT 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -

, 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 - 9 9 ,,

9 9 9 ..

9 9 --, 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 X X X T TA L :O-

, 9 9 9 , 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 - QUOTETOTAL

,

,,,

9

99

9

99

9

99

, 9 9 99 , ,9 99 99 9 . 9 9 -

EXPIRATION DATE9 9 / 9 9 / 9 9

MISC. CHARGESFREIGHTTAXES

TERMS DISCOUNT, 9 9 9,,

9 9 999 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

,,

9

SHIP

TO

SOLD

TO


Special forms


Inventory tagsForm width: 5˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch)Form length: 3˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)First body line: 2Last body line: 17

Note: The 1/2˝ tear-offs are not included in these form dimensions.


Inventory tags TAGS Blank

Figure C-15. Manufacturing Performance Analysis Inventory Tag sample

BATCH 074

WAREHOUSE 111 CONTROL GROUP GENERAL POPULATION

ITEM NUMBER2508

LOCATIONAAAA

BATCH/LOTBATCH1

FIFO DATE01/01/**

STEEL BOLT

QTY COUNTED DATE COUNTED COUNTED BY


Special forms

Payroll

Employee checks

Two Payroll check forms are available—Type 1 and Type 2. If you have more thanone company, each company may choose a different type of form.

The word MAIL appears on the first line of the stub if you indicate this check is to bemailed.

Employee check type 1Form width: 8-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)Form length: 7˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)Alignment blocks: line 1 horizontal positions 1 and 85First body line: 2Number of detail lines: 12Last body line: 38Fits standard #10 window envelope.


Employee checks type 1 or 2 PCxx, where xx is the companynumber for which checks arebeing written. If you have onlyone company, xx is always 01.

Preprinted

W-2(form not shown in thisappendix)

W-2 Government


Special forms

Figure C-16. Payroll employee Check Type 1

XX EMPLOYEE NAME EMP. NO. HOME DEPT OCCUPATION PERIOD ENDING CHECK NO. NET PAYCO.

EARNINGS/ADJUSTMENTS/ADVANCES CODE HOURS RATE AMOUNT TAX/DEDUCTION/DEFERRAL/BENEFIT CODE AMOUNT YEAR-TO-DATE

R E U L A R P A Y R G 3 0 . 0 0 0 2G

CURRENT GROSS PAY

YEAR-TO-DATE

SUMMARY

TAXABLE CURRENTTAXABLE Y-T-DWITHHELD CURRENTWITHHELD Y-T-D

FEDERAL

. 0

FICA STATE COUNTY

PR ESEA LSLA IMDS21 0REE GUK RI SE ND20

LOCAL OTHER

DIST. CODE

P 0 1

20

CO. DEPT. EMPLOYEE NO. CHECK DATE CHECK NO.

PAY THIS AMOUNT

5 0 . 6*T D N I S KEO T H E O R D E R O F :

O R I Z E DA U T H S I G N A T U R E

O R I Z E DA U T H S I G N A T U R E

R

N 0 0 20 50 2/ *0 / * 2 0 4 6 5 0 . 6 6

2 0 . 0 00 6 0 . 0 00 EU I T D FN U N D 2 . 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 04 . 0 0R E U L A R P A Y R G 1 0 . 0 0 0 3G 2 4 . 0 00 2 4 . 0 00 EM ID AC L NP 3 . 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 06 . 0 0L AD EU LB T I M E D T 4 . 0 0 0 5O 4 0 . 0 00 1 6 . 0 00 EI SFL N U 5 . 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 06 . 0 0R AI CN E 1

0 8NA SRG MH 8 . 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 06 . 0 0I TNE 10 9NAS O PK 9 . 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 08 . 0 0CT L 14 3ICR D U 0 .. 1 7 0 .1 . 1 7D T 2I O 1 0,A E NS TXN S 5 .. 0 0 0 .3 . 9 3TK 1 0A A S AK TXNC 5.. 3 .3 . 6 0TJ 1 0O Y AO U TE 1N 0..3I 2UDU E SO N 0

00001 , . 00059 . 000001 , . 00059 . 00059

. 003302 ,0. 00389 . 003302 ,,1 9 0 . 00389,1 9 . 00389,1 9. 411 9 . 0527 . 0051 . 3511. 413 7 9 . 394401 ,, 1 . 39003 . 0603

20DS 2 0 01 0 0 5 / 02 / * * 02 4

66***$N U RE G E

S I X H D ERU N D I AFF N DYT 6 /6 1 0 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

D N I S KE RN U RE G E1 2 L SO4 N T R EG E1 2 T

AL HON TRE W KV E A1 3 4 1 66 80 0 -

00

* * ** ** * *


Special forms

Figure C-17. Payroll Check Employee type 1 form layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

8.5 inches

7 inches3.5 inches

3.5 inches

erf.ne

XX EMPLOYEE NAME EMP. NO. HOME DEPT OCCUPATION PERIOD ENDING CHECK NO. NET PAYCO.

EARNINGS/ADJUSTMENTS/ADVANCES CODE HOURS RATE AMOUNT TAX/DEDUCTION/DEFERRAL/BENEFIT CODE AMOUNT YEAR-TO-DATEX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X

CURRENT GROSS PAY

YEAR-TO-DATE

SUMMARY

TAXABLE CURRENTTAXABLE Y-T-DWITHHELD CURRENTWITHHELD Y-T-D

FEDERAL

X X X X X X X XX

X X X X X X X XX

FICA

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX

STATE COUNTY

X X

X X

X XX XX XXX XXXX XXXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXX

LOCAL OTHER

X

X

DIST. CODE

X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X XX X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X XX X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X XX X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX

CO. DEPT. EMPLOYEE NO. CHECK DATE CHECK NO.

PAY THIS AMOUNT

X X X X X XX X X XT X X X X X X XXO T H E O R D E R O F :

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X

XXX

XX

X XX X

XX

O

O

R

R

I

I

Z

Z

E

E

D

D

A

A

U

U

T

T

H

H

S

S

I

I

G

G

N

N

A

A

T

T

U

U

R

R

E

E

X

85

84

83

82

81

80

78

77

76

75

74

79

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X XX

X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X


Special forms

Employee check type 2Form width: 8-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)Form length: 11˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)Alignment blocks: line 1 horizontal positions 1 and 85First body line: 2Number of detail lines: 36 lines; only print on first 34.Last body line: 62Fits standard #10 window envelope.

Figure C-18. Payroll Employee Check type 2 sample


Special forms

Figure C-19. Payroll Employee Check type 2 form layout


Special forms

Form 941AForm width: 8-1/2˝ (10 characters to the inch)Form length: 11˝ (6 lines to the inch)Alignment blocks: NoneFirst body line: 6Number of detail lines: 42; first detail line=18; last detail line=60Last body line: 62


Special forms


Special forms

STATE RETURN FOR STATE USE

Employer's Identification number, name and address

EMPLOYEE'SSOCIAL SECURITY

NUMBER

Date Quarter Ended Page Number Name of StateState Federal

ENTER ONPAGE 1ONLY

TAXABLE WAGES TOTAL WAGES EXCESS WAGES

EXCESS WAGESOVER STATE LIMIT

ORSeparation

DateWeeksWorked

STATETAXABLEWAGES

TOTALWAGES

Paid This Quarter

EMPLOYEE'SNAME

TOTALS FOR THIS PAGEnumber of employeesand wage totals EMPLOYER: Only use columns applicable to

state requirements.*

GRAND TOTALS ALL WAGE REPORT SHEETS

Number ofemployees

(State)


Special forms


Note: If Production Monitoring and Control is installed, this form is calledLABORTKT.

Labor ticketForm width: 14-7/8˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch)Form length: 2-1/3˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)First body line: 3Last body line: 11

PC&C prints side-by-side labor tickets as shown below if you answered:


• Y (Yes) to question C33 or C48 (DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?)

• N (No) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDERFORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?)

• N (No) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).

If you answer N (No) (the default) to question C51, indicating that you will not use apreprinted form, PC&C prints the labor tickets shown in Figure C-21.

Use the layout shown on Figure C-22 for your preprinted labor ticket forms if youanswered:


• N (No) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDERFORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?)

• Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51, your labor tickets should use apreprinted form with the layout shown in Figure C-22.


Labor Ticket LT01 or LABORTKT Preprinted

Figure C-21. Production Control and Costing Labor Ticket


Special forms

Labor/milestone ticketForm width: 9-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch)Form length: 3-2/3˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)First body line: 1Last body line: 18

Note: Printing the labor and milestone tickets (also called the over/under format)requires more space than the side-by-side labor tickets. Before you order over/underpreprinted forms, make sure you have enough space to process that format.

PC&C prints over/under labor and milestone tickets shown in Figure C-23 if youanswered:


• Y (Yes) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDERFORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?)

• N (No) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).

Figure C-22. Production Control and Costing Labor Ticket form layout


Special forms

Use the layout shown above for your preprinted labor ticket forms if you answered:


• Y (Yes) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDERFORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?)

• Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).

Figure C-23. Production Control and Costing Labor/Milestone Ticket


Special forms


Employee badges (permanent and temporary)

When PM&C prints permanent employee badges, the bar coded employee numberis printed on an adhesive label. This label is attached to a plastic badge backingwhich you should then laminate. By printing the bar code on a small label rather thanon a form as large as the badge, the front and back of the laminated badge adherebetter, making the badge more durable.

Form width: 2-1/2˝ (horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch)

Form length: 15/16˝ (vertical spacing is 9 lines per inch)

First body line: 2

Last body line: 3

Bar code: Prints in lines 4 through 9

Badge vendors provide two standard badge sizes:

Standard badge size: 2-5/16 x 3-1/4 inchesStandard credit card size: 2-1/8 x 3-1/8 inches

You can use one of these sizes, or any other size large enough to contain the labels.If you are reading the badges with bar code wands, the labels can be positionedanywhere on the badge. If you are using slot readers rather than wands, you need toposition the label so that the edge of the bar code is 1/4 inch from the edge of thebadge. Your badge vendor can advise you on designing your badges and on theavailability of photo IDs or special logos. See Figure C-24 for an example of apermanent employee badge label.


Employee badge EMPBDG Blank

Temporary employee badge TMPEMPBDG Blank

Labor ticket LABORTKT Preprinted or blank

Physical inventory tag INVTAGS Blank

Quality control ticket - manufactured,purchased, or cyclic items

QCTKTMQ, QCTKTPQ,or QCTKTCQ

Preprinted or blank

Manufacturing order receiving ticket MFGTKT Preprinted or blank

Purchase order receiving ticket PURTKT Preprinted or blank

Figure C-24. Production Monitoring and Control Permanent Employee BadgeLabels

KIM BOLDTHEN

0001404

Bar Code


Special forms

Temporary badges, which are intended for use over a limited period of time, areprinted on card or paper stock and are not normally laminated. Because the formlength for format 2 is the same as labor and receiving tickets, you can use blankticket forms or container labels and trim them to the correct width. Figures C-25 andC-26 show examples of both temporary badge formats.


Form length: 2-1/3˝ (Format 1) or 5 1/2˝ (Format 2)

(vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)

First body line: 3 for format 1, 1 for format 2

Last body line: 7 for format 1, 15 for format 2—except for bar code

Bar code: Prints in lines 16 through 22

Figure C-25. Production Monitoring and Control Temporary Employee Badge—Format 1

Figure C-26. Production Monitoring and Control Temporary Employee Badge(trimmed)—Format 2

EMPLOYEE

KIM BOLDTHENTEMP BADGEEXPIRES

Bar Code

10

1042

12/12/**

EMPLOYEE

KIM BOLDTHEN

TEMP BADGEEXPIRES

Bar Code

10

4212/12/**


Special forms

Labor tickets

You need to order labor ticket forms only if you are using labor tickets as theturnaround documents for reporting shop activity.


Form length: 5-1/2˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)

First body line: 1

Last body line: 26—except for bar code

Bar code: Prints in lines 26 through 33, starting in column 52

The preprinted layout in Figure C-27 is a recommended layout, showing what type ofinformation is printed in the corresponding area next to the field heading. If anotherheading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace these field headingswith yours.

If you decide not to use preprinted forms, PM&C prints labor tickets as shown inFigure C-28. Although PM&C prints all the headings, you still need to order specialblank forms, because the perforations in stock forms are not spaced correctly for thelabor tickets.

Figure C-27. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Labor Tickets—recommended layout

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

8.5 inches

XX

75

74

73

72

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64

63

62

61

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10987654321

5.5 inches

I E M N UM B E RX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

D E C R I P I O NX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

S

O R D E RX X X X X X X X X X X X X X

QU A N T I T YX X X X X X

WHX X

X

RX X X X X X X X X X

E FT E R E N ECX X X X X X X XD EU D EA T

O P NX X X X

O O P E RX X X X

A T I O NX X X X

D E C R I P I O NS TX X X X X X X X X X X X

P R E VX X X X X

F A C O P Q T YX X X X X X X X X X X X X X

F A C I DX X X X X

O P S T A RX X X X X

TX X X

D E P TX X X X

T OO LX X X X X X

E M

T

P B A/ D G E N A M E


Special forms

Figure C-28. Production Monitoring and Control Labor Tickets


Special forms

Physical inventory tags

You need physical inventory tags only if you plan to use PM&C to facilitate yourphysical inventory procedures. There are no preprinted forms for these tags; only astandard continuous-feed, perforated form that is the size of an index card. SeeFigures C-29 and C-30 for examples of physical inventory tags.

Form width: 5˝ (not including continuous-feed tracks)

Horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch

Form length: 3˝

Vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch

First body line: 3

Last body line: 18

Bar codes: Print in lines 13 through 17

Figure C-29. Production Monitoring and Control Physical Inventory Tag for controlledwarehousing

ITEM NUMBERWAREHOUSE

LOCATION BATCH/LOT FIFO DATE ON-HAND

QUANTITY COUNTED

EMP/BADGE NAME

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * */* */* * *,***,***,*** -

**** **** ****

Bar code


Special forms

Figure C-30. Production Monitoring and Control Physical Inventory Tag foruncontrolled warehousing

ITEM NUMBERWAREHOUSE

ON-HAND

QUANTITY COUNTED

EMP/BADGE NAME

*,***,***,*** -

**** **** ****

Bar codeBarcode


Special forms

Quality control tickets

Quality control tickets are part of the documentation that you print for the items on anorder. One ticket is printed for every location that has a manufacturing or purchaseorder waiting for inspection, or a cyclic item for which inspection is either due oroverdue. If more than one item is waiting at a location, then one ticket is printed foreach item at each location.

The forms for quality control tickets are the same size as those for receiving tickets.

Form width: 8-1/2˝ (including continuous feed tracks)


Form length: 5-1/2˝, between perforations


First body line: 2

Last body line: 32

Bar code: Prints in lines 28 through 32, starting in column 46

You might want to print your quality control tickets (whether preprinted or otherwise)on adhesive labels, and use them as confirmation of completed quality controlinspection. Your forms vendor can help you order appropriate adhesive labels usingthese recommendations:

Label width: 7-1/2˝

Label depth: 5-1/2˝, perforated at the top and bottom

Label carrier width: 8-1/2˝ (includes 1/2 inch feed tracks)

Label carrier depth: Continuous

The preprinted layouts in Figures C-31, C-32, and C-33 are recommended, and showwhat type of information is printed in the corresponding area by the field heading. Ifanother heading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace our headingswith yours.


Special forms

Figure C-31. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Manufactured Items—recommended layout


Special forms

Figure C-32. Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Purchased Items—recommended layout


Special forms

Figure C-33. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Cyclic Items—recommended layout


Special forms

Figure C-34. Production Monitoring and Control Quality Control Ticket—Manufactured Items


Special forms

Figure C-35. Quality Control Ticket—Purchased Items


Special forms

Receiving tickets for manufacturing and purchase orders

You need to order receiving ticket forms only if you want to use them as theturnaround documents for inventory receipt reporting.

Form width: 8-1/2˝ (total width)


Form length: 5-1/2˝


First body line: 4

Last body line: 20 for M.O. ticket, 19 for P.O. ticket—except for bar code

Bar code: Prints in lines 26 through 33 starting in column 51

Large item number: Enlarged component item numbers print in lines 21 through25 starting in column 1, depending on your tailoring options

You might want to print your receiving tickets (whether preprinted or otherwise) onadhesive labels, and use them to identify the containers of goods received. Yourforms vendor can help you order appropriate adhesive labels using theserecommendations:

Label width: 7-1/2˝

Label depth: 5-1/2˝, perforated at the top and bottom

Figure C-36. Quality Control Ticket—Cyclic Items


Special forms

Label carrier width: 8-1/2˝ (includes 1/2 inch feed tracks)

Label carrier depth: Continuous

The preprinted layouts in Figures C-37 and C-38 are recommended, and show whattype of information prints in the corresponding area by the field heading. If anotherheading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace our headings withyours.

Figure C-37. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Manufacturing Order receiving tickets—recommended layout


Special forms

If you decide not to use preprinted forms, PM&C prints receiving tickets as shown inFigures C-39 and C-40. Although PM&C prints all the headings, you still need toorder special blank forms, since the perforations in stock forms are not spacedcorrectly for the receiving tickets.

Figure C-38. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Purchase Order receiving tickets—recommended layout


Special forms

Figure C-39. Production Monitoring and Control Manufacturing Order Receiving Tickets


Special forms

Figure C-40. Production Monitoring and Control Purchase Order Receiving Tickets


Special forms

Purchasing

Purchase order formats - vendor acknowledgment or debit memoForm width: 8 -1/2" (horizontal spacing is 12 characters/inch for formats

2 and 3)9" (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch for formats

1 and 0)Form length: 11˝ (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)First body line: 2 (formats 0 and 2); 3 (formats 1 and 3)Last body line: 61

Notes:

1. This form is actually 66 lines long. The application does not print anythingbeyond line 61. The “Authorized by” signature block may be placed on line 65.

2. Formats 2 and 3 use compressed print (12 characters per inch (CPI). Formats 0and 1 use 10 CPI. Otherwise, formats 0 and 2 are the same, and formats 1 and 3are the same.

3. Formats 2 and 3 have a form width of 8.5 inches to allow them to fit a standardwindow envelope and to allow easy copying and faxing. Because they aredesigned for 12 characters per inch, you must use a printer that supportscompressed print.

4. Formats 0 and 2 have the purchase order number in the upper left corner.Formats 1 and 3 have the purchase order number in the upper right corner withspace for your company logo on the left. Other fields in the heading area offormats 1 and 3 are positioned differently from formats 0 and 2.

5. All formats support a maximum of 6 lines of name and address information.

6. You can use any of the formats with Debit Memos and Vendor CloseoutAcknowledgements. When printing forms, the application indicates the differentuses in a box in the upper left or upper right corner. When ordering forms from avendor, allow for the multiple uses by setting up a large stock. You might want toorder different forms in different colors to indicate different functions.


Purchase Order formats - vendoracknowledgment

POFM Preprinted

Debit memo DBFM Preprinted

Quotation request QUOTEFORM Preprinted


Special forms

Figure C-41. Purchasing purchase Order formats 1 and 3 sample

PD LEOR R A C E D W I T H:

PHON F A X

* PU RCH A S E O D

S PIH OTA

PAGEB LI OTL

FOB DESCSHIP VIAP.O. DATE

SPECIAL CHARGES FREIGHT

QUANTITY UNIT PRICE AMOUNT

TOTAL

E

* R E R * *

VENDOR

BUYER:PHONE:

TERMS DELIVERY DATE

AUTHORIZED BY

L RNT E A T DOE CK TA 3 5 L PA H A ORF T TE SWA HOR E U S ROE WS E I OC T N 41 4 H1 5 OL MBCO B DGR I E D RRO E LSW L 3GA 0 0 - 37 6 7 1 4U S A

1

B & P LM A S C ST I S P LU P Y , C .I NPU H ARC S I NGP . BO . O X 6 35 7SU EI T 6 35 6 MA3 P L DRET I S VT U I L ,L E F L 3 7 2 8 0

4 0 5 54 - 5 1 33 2

T I SMM I TH

P.O. NUMBER

I N UE RO DO A RL L S

S E BOD Y0 1 * *1 6 1 2 53 4 A I F RR E I TGH/ /

DR SEW I L L 52 3( 4 0 4 5 5

1 6 0 .4 . 04 0 .

P 0 0 0 41 7 - 0

AE

0 1 6 // 2 *QU I D YB* OIT T A LOR

ND

U S. .E C

DO

ON

L LF

AI M

SR

RA T I RE

-4 0 5 54 - 5 3 33 1-

0

A L RNT E A T B IE L L TA 3 5 L PA H A *TOAC OC UN TS E I OC T N 61 4 H1 5 O L MBCO B DGR I E D RRO E LSW L

3GA 0 0 - 37 6 7 1 4 U S A

N AMEI NG

9

URO D KOC 2% N E1 0 T 3 0 E

) 5 - 3 1 3 4 x 2 0 5S

1 I EM SUT A T I NGEN - RD A NGW I E IN MV T

T E IS M W H AD ON DI L E R ISC P I NOT SED VIL ONR 2 2/ */6

T TE I T D I T AE *

T E IS MP G E DT T EI N D LS H P I ESH UGDW

-

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 6 0 .0 0 0 0 0 0 0* R ON RE * * *

48


Special forms

Figure C-42. Purchasing purchase Order format 1 form layout

1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

X

4 5 6 7 8 911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

9 inches

11 inches

FAXPHONE

ORDER PLACED WITH:

SHIP

TO

BILL

TO

X

X

PAGE

FOB DESC.SHIP VIAP.O. DATE

SPECIAL CHARGES FREIGHT

QUANTITY

51525354555657585960616263646566

UNIT PRICE AMOUNT

TOTAL

VENDOR

BUYER:PHONE:

TERMS DELIVERY DATE

AUTHORIZED BY

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X X

X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X XX XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X XX

X

X

X X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X XX X X X XX X

P.O. NUMBER

X X X XX X X X X X / XX X X / X XX X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X XX X/ / X XX X X X XX X X XX XX X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X XX XX X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X

XXX XXX XXX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX X .... XXX X

X X X X XX X - X X

X X X XX X X X X. XX X XXX XX X X X XX X XX XX X XXXX X X X

XX XX X X

XX X

XX XX X X

XX X

XX X

X XXXXXX

XXXX

XX

XXX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

XX

X X X XX

X X X XX

X X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X XX X

XXX XXX

90

XXX X X XX X X X X .X X X X X X XX X X X X XX X . X X

X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X

XXX

X X X

X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X XX X X


Special forms


1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

X

4 678911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

8.5 inches

11 inches

ORDER PLACED WITH:

51525354555657585960616263646566

538

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

. .X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

XX

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

PHONE FAX

SHIP TO

BILL TO PAGE

P.O. NUMBERX X X X X X X - X X

X X / X X X X/

P.O. DATE

X X X X X X

SPECIAL CHARGESX X X X X XX .

X X X X X X

VENDORX X X X X X

SHIP VIAX X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X

FREIGHTX X X X X XX .

X X X X X X

FOB DESC.X X X X X X X X X

BUYER:PHONE:

X X X X X X

TERMSX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X / X X

DELIVERY DATEX X/



X X X X X


TOTAL

AUTHORIZED BY

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


Special forms

Figure C-44. Purchasing purchase order formats 0 and 2 sample

ORDER PLACED WITH:FAX

P . O

SHIP TO

BILL TO

PAGE


TOTAL

. NUMB E R

P.O. DATE VENDOR SHIP VIA F.O.B. DESC TERMS DELIVERY DATE

SPECIAL CHARGES FREIGHT BUYER:PHONE:

* P HA ER* U C S O D * *

PHONE

A

A

AUTHORIZED BY

R ER L

L

T

T

E

E

R

R

N

N

DOCK A T 3

3

5

5

A

A

L

L

P

P

H

H

F OR T E SWA R EHOU SS EC T I ON 41

1

4

4

1

1

5

5

H

H

O

O

L

L

C

C

O

O

M

M

B

B

B

B

R

R

I

I

D

D

G

G

E

E

D

D

R

R

R

R

O

O

S

S

W

W

E

E

L

L

G

G

A

A

3

3

0

0

0

0

6

6

-

-

1

1

4

4

U

U

S

S

A

A

0 0 1

B &M P L A S T I C S SU P L Y , I NC .PURCHA S I NGP . O . B OX 5 6 3 7SU I T E 6 35 6 3 MA P L E D RT I U S V I L E , F L 3 7 2 8 0

P 0 1 7 0 4 -

T I M UCK E R

1 - 4 0 5 3 2 8

I N EU RO DO L A R S

0 1 / 1 6 / * 1 2 3 4 5 A I R F R E I GH T F OB T E S 2 %1 0 N E T 3 0 S E BOD Y

D R EW S I L( 4 0 5 - 3 1 4 x 2 0 5

/ *

. 0 0

0

EA

ENG - RA I V I TM

D E L I V E R ON 2 / 2 6 / *

* OO A

RL

DI

EN

C. .

NDF

OI

LML

AA

TT T

QU 1 / 2

2 3 5

6

W H A D I T I ON A L D E SC R I P T I ON S

A

A

T

T

E

E

E ROWA

A

T

L

L

7

7

3

3

7

7

0

B I L A TOTA C OUNS EC T I ON 6

TL N AME *

C I NG9

0 0 0

P

T L

T

4 - 5 5 - 3 1 - 4 0 5 3 2 84 - 5 5 - 3

L

* T E

4 ) 5 5 3L S

1 I

I

T

T

E

E

M

M

- AU S T I N

I T D* 0 0

0

0 .

.

0 0

0

0

0

0 0

0

00 0

0

00 0

0

00 0

0

00 6

6

.4 1

1

4

EE

TT

SS

I MU LDESCHI P I NTT

ETDESH P GDWG D W NG EN

* RU

OS

RR

IS

NO ER I R DE YB *

6


Special forms

Figure C-45. Purchasing Vendor Acknowledgement sample

X


P . O

SHIP TO

BILL TO

PAGE


TOTAL

. NUMB E R



* V OR AN* E D S C N * *

PHONE

A

AUTHORIZED BY

K OW L T E RN DOCK A T 3 5 A L PH F OR T E SWA R EHOU SS EC T I ON 41 4 1 5 HOL COMB B R I DGE DRRO SWE L GA 3 0 0 6 - 1 4U SA

0 0 1


P 0 1 7 0 4 -

T I M UCK E R

1 - 4 0 5 3 2 8

I N E U R DOO L A RS

0 4 / 2 9 / * 1 2 3 4 5 A I R F R E I GH T F OB T E S 2 %1 0 N E T 3 0 S E BOD Y

D R EW S I L( 4 0 5 - 3 1 4 x 2 0 5

/ *

. 0 D Z 5. 0 1 .SH E RA 1 X 4 TH

DA T E SO F 0 7 1/ *

* ORD E CI

NN

FU

I. .

MA TDT

QU 1 / 2

2 3 5

6

N HSD I T INA H

A T EE ROW

A T

L 7 3 7

0

A L T E RN B I L A T 3 5 A L PHOTA C OUNS EC T I ON 61 4 1 5 HOL COMB B R I DGE DRRO SWE L GA3 0 0 6 - 1 4 U SA

A T ET

A

L7 3 7

L N AME *

C I NG9

0 0 0

P

T L

T

4 - 5 5 - 3 1 - 4 0 5 3 2 84 - 5 5 - 3

L

* T E

4 ) 5 5 3L S

1

* O T P

*

002 000 00

1 6 . 00000000

T U RAL S E VC OI N I C E POBSH O EFW L A # 0 X 3 /

* R O RS

I NLT LL AA RS

OOO

ER I R DE YB *

6

L NEDGME T

1 - TEN1 0 3 0

9 4 0, T , 9 / 1 6 0 0 6 K

* T S H AC S E ORD E R ** * O Y NG * * *

L A T R E C E I P T 8 /


Special forms

Figure C-46. Purchasing debit memo sample


P . O

SHIP TO

BILL TO

PAGE


TOTAL

. NUMB E R



* D TB* E I M D * *

PHONE

A

AUTHORIZED BY

O 0 L T ERN DOCK A T 3 5 A L PH F OR T E SWA R EHOU SS EC T I ON 41 4 1 5 HOL COMB B R I DGE DRRO SWE L GA 3 0 0 6 - 1 4U SA

0 0 1


P 01 2 8 9 -

T I M UCK E R

1 - 4 0 5 3 2 8

I N U S EU RO DOL A R S

1 0 / 0 2 / * 1 2 3 4 5 U P S OU R DOC C O D S E BOD Y

D R EW S I L( 4 0 5 - 3 1 4 x 2 0 5

/ *

. 0 E A 3 . 72 3 58

Q A T I NOT

1 1 2/ *

* OIR

ND E

UCS

NDTF

OOI

LT LLMA

AAT

SQU 1 / 2

2 3 5

6

N ERD S L

A T EE ROW

A T

L 7 3 7

0

A L T ERN B I L A T 3 5 A L PHOTA C OUNS EC T I ON 61 4 1 5 HOL COMB B R I DGE DRRO SWE L GA3 0 0 6

-

1 4 U SA

A T ET

A

L7 3 7

L N AME *

C I NG9

0 0 0

P

T L

T

4 - 5 5 - 3 1 - 4 0 5 3 2 84 - 5 5 - 3

L

* K E

4 ) 5 5 3L S

*

* O T P

*001 654

4 AL S DSH EP CIX S E7 0

* R. .

O RR

I NO ER I R DE YB *

6

D

OR I

T B L A NK E T*

* * O YVE DR E T EURN

0 /

EM 0 0 0 0 0 0 9

. . .

G I NA L* * * * *L I NE I T EM0 0 0

8 X 3 / 4 E T A T 00 20

* U P

21 3 . 5421

. 0 E A 3 . 700 6542 21 6 . 942

6 . 942

U N T Y D OR F OR CR ED I TI E S I NOT VE DR E T EU RNT M L B D OR F ORCR ED I T

W L E

Q A: 2 ET Y . 0 0 0

/1 0 2 3 / * *


Special forms


X

9 inches

11 inches


P. O. NUMBER

SHIP TO

BILL TO

PAGE


TOTAL

P.O. DATE VENDOR SHIP VIA F.O.B. DESC. TERMS DELIVERY DATE


PHONE

AUTHORIZED BY

-

X X / X X / X X

10321 4 5 6 7 8 9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

/

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X/

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XXXX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

.

X

XX

.

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

. .

.

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X.

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

XX X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

XX X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XX

XX

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566


Special forms


X

8.5 inches

11 inches

ORDER PLACED WITH:

P. O. NUMBER

SHIP TO

PAGE



SPECIAL CHARGES FREIGHT BUYER:

PHONE

AUTHORIZED BY

PHONE:

TOTAL

BILL TO

FAX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

10321 4 6789

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

375

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

/ /

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

/ /

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X XX X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

.

X

X

XX

XXX

.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X XXX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X . .

.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X XX

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X X

X

X

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566


Special forms

Quotation request

The Purchasing application uses this form to send a request for quotation to avendor.

Form width: 9˝Horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch

Form length: 11˝Vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch

First body line: 6Last body line: 60

Note: This form is actually 66 lines long. The application does not print anythingbeyond line 60. The “Authorized by” signature block may be placed on line 63. Thebody of the quotation is all printed by the application, it should not be preprinted onthe form.


Special forms

Figure C-49. Purchasing quotation request sample

PAGE

:MF R

AUTHORIZED BY

O YOU R F I N A E H1 2 3 M I N S T R E

Z I

:TO R & S P L A T I C , I N .P . O . B X 6 7 5A L N , 3 0 1 1

B RU : T HOMA S I: 4 0 - 9 5 6P

EYHON E

1

QUOTE NO.

30

QUOTE DATE*/0 9

V ENDOR NUMB E R 9 1 1 6 1

B ACK U P COP Y OF COD UME N T S E N T V I A E D I

RMA

YOU R TOWN ,

M EE T

TS A T E

RE

A DN P

SO

T A T A

S7.GA

C

0

SM4 - 0 0 0 0

TH

0 0 0 0

/0 7 *

NUMB E R 9 3 0 1METI 0 U M AE:/NRE TD IS C P II O : N Y L NO R DO S

N Y L NO R DO S T AH T AC N T HW I S T ANAN DE AH T1 R0 0 D EG E E

F BO : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ S IH : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _P IV A I : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _E HG TRFN TIU

T RE : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _MS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

SB A : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ S T : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _P CO : _ _ _ _ _ _ _EMD T IAE P R I CE E U S T EL DA Y S( )

UYO : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ : _ _ _ _ _ _ _E R D TI AMR I TE EUN MB E R NON E X P TA I ON _ _ _ _ _ _

U YA I TNER

Q TIP C

1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

1 . 0 0 0

5 0 0 0.0 0

U YA I TN ERQ T IP C

2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /

1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /1

0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /2

5 . 0 0 0

U YA I TN ERQ T IP C

3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1

5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1

8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1

1 . 0 0 00 0

RB E KA S_ _ _ _ _ _

P L E A S E SH I P B E TWE EN T H E HOUR S O F 9 : 0 0 AM A ND 5 : 0 0 PM MON -, F R I . T H ANK YOU

REFERENCE NUMBER


Special forms

Figure C-50. Purchasing quotation request form layout

1

10321

23456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

X

4 5 6 7 8 911

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

9 inches

11 inches

X

PAGE

51525354555657585960616263646566

:MF R

AUTHORIZED BY

90

O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

:TO X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

XX

B RU X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XP

EYHON E

X X X X

QUOTE NO.

X X X XX X

QUOTE DATE

X X X XX XX X

REFERENCE NUMBER

X X X XX XX XX X X XX XX XX X X XX XX XXV ENDOR NUMB E R X X X X X X

X

X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X

X X X X XX X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X

XX

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


Special forms


Container labels can be printed on a label to be put in the container or a card to beplaced in the container. You can use a single or a double format.


Container label - single or doubleformat

CLBLS-1UP or CLBLS-2UP

Blank

Figure C-51. Repetitive Production Management single container label


Special forms

Figure C-52. Repetitive Production Management double container label

Contents Index Exit Page D-1

Sample charts of accounts

Appendix D . Sample c har ts of accounts

Because the financial applications can be installed in both distribution andmanufacturing industries, a sample chart of accounts is included here for each typeof industry.

Many account descriptions in these charts of account exceed the 25 characterspace limit on the general ledger account description field (GLDES) on form GL-11.This form is included in this chapter following the charts of accounts. You should useabbreviations, where necessary, to hold the account descriptions within 25characters.

The following examples use four-position account numbers for the sake of simplicity.Keep in mind that the general ledger account number can be up to 15 positions toaccommodate more sophisticated numbering schemes.

Note: If IFM is installed, the chart of accounts has a different format. For moreinformation, see the IFM User’s Guide.



Chart of accounts–manufacturing

Income Taxes 9000-9999

9000 State income tax9020 Federal income tax9040 Local income tax9050 Deferred tax expense9090 Other income tax9200 Provision for profit or loss

Current assets 1000—1499

1000 Petty cash1050 Cash in bank–general1060 Cash in bank–payroll1070 Cash in bank–other1080 Credit union deposits1100 Short term investments1200 Accounts receivable–trade1220 Accounts receivable–employees1230 Intercompany payroll receivables1240 Accounts receivable–other1260 Notes receivable1280 Interest receivable1290 Allowance for doubtful accounts1300 Raw material inventory1320 Work in process inventory1340 Finished goods inventory1390 Allowance for inventory decline1400 Prepaid insurance1420 Prepaid taxes and licenses1440 Prepaid rent1460 Prepaid supplies1480 Travel advances1490 Prepaid expenses–other

Fixed assets 1500—1599

1500 Land1510 Land improvements1515 Buildings1520 Machinery and equipment1525 Office furniture and fixtures1530 Auto and trucks1535 Leasehold improvements1550 Allowance for depreciation–land improvements1555 Allowance for depreciation–buildings1560 Allowance for depreciation –machinery and equipment1565 Allowance for depreciation–office furniture and fixtures1570 Allowance for depreciation–auto and trucks1575 Allowance for amortization –leasehold improvements

Investments 1600—1699

1600 Investment in subsidiaries1620 Long-term investments



1630 Cash surrender value of life insurance

Other assets 1700—1799

1700 Deposits1750 Suspense1790 Miscellaneous

Current liabilities 2000—2499

2000 Accounts payable–vendors2020 Accounts payable–other2030 Notes payable–short-term2050 Interest payable2080 Dividends payable2090 Intercompany payroll payables2100 Accrued salaries and wages2110 Accrued vacation pay2120 Accrued holiday pay2130 Accrued real estate taxes2140 Accrued sales taxes2150 Accrued pension cost2190 Accrued expense–other2200 State withholding taxes payable2203 County withholding taxes payable2205 Local withholding taxes payable2210 Federal withholding tax payable2220 State unemployment tax payable2225 State disability insurance payable2230 Federal unemployment taxes payable2240 FICA payable (employee)2245 FICA payable (employer)2250 Union dues payable2255 Insurance premium payable2260 United Fund payable2265 Retirement account payable2270 Savings bonds payable2280 Garnishment payable2290 Credit union deposits2300 Reserve for federal income taxes2320 Reserve for state income taxes

Long-term liabilities 2500—2999

2500 Notes payable–banks2510 Notes payable–other2550 Bonds payable2600 Deferred tax payable2700 Other long-term liabilities

Stockholders’ equity 3000—3999

3000 Common stock3020 Preferred stock3040 Additional paid in capital3100 Treasury stock3200 Retained earnings



Income (revenue) 4000—4099

4000 Sales4050 Sales returns and allowances4080 Sales scrap

Cost of sales–material 4100—4199

4100 Purchases4120 Purchase discounts4130 Outside processing4150 Provision for inventory decline4180 Freight-in4190 Inventory change

Cost of sales–direct labor 4200—4299

4200 Set up4210 Production4290 Other direct labor

Cost of sales–manufacturing overhead 5000—6999

5010 Indirect labor maintenance and repair5020 Indirect labor–shipping/receiving5030 Indirect labor–cleaning5040 Indirect labor–supervision5050 Indirect labor–samples5060 Indirect labor–vacation5080 Indirect labor–warehouse5090 Indirect labor–other6010 Amortization of land improvements6020 Depreciation–building6030 Depreciation–machinery and equipment6040 Depreciation–autos and trucks6050 Amortization of leasehold improvements6110 Heat and light6120 Water6130 Insurance6140 Pension expense6160 Janitorial supplies6170 Packing supplies6180 Sundry supplies6190 Maintenance tools and supplies6210 Factory payroll taxes6230 Repairs–equipment6240 Repairs–building6260 Rent–equipment6270 Rent–buildings6300 Employment fees6320 Royalty expense6350 Samples and testing materials6370 Trash removal6390 Security expense6410 Warehouse expense6480 Taxes and licenses6490 Miscellaneous expense



6600 Other employee benefits

Administrative expenses 7000—7999

7010 Salaries–officers7020 Salaries–offices7030 Salaries–sales7040 Commissions7060 Directors’ fees7110 Provision for doubtful accounts7130 Credit expense7150 Legal, audit, and professional fees7170 Insurance–officers’ life7180 Insurance–other7210 Advertising expense7230 Travel and entertainment7250 Postage7270 Printing, stationery, and supplies7280 Telephone and telegraph7310 Payroll taxes–administrative7330 Taxes–other7410 Dues and subscriptions7420 Charitable contributions7450 Repairs–office equipment7470 Rent–office equipment7490 Miscellaneous expenses7510 Depreciation–office furniture and fixtures7520 Depreciation–autos7550 FICA taxes–employer

Other income and expense 8000—8999

8010 Interest expense8050 Interest income8080 Dividends earned8110 Royalty Income8150 Gain (Loss) on disposition of fixed assets8210 Recovery of bad debts8300 Discounts lost8400 Discounts earned

Income taxes 9000—9999




Chart of accounts–distribution

Current assets 1000—1499

1000 Petty cash1050 Cash in bank–general1060 Cash in bank–payroll1070 Cash in bank–other1080 Credit union deposits1100 Short term investments1200 Accounts receivable–trade1220 Accounts receivable–employees1230 Intercompany payroll receivables1240 Accounts receivable–other1260 Notes receivable1290 Allowance for doubtful accounts1300 Inventory1400 Prepaid insurance1420 Prepaid taxes and licenses1440 Prepaid rent1460 Prepaid supplies1480 Travel advances1490 Prepaid expenses–other

Fixed assets 1500—1599

1500 Land1510 Land improvements1515 Buildings1525 Office equipment1530 Autos and trucks1535 Leasehold improvements1550 Accumulated depreciation –land improvements1555 Accumulated depreciation–buildings1565 Depreciation–office equipment1570 Depreciation–autos and trucks1575 Amortization–leasehold improvements

Investments 1600—1699

1600 Investments in subsidiaries1620 Long-term investments1630 Cash surrender value of life insurance

Other assets 1700—1799

1700 Deposits1790 Miscellaneous

Current liabilities 2000—2499

2000 Accounts payable–vendors2020 Accounts payable–other2030 Notes payable–short-term2050 Interest payable2080 Dividends payable2090 Intercompany payroll payables



2100 Accrued compensation2120 Accrued personal property tax2130 Accrued real estate taxes2140 Accrued sales taxes2150 Accrued retirement plans2190 Accrued expenses–other2200 State withholding taxes2203 County withholding taxes payable2205 Local withholding taxes2210 Federal withholding taxes2220 State unemployment taxes payable2225 State disability insurance payable2230 Federal unemployment taxes payable2240 FICA withheld (employee)2245 FICA payable (employer)2250 Union dues withheld2255 Insurance premium withheld2260 United Fund withheld2265 Retirement account payable2270 Savings bonds withheld2280 Garnishment withheld2290 Credit union withheld2300 Accrued federal income taxes payable2320 Payable state income

Long-term liabilities 2500—2999

2500 Notes payable–banks2510 Notes payable–other2550 Bonds payable2600 Deferred tax payable2700 Other long-term liabilities

Stockholders’ equity 3000—3999

3000 Common stock3020 Preferred stock3040 Additional paid in capital3100 Treasury stock3200 Retained earnings

Income (revenue) 4000—4099

4000 Sales operations4050 Sales returns and allowances

Cost of goods sold 4100—4999

4100 Purchases4110 Freight in4120 Inventory change4130 Accounts payable change

Selling expenses 5000—5999

5000 Salaries–sales5010 Commissions5020 Travel and entertainment



5200 Insurance–health and welfare5300 Retirement costs5400 Vacation pay5500 Holiday pay5600 Other employee benefits5700 Advertising expense

General and administrative 6000-6999

6000 Salaries–officers6010 Salaries–office6100 Labor–shipping and receiving6110 Labor–warehouse6120 Labor–supervision6200 Insurance–health and welfare6300 Retirement costs6400 Vacation pay6500 Holiday pay6600 Other employee benefits

Outside services 7000—7099

7000 Employment fees7010 Royalty expense7020 Trash removal7030 Security expense7040 Professional fees

Materials and supplies 7100—7199

7100 Janitorial supplies7110 Packing supplies7120 Sundry supplies7130 Maintenance tools and supplies7140 Postage7150 Printing, stationery, and supplies

Depreciation and amortization 7200—7299

7250 Depreciation of land improvements7255 Depreciation of buildings7265 Depreciation of office7270 Depreciation of autos and trucks7275 Amortization of leasehold improvements

Rents 7300—7399

7300 Rent–equipment7310 Rent–buildings7320 Rent–autos and trucks

Utilities 7400—7499

7400 Heat and light7410 Water7420 Telephone and telegraph



Interest and taxes 7500—7599

7500 Interest expense7510 Real estate taxes7520 Sales taxes7530 State unemployment taxes7540 Federal unemployment taxes7550 FICA taxes–employer7560 Taxes other

Other operating expenses 7600—7699

7600 Bad debts expense7610 Dues and subscriptions7620 Charitable contributions7630 Repairs–building7640 Repairs–office equipment7650 Repairs–other7660 Directors fees7670 Insurance–fire and theft

Non-operating income and expense 8000—8999

8010 Interest income8050 Interest expense8080 Dividends earned8110 Royalty income8150 Gain (Loss) on disposition of fixed assets8200 Recovery of bad debts8300 Discounts lost8400 Discounts earned

Income taxes 9000—9999




General Ledger Master Offline File Load—Chart of Accounts

The General Ledger Offline File Load Master is used when you want to load yourChart of Accounts using a diskette or disk file.

LA

Company number General Ledger account number General Ledger type(COMNO) (N2) (GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (GLTYP) (N1) _General Ledger description Account type(GLDES) (A25) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (ACTYP) (A2) _ _

Currency IDConsolidation company number Consolidation account number

(CURID) (A3) _ _ _(CONCO) (N2) _ _ (CONAC) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

LB

Company numberGeneral Ledger account number

(COMNO) (N2)_ _ (GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

General Ledger typeBalance forward

(GLTYP) (N1)_ (BALFD) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 1 debitPeriod 2 debit

(P01DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P02DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _


(P03DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P04DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _


(P05DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P06DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

LCCompany number General Ledger account number

(COMNO) (N2)

_ _(GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

General Ledger type Period 7 debit

(GLTYP) (N1)_

(P07DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 8 debit Period 9 debit

(P08DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P09DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _


(P10DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P11DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _


(P12DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _(P13DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

LD

Company numberGeneral Ledger account number

(COMNO) (N2)

_ _ (GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

General Ledger type

Balance forward

(GLTYP) (N1)

_ (BALFD) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 1 credit

Period 2 credit

(P01CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P02CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 3 credit

Period 4 credit

(P03CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P04CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 5 credit

Period 6 credit

(P05CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P06CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

LECompany number

General Ledger account number

(COMNO) (N2)

_ _ (GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

General Ledger type

Period 7 credit

(GLTYP) (N1)

_ (P07CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 8 credit

Period 9 credit

(P08CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P09CR) (13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 10 credit

Period 11 credit

(P10CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P11CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

Period 12 credit

Period 13 credit

(P12CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(P13CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

_ _



Record Code. Enter one of the following codes to define the type of information youwant to enter for an account:

LA Account definition (required); only one LA record per account is allowed.LB Balance-forward debit and debit amounts for periods 1-6 (optional).LC Debit amounts for periods 7-13 (optional).LD Balance forward credit and credit amounts for periods 1-6 (optional).LE Credit amounts for periods 7-13 (optional).

Company number (COMNO). Enter the number of the one company for which youare loading the chart of accounts in this diskette batch.

General Ledger account number (GLANO). Enter the account number you aredefining.

General Ledger type (GLTYP). Enter one of the following valid codes to specifywhich accounting year is being affected:

1 Current year2 Budget year3 Previous year

Note: LA records must be coded with GLTYP=1.

General Ledger description (GLDES). Enter the account description that you wantto appear on General Ledger reports.

Account type (ACTYP). Enter the type of account to determine how the accountappears on financial statements:

AS Asset accountLI Liability accountICEX Expense account

Currency ID (CURID). This is a required field. Enter the currency ID to determine theset of exchange rates used to translate the balances for this account.

Consolidation company number (CONCO). Enter the company number used whenthis account is summarized for consolidation purposes.

Consolidation account number (CONAC). Enter the account number used whenthis account is summarized for consolidation purposes.

Balance forward and period amount fields (BALFD) (POxDR). These amountsreflect the total debit activity and total credit activity recorded for the month, ignoringany activity from previous months. As an option, you can enter opening balancesand period amounts for the current year up to the period in which you will firstprocess general journal transactions. You can enter previous-year amounts for allaccounting periods, but the calculated new balance forward must balance to thecurrent year opening balance. Enter budget records for income (revenue) andexpense accounts only.



Contents Index Exit Page E-1

Fax Interface overview

Appendix E. F ax Interface o verview

The MAPICS Fax Interface lets you fax MAPICS documents to your customers andvendors, directly from the MAPICS programs that print the document. You do nothave to print the document or handle pre-printed forms.

The MAPICS Fax Interface works with the Telex/Fax/400 products from AmericanPresence, Inc.1 These products provide:

• forms overlays for pre-printed MAPICS forms, that can be customized asrequired by the user, and are merged with the MAPICS “printed” documents forfaxing

• the management of the actual faxing: automatic dialing, redialing, logging, pre-timed deliveries, etc., and

• other faxing capabilities, including security/authorization control, viewing on PCsor printing of incoming faxes, cost analysis, etc.

• supports faxing the following documents from the MAPICS applications shown.

1 American Presence, Inc.1900 Harbor City Blvd. Suite 318Melbourne, FL 32901Phone: 321/726-9941 (Sales ext 318, Support ext 206)Fax: 321/726-6210email: [email protected]: www.american-presence.com

Document Applications

To Customers

Quote COM/KBC

Order Acknowledgment COM/KBC

Order Change Acknowledgment COM/KBC

Packing List/Advance Ship Notice COM/KBC

Invoice & Pro Forma COM/KBC

Credit Memo COM/KBC

To vendors

Quotation Request PUR

Planning Schedule MRP/PUR

Purchase Order PUR/PM

Purchase Order Change PUR/PM

Shipping Schedule PUR

Remittance Advice AM AP



• supports the definition, by customer and vendor, in customer maintenance forcustomers, and in vendor/entity maintenance for vendors of:

- what documents are to be faxed

- what documents are to be printed ( a document being faxed may optionallybe printed)

- optional “override” fax phone numbers by document type, where required,instead of the (one current) fax phone number.

The Fax Interface can be ordered by contacing MAPICS Customer support ordownloading SH116040 for the order form. When your order is approved, you arecontacted with an entitlement procedure. The Fax Interface function is documentedand supported as part of each of the applications listed above.

Ordering and installing the Fax Interface

Install Telex/Fax/400 . When you install the product, select the MAPICS XA link duringconfiguration; this installs a MAPICS interface in the product. If an earlier level of thefax product is installed, upgrade it to the required level, and install the MAPICSinterface. Also install the required fax hardware, on the AS/400. You can contactAmerican Presence, Inc. at 321/726-9941.

The MAPICS interface in Telex/Fax/400 loads the MAPICS pre-printed formsoverlays, and sets up the interfaces in Telex/Fax/400 for MAPICS XA.

Customize, as required, the MAPICS forms overlays supplied with Telex/Fax/400, toadd your company name, logo, etc..

Next, order from MAPICS customer support and install the MAPICS Fax Interface.

Telex/Fax/400 and its MAPICS interface must be installed before you can install theMAPICS Fax Interface as installing the Fax Interface adds logical files into the Telex/Fax/400 file library. Installing the MAPICS Fax Interface allows you to define theTelex/Fax/400 libraries to MAPICS and installs/activates the Fax Interface functions inMAPICS.

Faxing documents to your customers

Using COM Customer file Maintenance (Menu AMBM60, option 1), define whatdocument(s) you want to fax to each customer, and the phone number to use foreach document. This information is defined on the “Maintain Document/Media” panel(AMBMNDFR), which can be displayed from three panels in Customer FileMaintenance depending on whether IFM is installed. On the Maintain Customerpanel (AMVA0DVR, if IFM is not installed, or AMVCCDVR, if IFM is installed), selectoption 25=Document/Media . Or on the Edit Customer Address panel (AMVACE1R),type Y in the Telephone/Fax number...More? field.

Run the normal COM/KBC function to “print” the document to be faxed. If the faxmedia flag is on for that document for that customer. The document is identified witha “short code” ID for use by Telex/Fax/400, written to a separate fax spool file, anddirected by a printer override to a fax output queue which Telex/Fax/400 monitors.Telex/Fax/400 reads the short code ID and gets the customer fax information fromthe short code record then removes the short code ID from the document and



merges the document with a forms overlay if required, and faxes the document asdirected.

The packing list is identified on the list of document codes as the “Advancedshipping Notice”, the name of the EC transaction that contains that information.

Performing this maintenance sets flags in MAPICS to signal faxing of the documents,and builds “short code” records in Telex/Fax/400 to store the customer name and thefax phone number for each document to be faxed.

Faxing documents to your vendors

Using Purchasing Vendor Master File Maintenance (Menu AM6M60, option 2), definewhat documents you want to fax to each vendor and the phone number to use foreach document. This information is defined on the Vendor Master - File Maintenance(page 2 of 3) panel (AMV778).

On the panel enter the media flags to determine whether a document will be printed,faxed, and/or EDId (via EC). Override fax numbers when required for documents thatmust be faxed to a phone number other than the (one) default fax number defined foreach vendor.

Performing this maintenance sets flags in MAPICS to signal faxing of the documents,and builds “short code” records in Telex/Fax/400, to store the vendor name, and thefax phone number for each document to be faxed.

Run the normal Purchasing, MRP, or AP function to “print” the document to be faxed.If the fax media flag is on for that document for that vendor, the document isidentified with a “short code” ID for use byTelex/Fax/400 written to a separate faxspool file. It is then directed by a printer override to a fax output queue which Telex/Fax/400 monitors. Telex/Fax/400 reads the short code ID and gets the vendor faxinformation, then removes the short code ID from the document and merges thedocument with a forms overlay if required, and faxes the document as directed.



Contents Index Exit Page G-1

Glossary

Glossar y

This glossary defines terms that are important for this book. It does not include allMAPICS XA terms nor all terms established for your system. If you do not find theterm you are looking for, refer to the Index in this book or to glossaries in otherMAPICS XA publications.

This glossary includes definitions from:

• The American National Dictionary for Information Processing Systems,copyright 1982 by the Computer and Business Equipment ManufacturersAssociation (CBEMA). Copies may be purchased from the American NationalStandards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, New York 10018. Definitions areidentified by symbol (A) after definition.

• The ISO Vocabulary – Information Processing and the ISO Vocabulary – OfficeMachines, developed by the International Organization for Standardization,Technical Committee 97, Subcommittee 1. Definitions of published sections ofthe vocabulary are identified by symbol (I) after definition; definitions from draftinternational standards draft proposals, and working papers in development bythe ISO/TC97/SC1 vocabulary subcommittee are identified by symbol (T) afterdefinition, indicating final agreement has not yet been reached amongparticipating members.


Glossary

ACS. Application correction set.

AML tape. Application modification level tape.

application. The use to which a data processing system is put; for example,keeping a record of a company’s inventory.

application correction set (ACS). The program temporary fixes (PTFs) as well asthe programs necessary to apply the fixes that are contained on a maintenancetape.

application modification level (AML) tape. One of two types of maintenancetapes or CD.

application tailoring. The process of selecting application options to satisfy thespecific needs of a company.

AS/400 password. The unique string of characters known to the AS/400 systemand to a user, who must specify it to gain access to the AS/400 system.Synonymous with AS/400 user password.

AS/400 user profile. A user description known to the AS/400 system. It contains auser profile name and a user password.

AS/400 user profile name. A string of characters assigned to a user profile on theAS/400 system. It is the name by which you want the system to know the user.Synonymous with user name.

audit. To review and examine the activities of a data processing system mainly totest the adequacy and effectiveness of procedures for data security and dataintegrity. (T)

audit trail. Information that allows the history of an account, item record, order,etc., to be traced. The more recent information may be stored online for retrieval.

back up. To transfer specific objects or libraries from internal storage to magneticmedia, such as tapes, or to fixed disk, by duplication.

backup copy A copy of a file or library member that is kept for reference in casethe original file or library member is destroyed. The backup copy can be stored ondisk, diskette, or tape.

batch. An accumulation of data to be processed, as in a batch of transactions.

batch/lot control code The code <Y/N> indicating if an item requires batch/lotcontrol.

batch/lot number The field allowing unique identification of a specific batch or lotof an item. when an item is defined as having batch/lot control, all transactionsinvolving that item must carry the batch/lot number.

batch job. A job in which the processing functions are submitted as a predefinedseries of actions to be performed without continuous operator attention. See batchsubsystem. Contrast with interactive job.


Glossary

batch mode A method of running jobs that do not require continuous operationattention; that is, processing that is not interactive.

batch number. A number printed on a document to delineate a group oftransactions.

batch/lot number The number used to identify a batch or lot of an item. each itemcan have multiple batches or lots. When an item is defined as having batch/lotcontrol, all transactions involving that item must carry the batch/lot number.

batch subsystem (QBATCH). A subsystem in which batch jobs are to beprocessed. IBM supplies one batch subsystem: QBATCH.

batch update. The process of updating master files using a group of transactionsthat are being held in a transaction file. Contrast with immediate update.

character. A member of a set of elements that is used for the representation,organization, or control of data. Characters may be letters, digits, punctuationmarks, or other symbols. (T)

CL. Control language.

command. A request for the performance of an operation or the execution of aparticular program. A command consists of the command name, which identifiesthe requested function, and parameters.

configuration. The group of machines, devices, and programs that make up adata processing system. See system configuration.

control language (CL). A programming language that identifies processingrequirements to OS/400.

controlling subsystem (QCTL). An interactive subsystem that is startedautomatically when the system is started, and through which the system operatorcontrols the system. IBM supplies one controlling subsystem: QCTL.

cursor. A movable character (underscore) on a display that indicates where thenext character typed by the operator will appear.

data. A representation of facts, concepts, or instructions in a formalized mannersuitable for communication, interpretation, or processing by human or automaticmeans. (I) (A)

data entry. The act of recording a transaction in the book of account or master file.

data area. An object that is used to communicate data, such as CL variablevalues, between the programs within a job and between jobs. The system-recognized identifier is *DTAARA.

database. A collection of stored data.

dedicated mode. A mode of operation that requires that no other batch orinteractive MAPICS XA jobs are running. Many of the Cross Application Supportfunctions must be done in dedicated mode.


Glossary

default. An alternative attribute, option, or value that is assumed when none hasbeen specified.

disk. A round flat plate coated with a magnetic substance on which data for acomputer is stored.

disk file. An organized collection of related records on disk that are treated as aunit.

disk storage. Direct access storage that uses one or more magnetic disks to storedata files and programs.

diskette. A small, flexible, magnetic disk permanently enclosed in a protectivejacket. Diskettes are a removable medium used to store information until it isrequired for processing.

display. (1) A visual presentation of data. (I) (A) (2) The part of a workstation onwhich data, messages, or other information is displayed.

edit. To verify the form or format of data; for example, to test a data field such ascustomer number.

enter. To send coding, data, or a message to a computer from a keyboard.

field. In a form, display, or record, a specified area used for a particular category ofdata. For example, the area on a display that is regularly used to show an itemnumber.

file. An organized collection of related records treated as a unit.

file maintenance. The online process of updating MAPICS XA application masterfiles.

function key. One of the keys of the workstation keyboard to request specificfunctions from the system or application program.

ID. Identifier.

immediate update. The process of updating master files where individualtransactions are applied to the file as soon as they are entered. Contrast with batchupdate.

initial program load (IPL). A sequence of events that loads the system programsand prepares the system for execution of jobs.

inquiry. A request for information in storage.

interactive job. A job in which the processing actions are performed in responseto input provided by a work station or system operator. During the job, a dialogexists between the operator and the system. Contrast with batch job.

interactive subsystem (QINTER). A subsystem in which interactive jobs are to beprocessed. IBM supplies three interactive subsystems: QCTL, QINTER, andQPGMP (programmer subsystem).


Glossary

interface. The facility to allow applications to pass or share information.

IPL. Initial program load.

job queue. A list of jobs waiting to be processed by the system.

library. An object that is a directory to other objects. A library is used to grouprelated objects and to find objects by name when they are used. Libraries cancontain data files, source files, and program objects; the files can also containmembers.

load. To enter data or programs into storage; for example, to load a master file.

main menu. The first menu in a series of menus.

main storage. Storage in the processing unit where all logical, arithmetic, andcontrol operations take place under program control.

maintenance tape. A tape containing application correction sets used forupdating MAPICS XA program. There are two kinds of maintenance tapes: aprogram corrective maintenance tape (PCM) and an application modification leveltape (AML).

MAPICS XA. Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information ControlSystem Extended Advantage.

master file. A file that is used as an authority in a given job and that is relativelypermanent, even though its contents may change. (I) (A)

menu. A displayed list of items from which the operator makes a selection.

message. A series of words or symbols, appearing on the display screen orprinted output, that convey information.

multiprogramming. (1) A mode of operation that provides for the interleavedexecution of two or more computer programs by a single processor. (I) (A) (2)Pertaining to current execution of two or more computer programs by a computer.(A)

object. A named unit that consists of a set of descriptive characteristics (thatdescribe the object) and data. An object is anything that exists and occupies spacein storage, and on which operations can be performed. Some examples of objectsare programs, files, and libraries.

offline. Pertaining to equipment or devices not under control of the processingunit. Contrast with online.

offline data entry. A form of data entry in which data is read into the computingsystem from offline files.

online. Pertaining to equipment or devices under direct control of the processingunit. Contrast with offline.

OS/400. The operating system for the IBM AS/400 system.


Glossary

parameter. A value that is specified in a command.

password. An alphanumeric security code that allows access to a set of computeroperations or data. See user password.

PCM tape. Program corrective maintenance tape.

program-described file. A file in which record fields are described in the programthat processes the file.

procedure. One or more CL programs that cause a specific function or set offunctions to be performed.

processing unit. The part of a computer system that operates on data.

Product Support Center (PSC). Support personnel who you can contact to helpyou with your MAPICS XA applications.

program. An object that contains a set of instructions that tells a computer whereto get input data, how to process it, and where to put the results.

program corrective maintenance. The process of updating MAPICS XAprograms by loading either a program corrective maintenance tape (PCM) or anapplication modification level (AML) tape and applying the application correctionsets (ACSs) that are on the tape.

program corrective maintenance (PCM) tape or CD. One of two types ofmaintenance tapes. The PCM tape or CDis sent to the customer upon request.

prompt. A symbol or message to an operator requesting information or describingan action that is needed to continue processing.

PSC. Product Support Center.

QBATCH. See batch subsystem.

questionnaire. A unique set of questions for each MAPICS XA application firstanswered when the application is installed and used to tailor the application to meetyour company’s need.

record. (1) A collection of related data that is treated as a unit. For example, oneline of an invoice could constitute a record. (2) To store data on a reusable input/output medium, such as a disk, diskette, or punched cards.

register. A record for the consecutive entry of a certain class of events,documents, or transactions, with a proper notation of all the required particulars.

session. The period of time during which a user of a terminal can communicatewith an interactive system, usually, elapsed time between logon and logoff or sign-on and sign-off.

sign off. To end a session at a workstation.

sign-off. The procedure by which an operator ends a workstation session.


Glossary

sign on. To begin a session at a workstation.

sign-on. The procedure by which an operator begins a workstation session.

source document. The original record of a transaction.

spooling (Simultaneous peripheral operation online). (1) Reading and writinginput and output streams on an intermediate device in a format convenient for laterprocessing or output. (2) Performing a peripheral operation such as printing whilethe computer is busy with other work.

SYSCTL file. System control file.

system configuration. A process that specifies the devices and programs thatform a particular data processing system.

system control file. A program-described file containing the answers to theinstall/tailor questionnaires for all MAPICS XA applications.

system date The date assigned by the system operator during initial programload. Generally, the system date is the same as the actual date.

system operator. A person who uses a workstation to activate certain systemfunctions and to control and monitor system operation.

system printer. The printer, designated during system configuration, that is usedfor system and workstation printed output, unless the output is specifically directedto another printer.

transaction. An item of business, such as receipt of an order or paying a bill.

update. To modify a file with current information according to a specifiedprocedure.

user ID. A special value assigned to an operator and typed in when the operatorsigns on. The system uses the value to determine whether the operator isauthorized to use the system or requested function.

user password. A string of characters known to a system and a user to allowaccess to a system. See AS/400 password.

user profile. See AS/400 user profile.

user profile name. See AS/400 user profile name.

workstation. An input/output device that contains a display on which data isshown and an attached keyboard through which data is entered.


Glossary

Contents Index Exit Page IN-1

Index

Index

AAccounts Payable

questionnaire B-7special forms C-4

Accounts Receivablequestionnaire B-17special forms C-9

activating interfaces after installation 4-2application tailoring 2-1applications having no install/tailor questions B-1AS/400 security levels 3-3auditing and controlling data

backing up data 5-3controlling access to data 5-3correct sequence of operations 5-4creating an audit trail 5-2data accuracy 5-3

Bbacking up data 5-3batch job queues 5-5

CCapacity Requirements Planning

questionnaire B-29chart of accounts, sample

distribution D-6manufacturing D-2

COM_Netquestionnaire B-39

conflicts, procedure or data 5-5Contract Accounting (CA) B-1Cross Application Support

questionnaire B-3Customer Order Management


Ddate format for MAPICS XA 3-3dedicated mode 5-5

EElectronic Commerce (EC), no questionnaire B-1Enterprise Product Data Management

questionnaire B-41environments (Extended Environment Support)

creating 4-3for testing 4-2

Estimating and Quote Management (EQM), no questionnaire B-1eWorkPlace—graphical user interface for MAPICS XA 1-13Executive Information System (EIS), no questionnaire B-1


Index

Ffiles, master. See master filesFinancial Analysis questionnaire B-49Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS), no questionnaire B-1Forecasting questionnaire B-53forms, special

about C-2Accounts Payable C-4Accounts Receivable C-9Customer Order Management C-16Manufacturing Performance Analysis C-20Payroll C-21Production Control and Costing C-29Production Monitoring and Control C-32Purchasing C-49Repetitive Production Management C-61

GGeneral Ledger

questionnaire B-63General Ledger Master File Load—Chart of Accounts form–GL-11 D-10graphical user interface for MAPICS XA—eWorkPlace 1-13group job support, setting up 4-4

Iinitial application installation 3-4install/tailor 3-4installation

AS/400 hardware and operating system 3-2AS/400 security (user profiles) 3-2AS/400 security levels for MAPICS XA 3-3AS/400 subsystem configuration for MAPICS XA 3-3checklists, using 1-2, 1-3initial application installation 3-4install/tailor 3-4MAPICS XA date format 3-3

interfacesactivating 4-2summary table 2-4

International Financial Managementquestionnaire B-71

InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL), no questionnaire B-1Inventory Management

questionnaire B-75

Jjob queues, multiple batch

about 5-5jobs, unattached 5-6

KKnowledge Based Configurator (KBC) B-1


Index

Llibraries

on install tapes 1-5on PCM tapes 1-6on source tapes 1-5

license key 1-2license management 1-2license, registered user 1-2license, tier user 1-2

MManufacturing Performance Analysis


Market Monitoring and Analysis (MMA), no questionnaire B-1master files

entering data into 3-5gathering information for before installation 2-23

Master Production Schedule Planningquestionnaire B-101

Material Requirements Planningquestionnaire B-105

Materials Management (MM), no questionnaire B-1

Nnote tasks

activating 4-6deactivating 4-6reorganizing 4-6setting up 4-5

OOrder-Based Production Management (OBPM), no questionnaire B-1

PPayroll


prerequisites, MAPICS XA application 2-2print spooling 5-7Procurement Management (PM), no questionnaire B-1Product Data Management

questionnaire B-123Production Control and Costing


Production Monitoring and Controlquestionnaire B-159special forms C-32

Purchasingquestionnaire B-171special forms C-49

QQSECURITY, security levels 3-3


Index

questionnairesabout 2-1Accounts Payable B-7Accounts Receivable B-17activating interfaces summary table 2-4Capacity Requirements Planning B-29COM_Net B-39Cross Application Support B-3Customer Order Management B-31Enterprise Product Data Management B-41Financial Analysis B-49Forecasting B-53General Ledger B-63International Financial Management B-71Inventory Management B-75Manufacturing Performance Analysis B-95Master Production Schedule Planning B-101Material Requirements Planning B-105Payroll B-107Product Data Management B-123Production Control and Costing B-131Production Monitoring and Control B-159Purchasing B-171Repetitive Production Management B-187Sales Analysis B-193

Rregistered user license 1-2Repetitive Production Management


SSales Analysis questionnaire B-193scheduling the work

daily 5-4multiple batch job queues 5-5print spooling 5-7storage capacity 5-6unattached jobs 5-6

securityAS/400 levels for MAPICS XA 3-3AS/400 subsystem configuration for MAPICS XA 3-3AS/400 user profiles 3-2establishing for MAPICS XA 4-3

sign-ons, tailored 4-3special forms

about C-2Accounts Payable C-4Accounts Receivable C-9Customer Order Management C-16Manufacturing Performance Analysis C-20Payroll C-21Production Control and Costing C-29Production Monitoring and Control C-32Purchasing C-49Repetitive Production Management C-61


Index

storage capacity 5-6subsystem configuration, MAPICS XA 3-3supplies 1-4

Ttailored sign-ons 4-3tailoring your applications 2-1tapes, MAPICS XA

install 1-4, 1-5source 1-5

testing your applications 4-2tier user license 1-2

Uunattached jobs 5-6user profiles, AS/400 3-2Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation 1-13


Index